Oass TCismJ 

Copyright N° 

COPYRIGHT DEPOStT. 



Ibeatb's fll>oï>ern Xanôuage Séries 
EXERCISES 

IN 

FRENCH SYNTAX AND 
COMPOSITION 

WITH NOTES AND VOCABULARY 



BY 



JEANNE M. BOUVET 

TEACHER OF FRENCH IN THE SOUTH DIVISION HlGH ScHOOL. CHICAGO 



- • 



D. C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS 
1901 



UBRARY 
CON6RESS, 
|Two Coptes Received 

APR. 13 1901 

Copyright entrv 
ÏUtesO/XXc. N».l 

7 T'A 

COPY 8. 



€ 



<ft 



n* 



<9 



->n 



Copyright, 1901, 
By D. C, Heath & Co. 



îJîltmptcm ^Press 

H. M. PLIMPTON & CO., PRINTERS & EINDERS, 
NORWOOD, MASS., U.S.A. 



PREFACE. 



The chief obstacle to obtaining the best results from a course 
in French composition, is usually the student's lack of practice 
in applying the elementary rules and principles of grammar; 
yet, thèse must be mastered if he desires to speak or write the 
languagé correctly, or even to read it intelligently. The con- 
viction that this mastery can be obtained only by thorough and 
systematic work from the foundations, has led to the prépara- 
tion of a text-book, which I should not venture to submit to 
the attention of teachers of French, if its practicability had not 
been thoroughly tested in the class-room. 

It is hoped that the novel plan of combining, in the same 
volume, exercises in grammar and syntax with sélections for 
prose composition, will recommend itself to teachers for reasons 
of economy and of convenience for référence, but especially 
because such an arrangement insures progressive work in gram- 
matical construction, side by side with practice in composition, 
to the end of the course. In schools and collèges where a 
short elementary grammar only is used, this book should be 
found especially valuable as supplementing or completing the 
study thus begun, and affording an opportunity to utilize the 
rules and new facts necessarily acquired in too rapid succession 
from such works. On the other hand, where more time is 
devoted to grammar and larger text-books are used, it seems 
equally necessary to review and emphasize the great universals 
of the languagé. 

This has been my sole aim in the sélection of topics treated 
in Part L, which lays no claim to grammatical completeness, 



IV PREFACE. 

but includes a number of subjects oftering spécial difficulties to 
American students, and on which they need more practice than 
grammars usually give. The material in thèse exercises has 
been graded with the utmost care, so that, with copious foot- 
notes and a complète vocabulary, students might be able to 
translate the fîrst of them early in their course. My endeavor 
has been to make the majority of the sentences mean some- 
thing, to make them express a thought or an idea in a language 
that should be simple, natural, and sufficiently idiomatic. Rules 
and inflections to which pupils can be easily referred in any 
grammar previously studied, hâve been omitted, while certain 
subjects are supplied with extra exercises. 

Part II. consists of interesting sélections for connected trans- 
lation, taken from French sources and relating to French 
topics, chiefly historical, biographical, and literary. The style 
of thèse sélections, however, is neither stiff nor formai, as is 
too apt to be the case with composition work on thèse subjects. 
My aim has not been to impose upon the pupil a polish and 
an élégance of expression which would be unnatural to him if 
he were using his own tongue, but to furnish him with ordinary, 
though correct and idiomatic, English, so constructed that, 
with the aids given, it might readily be turned into good 
French. The size and character of the vocabulary will show 
that quite a variety of styles has been exemplified. 

The book is planned in such a way that continuous work in 
syntax can be made to alternate with the translation of the 
connected prose, after the fîrst lessons in grammar hâve been 
reviewed. In a collège course of three years, the grammatical 
review of the fîrst year might extend through the study of the 
pronouns ; that of the second, through the conditional con- 
structions ; that of the third, devoted to the study of the sub- 
junctive and past participle. This work is so graded in difficulty 
that each division may be supplemented by one of the sections 
of Part IL, marked respectively Easy Prose Composition, More 



PREFACE. V 

Advanced Prose Composition, and Idiomatic Prose Composition, 
thus varying the lessons, but effecting a closer connection 
between practice in composition and the higher study of gram- 
mar, — subjects too often separated. Of course, other schemes 
of arrangement may be devised according to the âge of pupils 
and the length of the course in différent schools. 

I would strongly recommend that instructors require fréquent 
oral and written reviews of both exercises and sélections after 
correction. I need not say that the systematic study of regular 
and irregular verbs is an indispensable part of the plan of work 
hère suggested. 

Great pains hâve been taken to make the notes easily com- 
préhensible to the student and adapted to his needs ; in the 
amount of help given, I hâve considered the necessities of 
each exercise rather than its position in the book. The 
vocabulary also was made slowly and with much care, so as to 
secure completeness and accuracy in that part of the book 
where thèse are most désirable. As, however, errors and 
omissions are only too possible, any corrections or suggestions 
will be gratefully received. 

JEANNE M. BOUVET. 

Chicago, January, 1901. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 

PART I. 
EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

PAGE 

1. The Partitive Article (Some or Any) . 3 

2. Syntax of the Definite Article . . . . ■ . . . 5 

3. Omission of the Article 6 

4. Plural of Nouns ... 7 

5. Féminine and Plural of Adjectives 9 

6. Conjunctive Personal Pronouns ....... 10 

a. Two Pronoun Objects before the Verb in Déclarative, 

Interrogative, and Négative Sentences . . . .11 

b. Personal Pronoun Objects of Verbs in the Imperative Mood 12 

c. Personal Pronoun Objects of Reflexive Verbs in the Impera- 

tive Mood 13 

d. En, Y, Le 14 

e. Direct and Indirect Objects combined vvith En and Y after 

Verbs in the Imperative Mood 17 

7. Disjunctive Personal Pronouns 18 

8. Possessive Pronouns ......... 20 

9. Démonstrative Pronouns 21 

10. When to use " ce," when " il " with Etre 25 

il. Interrogative Pronouns 28 

12. Relative Pronouns .31 

13. Indefinite Adjectives and Pronouns 34 

14. Tout, Même, Quelque, Quel . . . qtie 38 

15. Verbs conjugated with Etre 40 

16. Reflexive Verbs 41 

17. Active Voice with On for Subject 43 

vii 



Vlll TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



PAGE 

18. Four Important Modal Verbs .44 

a. Devoir . 44 

b. Falloir 48 

c. Pouvoir 52 

d. Vouloir .......... 55 

19. Uses of the {a) Past Indefinite, (o) Past Definite, and (c) Im- 

perfect 59 

20. Conditional Constructions ........ 62 

21. The Subjunctive. Principal Cases of its Use .... 65 

Case I. The Subjunctive depending upon Verbs and Con- 

junctions 66 

Case II. The Subjunctive depending upon Impersonal Con- 
structions 70 

Case III. The Subjunctive in Relative Clauses ... 72 

Case IV. The Subjunctive in Négative or Interrogative Sen- 
tences 75 

22. Minor Cases of the Subjunctive 77 

23. Séquence of the Tenses of the Subjunctive with those of the 

Indicative ......... 78 

24. Principal Cases of the Agreement of the Past Participle . . 79 

Case I. The Past Participle used without the Auxiliary . 79 

Case II. The Past Participle used with Etre .... 79 

Case III. The Past Participle used with Avoir ... 80 

Case IV. The Past Participle of Refiexive Verbs ... 80 



PART IL 

EASY PROSE COMPOSITION. 

1. The Childhood of Duguesclin 87 

2. Duguesclin and the " Free Companies " 88 

3. Duguesclin a Prisoner in Spain ....... 89 

4. Duguesclin a Constable of France ...... 90 

5. Exploits of Chevalier Bayard 91 

6. Anecdotes about Louis XI. 93 

7. Henry IV., King of Navarre 94 

8. The Youth of Sully 96 

9. The Youth of Richelieu 98 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. IX 

PAGE 

10. Colbert, Minister of Louis XIV. 99 

11. Death of Louis XVI 100 

12. Napoléon Bonaparte loi 

13. Marriage of Napoléon with Marie -Louise 102 

MORE ADVANCED PROSE COMPOSITION. 

1. Les Précieuses Ridicules, by Molière 104 

2. An Adventure of Rabelais . -105 

3. The Story of Jacques Amyot 107 

4. Jean-Baptiste Lulli .112 

5. La Mare-au-Diable, by George Sand 115 

6. The Silent Academy 120 

7. Chateaubriand 121 



IDIOMATIC PROSE COMPOSITION. 

1. Literary Notes on Some Authors of the Seventeenth Century: 

a. Corneille . . .124 

b. Molière 128 

c. Boileau 131 

d. La Fontaine 133 

e. Racine .......... 137 

f. Madame de Sévigné 139 

2. Genius of Balzac compared with that of George Sand . . 143 



VOCABULARY I49 



Part I. 

EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 



:>;*:< 



1. THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE (S021/E OR AN Y). 

Some or any may often be omitted in English. Their French 
équivalents du, de la, de 1', des, are nearly always expressed. 
Thèse articles are sometimes changed to de or d', without 
regard to the gender or number of the noun limited. This 
change is to be noted especially in the follovving cases : — 

a. When an adjective précèdes the noun.* If it follows the 
noun, du, de la, de 1', or des is used. 

b. After adverbs of quantity, such as beaucoup = imtch or 
many ; peu = Utile oxfew ; plus = more ; moins = les s or fewer ; 
assez = e no ugh ; trop = too much, too many; tant = so much, 
so many ; autant = as much, as many, etc. 

c. After verbs in the négative. Affirmative English verbs. 
followed by the indefinite adjective no and a noun, are trans- 
lated into French by the négative form of the verb followed 
by de or d'. Ex. : we hâve no friends hère = nous n'avons pas 
d'amis ici. 

d. When a noun is limited by an adjective phrase composed 
of de and another noun ; un morceau de pain = a pièce of bread ; 
un bracelet d'or= a gold bracelet; un lit de fer = an iron bed. 
Observe that, -in many cases, the descriptive phrase may be 

* In a decree, dated July 31, 1900, the Minister of Public Instruction 
in France authorizes the use of du, de la, de l\ des, instead of de or a", 
before nouns preceded by adjectives. 

3 



4 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

converted into a single English noun, which then performs the 
office of an adjective. 

Note. — In the following exercise, as indeed in every case, the student 
should bear in mind that some or any must not only be supplied but 
repeated in the French translation, wherever thèse words would not be out 
of place in English. 

Exercise 1. 

i. Racine had 1 genius. 2. Numerous 2 armies invaded 3 
Greece. 4 3. Madame de Sévigné wrote 5 charming 6 letters. 
4. Why do you live alone hère? Hâve you no relatives? no 7 
friends ? no children ? 5. Many people 8 sacrifice 9 the présent 
to the future. 6. Racine and Corneille wrote 10 admirable 6 
tragédies. 7. So much goodness reveals 11 a noble 12 soûl. 
8. I prefer 13 your cloth dress to 14 your silk one. 15 9. I will 
not make you 16 any apologies. 10. Alexander conquered 3 
immense 2 countries. n. Racine has less su blimity ; Corneille 
possesses more depth. 12. I know 17 few people 18 capable of 
sacrificing 19 their interests. 13. Enough wretchedness tor- 
ments the people. 20 14. The queen wore 1 a magnificent 
necklace of diamonds. 15. JBossuet's 21 éloquence has much 
loftiness ; that 22 of Fénélon has much grâce, 23 but it has not as 
much force. 24 16. Venice has incomparable 2 marvels; her 25 
ancient splendor has left ineffaceable 2 memories. 17. Too 
much rest lessens the vigor of the body. 18. We ate 5 a 
pièce of cake and 26 drank 5 a glass of wine. 19. There is 27 
never any oil in your lamp. 20. Little 2 causes hâve often 28 
produced great 2 effects. 

1 use imperfect. 2 ail adjectives in this exercise should précède the 
noun unless otherwise indicated; turn 'some numerous armies.' 3 past 
definite. 4 requires defmite article. 5 past indefmite. 6 place after 
the noun. 7 do not repeat pas. 8 monde, m. 9 singular. 10 past 
indefmite of composer. u annoncer. 12 belle. Và aimer mieux. 
14 que. lb repeat the noun. 16 place before the verb. 17 connaître. 
18 gens, m. pi. 19 infinitive présent. 20 peuple, m. 21 ' the éloquence 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 5 

of.' 22 celle. 23 douceur, f. 24 énergie, f. 25 son. 26 repeat the 
subject. 2T put «' before the verb and replace pas by jamais. 28 place 
after participle. 

2. SYNTAX OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

The defmite article is used in French : — 

i . Before abstract nouns*. 

2. Before common nouns used in a gênerai sensé. 

3. Before nouns expressing measure, weight, number, where the 

indefinite article is used in English. 

4. Before geographical names, except towns, and before titles. 

5. Before naines of sciences and metals. 

6. Before parts of the body, instead of the possessive adjective, 

where the meaning is not equivocal. 

Exercise 2. 

1. Opinion is queen of the world. 2. Happiness is less dé- 
pendent upon 1 circumstances than upon character. 3. Death, 
like birth, is a mystery of nature. 4. Riches rarely 2 profit 
those who acquire them. 5. To encourage virtue is to pun- 
ish vice. 6. The world was 3 made for man, and raan for 
heaven. 4 7. Work is the inexhaustible 2 source of pure 2 and 
real 2 pleasures. 8. Noble 5 deeds excite admiration. 9. Vices 
form a chain of which 6 selfishness is the first link. 10. There 
are four maladies difficult to cure : love of self, avarice, vain- 
glory, and ambition. 11. Man is ever the same ; at ten, 7 he 
is enticed by sweets ; at thirty, by pleasures ; at forty, by am- 
bition ; at fifty, by avarice. 12. This beautiful lace costs 8 fifty 
francs a mètre. 13. Astronomy is the science of the heavenly 2 
bodies. 14. The Romans conquered 9 Asia as well as Africa. 
15. Happiness dépends more upon 10 the affections than upon 11 
events. 16. Great thoughts corne from the heart. 17. The 
highest mountains of the globe are in Thibet. 18. Fontenelle 
looked 12 upon life as a dream whose 13 awakening is death. 



O EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

19. None of the productions of man is 14 eternal. 20. As soon 
as I am awake, 15 I wash 16 my hands, face, and neck with 17 soap 
and water. 

1 de. 2 place after the word modifiée!. 3 est. 4 use plural. 6 belles. 
6 ■ of which the first link is selfishness.' 7 add ans after this numéral, but 
after no other in the sentence. 8 se vend. 9 past indefinite. 10 tient 
plus aux. n qu'aux. 12 imperfect. 13 insert le. 14 n'est. 15 reduce 
this clause to aussitôt éveillé. 16 reflexive. 17 insert ' some ' before both 
nouns. 

^ OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE. 

The article is omitted : — 

1. When a noun is taken in apposition with another. 

2. In proverbial expressions. 

3. In enumerations, for the sake of conciseness. 

4. Before words used in apostrophe. 

5. Before nouns indicating a title, profession, nationality, religious 

dénomination, when thèse are used adjectively. 

6. Before the title of a book or chapter. 

7. After the indefinite adjective quel = what, in exclamations. 

8. After names of kings, followed by numerals indicating order in a 

dynasty. 

9. After such prépositions as en, avec, sans, par, sur, etc., when 

they combine with the following noun to form an adverbial or 
adjective phrase. 
10. After certain verbs, followed directly by nouns with which they 
frequently form idioms, as : — 

Avoir coutume de, to be used to. Faire attention à, to mind. 

Avoir envie de, to hâve a mind to. Faire cas de, to value, to think well 

Avoir pitié de, to pity. of. 

Avoir raison de, to be right. Faire plaisir à, to please, to give 

Ajouter foi à, to believe in. pleasure. 

Courif risque de, to run the risk of. Faire mine de, to prétend. 

Faire bonne chère, to live well. Faire fond sur, to count îipon. 

Faire peur à, to frighten. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. J 

Exercise 3. 

i N * Monsieur Thiers was 1 born at 2 Marseilles, a very ancient 3 
city in the south 4 of France. 2. Women, children, old men 
— ail 5 were massacred. 3. What a noise you are making, chil- 
dren ! 4. My father is alawyer. 5. Victor Hugo was buried 
in the 6 Panthéon, an honor which he well 3 deserved. 7 6. O 
passions ! you who hâve caused so many 8 evils, I dread you 
more than death. 7. A gentle 9 rain quiets a great wind (Prov- 
erb). 8. A rolling 10 stone gathers no 8 moss (Proverb). 

9. Prayers, tears — nothing has any effect 11 on a hard 3 heart. 

10. His father is an Englishman, and his mother is an Italian. 

1 1 . The church of 12 Saint Mark, in 2 Venice, surpasses in splen- 
dor, in color, in richness of mosaic, anything that one 13 can 
imagine. 12. He has always received me 14 with kindness. 
13. You run the risk 15 of being' 16 ill treated. 14. Your friend 
always 3 has a 12 good appetite. 15. Why are you thus without 
money, without friends? 16. Your conduct has given 15 me 
pleasure. 17. I dépend 15 upon your friendship. 

1 est. 2 ' at,' ' to,' or ' in ' must be translatée! by à before names of cities. 
3 place after the word modified. 4 du Midi. 5 tout; predicate must 
agrée in the singular. 6 a été inhumé au. 7 imperfect. 8 de or the 
contracted article? * petite. 10 change participial adjective to relative 
clause, and place after the noun. n n'a d'empire. 12 omit this word. 
13 tout ce que F on. 14 before or after the verb ? 15 see list of idiomatic verbs 
under rules. 16 the infinitive is used atter ail prépositions except en, which 
requires the présent participiez 

4. PLURAL OF NOUNS. 

Review rules and exceptions for the formation of Plural of Nouns. 

Exercise 4. 

1. God has given 1 wool to the lambs, fur 9 to the wild 2 
beasts, and feathers to birds. 2. Owls are night 3 birds that 
hâve round eyes. 4 3. Two pupils may be 5 rivais in their 6 



8 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

studies, and friends during 7 their récréations. 4. The muséums 
of the Louvre contain * beautiful enamels. 5. The balls of the 
opéra in Paris hâve a great réputation. 6. Bplts can not bar out 8 
thought. 7. There are 1 blues of différent shades. 8. Men fear 
death which ends ail their evils. 9. The hair 9 is 9 the ornament 
of the head. 10. The French are the rivais rather than the 
enemies of the English. 11. The knees are flexible like 1 
springs. 12. Iron is the most useful of 10 minerais; wheat, the 
most useful of vegetables ; and the horse, the most useful of 
animais. 13. Nature purifies water 9 by the fire 9 of volcanoes. 
1 4 There are plants which grow u between 12 pebbles. 1 5 . The 
roots of trees resemble 13 little tubes. 16. The rich 9 drive 14 in 
élégant landaus. 17. My house is surround ed with 15 cabbages 
and lettuce. 9 18. The most beautiful jewels of a mother are her 
children. 19. Of ail the ancient carnivals, that 16 of Venice 
was 17 the most brilliant. 20. One sees few 18 well formed noses 
and necks. 19 

1 insert ' some.' 2 place after noun, and translate by fauves. 3 ' some 
birds of night.' 4 'the eyes round.' 5 peuvent être. 6 les. 7 dans. 
8 ' bar out ' = arrêter. 9 put in the plural. 10 ' of the.' u naissent. 
12 insert les. 13 ressemblent à de. 14 se promènent en. 15 translate 
' with ' by de before both nouns. 16 use the démonstrative pronoun celui. 
17 imperfect. 18 use de before both nouns. 19 ' noses and necks well 
made.' 

Exercise 5. 

Translate the following phrases and sentences, first in the singular and 
then in the plural : — 

1. My sister is my friend and my companion. 2. The 
horse is the friend of the Arab. 3. This gênerai is a hero. 
4, The wall of my garden. 5. The inhabitant of this coun- 
try. 6. The arm raised toward the sky. 7. The price of this 
coral. 8. The pupil of the eye. 9. The boat on the canal. 
10. The discourse of this orator. 11. The child in his 
cradle. 12. The plaything of the child. 13. The blade of 
this knife. 14. The hole of the mouse. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 9 

5. FEMININE AND PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. 

Review rules and exceptions for the formation of the féminine and 
plural of adjectives. The pupil will understand that most of the nouns 
modified are of the féminine gender ; the position of the adjectives is the 
same in French as in English, unless otherwise indicated in the notes. 

Exercise 6. 

i. The forests of 1 America are as old as the world. 2. A 
bad action renders the conscience uneasy. 3. Joy is deeper 
when it is shared 2 vvith 3 friends. 4. The language of the 
heart is the universal 4 language. 5. A secret 4 joy is rarely 5 a 
perfect 6 joy. 6. My dear mother, I shall be docile, attentive, 
studious, loving, and obedient, in order that 7 you may always 4 
be 8 satisfied with 9 your little girl. 7. The forget-me-not is a 
sweet 10 flower. 8. The negroes hâve thick lips. 11 9. Com 
merce is a useful 4 and lucrative 4 profession. 10. His answer 
is brief, but it is expressive. n. This law is very ancient. 
12. A sweet 4 face is a good recommendation. 13. The bear- 
ing of the Arabs is grave and proud. 14. A dissipated 4 life 
leads to 12 total 6 ruin. 15. The life of the mariner is a dan- 
gerous 4 life. 16. The tongue is the best and the worst of 13 
things. 17. Pure 14 religion is gentle, tolérant, and concilia- 
tory. 18. The Greek 4 language is beautiful, rich, and harmoni- 
ous. 19. The old Gothic 4 churches are admirable. 20. High 
mountains are covered 2 with 9 eternal 4 snows. 

1 no article before ' America. ' 2 participles conjugated with être must 
agrée with the subject. 3 insert ' some.' 4 place after word modified. 
5 n'est presque jamais. 6 coniplet ; see note 4. 7 afin que. 8 subjunc- 
tive présent. 9 de. 10 gentil, irr. n ' hâve the lips thick.' 12 insert 
une. 13 insert definite article. u vrai. 

Exercise 7 (Same Subject). 

1. Raw 1 silk is white or ye.llow. 2. Red 1 partridges are 
larger and better than gray 1 partridges. 3. Public 1 éducation 



10 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

is superior to private 1 éducation. 4. Fortune is fickle ; its 
favors are fugitive and deceitful. 5. I often 1 meet 2 new 1 
words, but 3 rarely a new 1 idea. 6. Women are coquettish 
when they are beautiful, and scolds 4 when they are good. 5 
7. The vowels are long or short. 8. His thought is always 
ambiguous. 9. Beautiful 6 blue 1 eyes seem to reflect the color 
of the sky. 10. Often an old error has been proclaimed as a 
new 1 truth. 11. I do not like sulky 1 little girls. 12. This 
is 7 a foolish adventure. 13. The most odious 8 ingratitude is 
that of a 9 child toward his parents. 14. This writing is neat 
and regular. 15. Man is endowed with 10 a progressive 1 na- 
ture. 16. Everybody likes polite 11 manners, gentle looks, 
and affectionate words. 17. This young girl has 11 rosy cheeks 
and a pretty 12 mouth. 18. Good deeds make 13 life happy. 
19. Personal 1 liberty is the first condition of human 1 exist- 
ence. 20. Switzerland is mountainous and picturesque. 

1 place after word modified. 2 insert ' some.' 3 omit this word. 
4 grondeuses. 5 sages. 6 must be preceded by de. 7 voilà. 8 ' the 
ingratitude the most odious.' 9 use defmite article. 10 de. 11 in this 
sentence, put les before ail nouns and ail the adjectives after the nouns ; 



6. CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

Review the forms of personal pronouns as subject, direct, indirect, or 
reflexive object, and their position before the verb. 

Remark. — When the verb is in a compound tense, remember to place 
the object pronoun before the auxiliary, not behveen the auxiliary and past 
participle. 

Exercise 8. 

1. The laws protect him. 2. Fortune 1 has betrayed you. 
3. Victory will not 2 abandon us. 4. I should not hâve recom- 
mended 3 her. 5. The beauty of the sky has always 4 enchanted 
me. 6. Riches dazzle us. 7.- The truth ought 5 not to ofïend 
them. 8. Every one 6 looks for happiness, and no one 7 finds 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. I I 

it. 9. My counsels will guide you. 10. Time and reflection 
will enlighten you. 11. I hâve brought her 8 a bouquet. 
12. He bores me very 9 much. 13. I shall speak to him in 
private. 14. This idea torments him. 15. Some one is lis- 
tening to us. 16. How do you like 10 this book? I think it 
charming. 17. Do you speak to him? to her? to them? 
18. Treacherous 11 friends hâve betrayed him. 19. Thy pas- 
sions blind thee. 20. His ]2 ambition will ruin him. 21. The 
hope of succeeding 13 gives them confidence. 22. I will go to 
see her to-morrow morning. 

1 remember that abstract nouns require definite article. 2 place 71e 
immediately after the subject, so as to allow the object pronoun to pré- 
cède the verb. 3 use past conditional. 4 when adverbs of time modify 
verbs used in compound tenses, they are placed, as in English, between 
the auxiliary and past participles. ° devrait ; this verb is always followed 
directly by the infinitive. 6 chacun. v nul ne ; both précède the verb, 
and pas is omitted. 8 the sensé is not ' her,' but 'to her' ; hence, use the 
indirect form of the pronoun. 9 never translate 'very' before 'much.' 
10 such verbs as ' like,' ' think,' used in the sensé of ' to hâve an opinion 
of,' are translated by trouver. n adjective follows noun. 12 son, because 
ambition begins with a vowel. 13 infinitive. 



a. Two Personal Pronoun Objects before the Verb in Déclara- 
tive, Interrogative, and Négative Sentences. 

Review rules for their position, relatively to the verb and to each other. 

Remark. — Great attention must be given in this exercise to word order ; 
remember that the négative or interrogative forms of sentences do not 
affect the position of object pronouns before the verb; see also the remark 
for Exercise 8. 

Exercise 9. 

1. Hâve you bought mybooks? Can you send them to me? 
2. My brother has lent me this beautiful book ; he x has not 
given it to me ; he has only lent it to me. 3. Hâve you told 
him 2 that I ara hère ? Yes, I hâve. 3 4. Hâve you told 4 your 
sister that I found 5 her. book? No, I hâve not. 3 5. Why 



12 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

have you not told her? 6 6. Because I hâve entirely forgotten 
it. I will tell 7 her directly. 7. Where are my gloves? Hère 
they are 8 on the table. 8. Why did you not bring 9 them to 
me? 9. I have asked you to lend me a book. 10. You have 
not yet sent it to me. When are you going to send it to me ? 
11. I should like very much to 10 send it to you ; but I have 
already lent it. 12. I should like very much to 10 read it when 
you can 11 lend it to me. 13. Hère is a book for your sister. 
Will 12 you give it to her? 14. Why do you not give it to her 
yourself? 13 15. She has brought him a présent. Has she 
not given it to him? 16. I shall show it to you. 17. You 
have promised it to them. 18. She will send it to us. 19. We 
shall tell it to him. 20. You have borrowed my dictionary ; 
can you return it to me ? 2 1 . I shall send it to you right away, 
if you wish. 

1 translate the whole sentence in following order : ' he (11e) to me it 
has not given; he to me it has only lent.' 2 see note 8 under Exercise 8. 
3 this unfinished sentence must be translated thus : ' yes, I it to him have 
told.' 4 insert à. 5 use past indefinite. 6 construe : ' why (ne) it to 
her have you not told?' 7 insert 'it.' 8 les voici. 9 for tense, see 
note 5; for word order, see note 6. 10 je voudrais bien ; no préposition 
précèdes following infinitive. n future of pouvoir. 12 'will,' in the 
sensé of ' wishing,' ' wanting,' is translated by vouloir. 13 construe : ' why 
(ne) it to her give you not yourself? ' 

b. Personal Pronoun Objects of Verbs in the Imperative Mood. 

Review rule for the position and forms of personal pronouns used as objects 
of verbs in the négative and affirmative forms of the imperative mood. 

Remark. — Observe that when the imperative is in the affirmative, the 
word order is exactly the same in both French and English; when it is 
négative, the French order is observed. 

Exercise 10. 

1. Let me hear 1 from you soon. 2. Who wants this pretty 
flower? Give it to me ; don't give it to him. 2 3. Give it to 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 13 

us ; don't give it to them. 3 4. If you still 4 hâve your brother's 
book, lend it to me, and I shall return it to you to-morro\v. 
5. I shall send it to you, but do not tell it to him. 3 6. Hâve 
you forgotten to send those letters to the Post Office ? 7. Don't 
forget to send them 5 to-morrow morning. 8. Bring him 6 a 
glass, or rather bring it to me. 9. Don't bring me any coffee. 

10. Give her 6 the book, but don't show her 6 the letter. 

11. Wait 7 for me at the foot 8 of the stairs. 12. Don't make 
me wait 9 very long. 13. Don't look 7 at me while I do this. 
14. This horse is wild; don't ride him. 15. This lady has 
done 10 you a service; thank her politely. 16. Do not inter- 
rupt me; answer me or not 11 as you like. 12 17. Do not 
leave me thus ; look at me squarely w and finish what 14 you 
hâve to 15 say. 18. Choose your friends well; 4 render them 6 
every 16 possible service. 19. Let us return to them good 17 
for evil ; let us not return 18 evil for evil. 20. My son, listen 7 
to me well ; do not force me to 15 be too severe toward you. 19 

1 'give me soon of your news.' 2 construe : '(ne) it to him give not 
(pas).'' 3 same word order as in note 2. 4 place after the verb. 5 in- 
sert y, standing for the adverbial phrase, ' to the Post Office.' 6 use 
indirect form of pronoun. " corresponding French verb is transitive and 
takes no préposition after it. 8 au bas. 9 construe : ' (ne) me make not 
wait,' etc. 10 rendre, followed immediately by service. n repeat verb 
and object pronoun. 12 le jugerez bon. 13 bien en face. 14 that which. 
15 à. 16 tous les; rendre hère requires the article because service is 
followed by an adjective. 17 hère a noun, and, like ' evil,' requires the 
definite article. 18 add ' to them.' 19 à votre égard. 

c. Personal Pronoun Objects of Reflexive Verbs in the Impera- 
tive Mood. 

Remark. — It should be remembered that one of the two pronouns 
used in reflexive verbs is retained in the imperative; this pronoun is the 
object, not the subject of the verb; in the affirmative, it follows the verb; 
in the négative, it précèdes. The pupil would do well to recite, in the 
négative and interrogative, the imperative of following reflexive verbs 
before writing the exercise. 



14 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

Exercise 11. 

i. Let 1 us not tire ourselves too much. Let us rest a 
moment. 2 2. Let us not hurry uselessly. 3. Let us not 
rejoice in 3 advance over 3 a success which is not yet assured. 

4. Let us not boast of a thing which is not yet done. 4 

5. Let us excuse ourselves politely when we disturb some 
one. 6. Let us not make fun of the unhappy. 5 7. You 
hâve had 6 a very hard 7 journey in 8 the rain and wind. 
8. Change your clothes 9 first and dry yourself well. 9. Then, 
after a good supper, go to bed and rest well. 10. Dress your- 
self 10 quickly; wash your 11 hands, face, and neck. 11. Get 
up early. Apply yourself 12 to study. 12. Don't stop on the 
way, when you are going to school. 

1 ' let,' found in the first person plural of the imperative mood, is not 
translated into French. 2 instant, m. 3 de. 4 must agrée with subject 
of the verb. 5 put in the plural. 6 use faire. 7 bien pénible ; place 
after the noun. 8 par. 9 make verb reflexive, and omit ' your clothes.' 
10 put in the second person singular. n make verb reflexive and put 
definite article before nouns. 12 insert bien. 

d. En, Y, Le. 

Review rules for the use and position of thèse pronouns. 

The following remarks should be noted by the student : — 

1. En is a compound of de and a noun or pronoun. It may 

hâve a genitive sensé, meaning of him, of her, of it, of them, 
and sometimes, from Mm, front her, front it, etc.; or, a parti- 
tive sensé, standing for some or any. Compare this double 
meaning of en with the possessive and partitive meanings of 
the contracted articles du, de la, des. Both hâve the same 
functions, the articles corresponding to the possessive forms 
of the, and 's, or to the indefinite adjective some or any ; while 
en corresponds to the possessive or genitive case of him, of her, 
etc., or to the indefinite pronoun some or any. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 15 

It should be observed that many French verbs require the 
préposition de where the English équivalent governs with, about, 
etc., or no préposition at ail. In ail such cases, the pronoun 
object of the verb is alvvays en in French. In speaking of 
persons, en is less frequently met than de lui, d'elle, d'eux, etc. ; 
whereas en is the only proper word to use in speaking of 
things. En, as an adverb, stands for front that place, from 
there, away. En is also a préposition meaning in. 

2. Y is a compound of à and a noun or pronoun. As a Per- 
sonal pronoun, it is a dative meaning to him, to her, to it, to 
them. Compare this meaning of y with that of the contracted 
articles au, à la, aux, etc. The resemblance between their 
nature and uses is the counterpart of that between du, de la, 
des, and en. Also notice that y, like en, is less used for per- 
sons than things. Many French verbs require à where the 
corresponding English verb governs in, of, etc., or no prépo- 
sition at ail. In ail such cases, the indirect object pronoun 
y must be used with the French verb. 

When y stands for to that place, thither, there, it is treated as 
an adverb. 

3. The invariable pronoun le should not be confused with 
le, la, les. The former does not represent a person or thing, 
but either an idea expressed in some preceding sentence, or a 
state, condition, or quality, previously expressed by some adj éc- 
rive or participle ; this accounts for its invariable form. 

Exercise 12. 

1. I hâve a few French books ; I hâve six or seven. Hâve 
you more? 2. Our French professor 1 has a large number of 
them in his library. 3. Few boys play 2 the piano. Most 
young girls play it. 4. People 3 often 4 give us good advice, 5 
but we do not profit by it. 5. This young man is wise ; he 
earns much money and he 7 spends only a part of it. 6. I do 
not stay in 8 the city in 9 the hot 4 season ; I live there only in 10 



l6 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

winter. 7. Ail boys play 2 bail. Henry plays almost ail the 
time. 8. In a grate, we 3 usually 4 burn coal; we burn wood 
in 11 it, too. 9. Hère is a good omelet ; you hâve tasted of 8 
it, but you hâve not eaten it. 12 Aren't you hungry? 10. Your 
proposition is reasonable ; I give my consent to it. 11. You 
hâve a stick; use 13 it. 12. She has written that, and I think 
that she will repent 6 it. 13. What do you say 6 about it? 
14. I will not tell 6 you anything about it. 15. This chicken 
is very tender; will you hâve some of it? 16. Hovv do you 
like thèse gloves? I bought 14 a dozen pairs in Paris. 17. Are 
you the person who came 14 the other day? Yes, I am. 15 

18. Gentlemen, are you the 16 heirs of the deceased? We are. 15 

19. If I hâve succeeded, it 17 is to your protection that I owe it. 

1 ' professor of French.' 2 when this verb refers to a musical instru- 
ment, it governs de ; when it refers to a game, it takes à. 3 on. 4 place 
after word modifiée!. 5 put in the plural. 6 this verb governs de. 7 con- 
strue : ' he (ne) of it spend only (=çzte) a part.' 8 à. 9 pendant. 10 omit 
this word and replace it by the definite article. n ' one in ( = a) it burns 
also some wood.' 12 ' of it '; place before verb. 13 ' serve yourself of it.' 
14 past indefinite. 15 this and ail similar sentences must be completed 
by the insertion of le, la, les, or le according to what they represent; 
see remark (3) under En, Y, Le. 16 omit this word; ' heirs ' is hère 
used adjectively. 17 ce. 

Exercise 13 (Same Subject). 

1. Madam, are you the mother of that charming child? 
Yes, sir, I am. 1 2. Are you a 2 mother? No, I am not. 1 
3. Are you the bride and groom? 3 We are. 1 4. Are you 4 
married? We are 1 not. 5. This great crime was 5 useless, as 
crimes always 6 are. 1 6. Men love riches and honors ; they 
aspire to them ail their lives. 7 7. The man gifted 8 with great 
talents almost always abuses 9 them. 8. You hâve rendered 
me a 10 service, and I u am grateful 8 for it. 9. Force is brutal ; 
man must 12 not abuse it. 10. My exercise is done ; I hâve 
devoted a great deal of time to it. 11. I am pleased 8 with it ; 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. \J 

I do not find any more mistakes in 13 it. 12. The 14 more I 
study sciences, the more difficulties I find in them. 13. Elo- 
quence is a gift of nature, but art adds perfection to it. 14. Wit 
is the flower of imagination ; judgment is its 15 fruit. 

1 see note 15 under preceding exercise. 2 see note 16 under preceding 
exercise. 3 les mariés. 4 ' you ' stands hère for more than one, hence 
agreement in the plural of past participle. 5 past definite. 6 place after 
word modified. 7 singular. 8 this adjective governs de. 9 this verb 
governs de. 10 omit this word. n insert 'to you.' 12 use devoir. 
13 à. u construe thus : ' more I study the sciences, more I in them 
( = y) discover some (= de) difficulties.' 15 ' of it is the fruit.' 



e. Direct and Indirect Object Pronouns combined with ' En ' 
and ' Y ' after Verbs in the Imperative Mood. 

Remark. — In the following exercise, only affirmative forms of the im- 
perative verbs are given; the pupil will remember that in such sentences 
the direct object in French, as in English, précèdes the indirect. When, 
however, the indirect object is nous or vous, the best grammatical usage 
requires that thèse pronouns shall immediately follow the verb, thus : " Si 
le dîner est prêt, servez-nous-le." It would not be positively wrong, 
however, to say, " servez-le-nous." 

Exercise 14. 

1. I hâve not yet seen the "Jardin des Plantes "; take 1 me 2 
there when you go 3 there for a walk. 4 2. What do you feel? 
Tell 5 me; speak without disguise. 6 3. Go get the books that 
were given 7 to you and show them to us. 4. Since you know 
the lesson that your teacher has toid you to learn, recite it to 
us. 5. You go very often to the théâtre ; take l us there next 8 
Saturday. 6. When you hâve 3 news of your brother, let us 
know. 9 7. Take some cotton and put 10 some in your 11 ear. 
8. Take some cold 8 ashes and put 12 some on the eut. 9. If 
any one renders you a service, pay it back 13 to him in 14 grati- 
tude. 10. If you still hâve 15 any pens of this make, sell me a 
box of them. 16 n. When you go 3 out, tell me so. 17 12. This 



ï8 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

fable is very pretty ; recite it for 18 us. 13. Work is the source 
of happiness ; dévote yourself to it with zeal. 14. You cannot 
go to London yourself; send me 19 in your place. 15. You 
hâve my hat; give it back to me. 16. This ink is too thick; 
put 20 some water in it. 

1 ' take,' in the sensé of 'conducting' a person or animal, is translatée! by 
conduire or mener ; in the sensé of ' carrying ' something, it is translatée! 
by porter. 2 when, in the imperative affirmative, moi and toi précède en 
or y, they change, for the sake of euphony, to ni 1 and/'. 3 a présent 
tense in English, implying future action, must be translated by a future in 
French. 4 ' for a walk' = vous y promener. 5 insert te. 6 use infinitive 
of verb. 7 use active voice, thus : ' that one to you has given.' 8 place 
after noun. 9 construe : ' make us them to know.' 10 make this verb 
reflexive; place 'some' after it as in English. n change to the definite 
article. ^s'appliquer. 13 omit this word. u par la. 15 s'il vous 
reste encore. 16 say, ' of them a box.' 17 replace this word by le. 18 à. 
19 insert ' there ' and change the préposition ' in ' to à. 20 ' put in ( = à) it 
some water.' 

7. DÏSJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

The disjunctive forms of personal pronouns are used : — 

1. When the verb is absent or understood. Ex.: Qui frappe? 

Moi = who knocks? I. Il est plus grand que moi = he is 
taller than I. 

2. After the verb être : c'est toi, c'est lui, etc. = it is thon, it is he. 

3. In compound subjects or objects composed of two pronouns, or 

nouns and pronouns : Marie et moi, nous irons vous voir = 
Mary and I will go to see y oit. 

4. When the subject pronoun is separated from the verb : eux qui 

sont mes amis, me conseilleront = they who are my friends 
will advise me. 

5 . For emphasis, with another pronoun of the same person : toi, tu 

n'aimes pas le café ; moi, je l'aime = you dorCt like coffee; I do. 

6. The disjunctives are especially used as objects of prépositions : 

venez avec moi = corne with me. 

For moi, toi, etc., used in the imperative mood, see exercise on Pro- 
nouns as Objects of Verbs in the Imperative, page 12. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 19 

The disjunctive forms of personal pronouns combine with the word 
même, mêmes to form the compound personal pronouns myself, thyself, 
etc. They are used chiefly for emphasis. 

Exercise 15. 

1. You ask who did 1 that? It 2 was 3 I. 2. My brother is 
handsomer than I, but I am taller than he. 3. I, who hâve 
written it, 4 ought 5 to know what it is. 6 4. Ail the family had 
promised 7 to corne, but he alone was 8 présent. 5. He deceives 
me 9 who am his friend. 6. I will' reward them 9 and their 
families. 10 7. She says that she has lost her book ; you and 
I will look for it. 8. I assure you that it 2 is not he who has 
revealed this secret. 9. You read very well, and yet you will 11 
not read before me. 10. If you are going to 12 Europe, why 
do you not start with me ? n. Every one has his préférence ; 
you love music, he 13 loves painting. 12. If your sisters can 
not accompany you, corne without them. 13. I am a 14 slave, 
— I who was 3 born to 15 command. 14. He hâtes us, 9 who 
hâve given him so many proofs of friendship. 15. I will speak 
to him myself. 16. Your father and I 16 hâve only one 17 désire, 
namely, 18 your happiness. 17. I 13 will teach you to respect 
your parents ! 18. Who accuses this man, — he or you? 19. I 
will tell him myself the cause of his misfortunes. 20. Your 
father and he hâve long 19 been enemies. 20 

1 past indefinite. 2 ce. 3 présent tense. 4 repeat 'I' before 'ought.' 
5 conditional présent of devoir. 6 ce que c'est. "' pluperfect. 8 imperfect. 
9 because this pronoun is emphatic, it must be expressed twice in French, — 
once as a conjunctive before the verb, and again as a disjunctive after the 
verb. 10 les leurs. n use vouloir, because ' will ' hère stands for ' to be 
willing.' 12 before names of countries or continents, ' to ' is translated by 
en, and the definite article is omitted. 13 see rule 5. 14 omit this word. 
15 before infinitives, 'to' used in the sensé of 'in order to,' 'for the purpose 
of,' must alvvays be translated by pour. 16 insert nous, because the sub- 
jects are of différent persons. 17 ne . . . qu'un seul. 1S c'est. 19 ' long ' 
is hère an adverb; use longtemps, and place after participle. 20 add F un 
de Vautre. 





Masc. 


Fem. 


mine : 


le mien 


la mienne 


thine : 


le tien 


la tienne 


his, hers, its 


le sien 


la sienne 


ours: 


le nôtre 


la nôtre 


yours : 


le vôtre 


la vôtre 


theirs : 


le leur 


la leur 



20 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

8. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

PLURAL. 
Masc. Fem. 

mine : les miens les miennes 

thine : les tiens les tiennes 

his, hers, its : les siens les siennes 

ours : les nôtres les nôtres 

yours: les vôtres les vôtres 

theirs : les leurs les leurs 

Thèse pronouns agrée in gender and number with the nouns 
for which they stand ; their use should not be confused with 
that of the adjectives mon, ton, son, etc., which always accom- 
pany the noun. When 'of and ' to ' précède the English 
pronouns ' mine,' ' his,' i yours,' etc., the French prépositions 
de and à contract with the articles standing before the pro- 
nouns, but only in the masculine singular and plural forms ; 
thus, du mien, au mien, des miennes, aux vôtres, etc. 

Le mien, le tien, etc., are used for ' mine,' ' thine,' etc. But 
in such expressions as ' is mine,' meaning ' belongs to me,' 
à moi, à toi,- are just as commonly used. Ex. : à qui sont 
ces gants? Ils sont à moi = whose gloves are thèse? They 
are mine. 

The English phrases ' a friend of mine,' ' a cousin of yours,' 
cannot be rendered literally in French ; translate thus : un de 
mes amis, une de vos cousines. 

Les miens, les tiens, les vôtres, etc., are sometimes used in 
French to designate one's immédiate family or nearest rela- 
tives. Ex. : je suis tout dévoué aux miens = / am entirely 
devoted to my family. 

Exercise 16. 

i. We love our children as you love yours. 2. The pro- 
ductions of nature are varied ; every country has its own. 1 
3. Your confidence deserves mine. 4. Great men are rare ; 
yet, ail civilized 2 nations hâve theirs. 5. The ancients hâve 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 21 

their masterpieces 3 ; we hâve ours. 6. Your pupils hâve been 
surpassed 4 by several of ours. 7. I hâve alvvays sacrificed my 
interests to hers. 5 8. It was 6 a friend of yours who announced 7 
the good news 8 to me. 9. Your garden touches 9 mine. 10. The 
troubles of our friends are our own. 10 n. He has accepted my 
services, and now 11 he refuses me his. 12. Every one has his 
lot ; work is hers. 5 13. I hâve received your letter, dated 12 the 
fifth 13 of February ; hâve you received mine ? 14. The ancient 14 
orators excelled 15 ours. 15. Your friends are esteemed 4 by 16 
mine. 16. You hâve your peculiarities ; who has not his? 
17. The hypocrite flatters our vices in order that we may 
approve 17 of his. 18. The English navy is superior to ours. 

1 ' its own ' must be translatée! by third person féminine plural form 
of possessive pronoun. 2 participial adjectives agrée with their nouns, 
and usually follow. 3 in compound nouns, made up of two nouns con- 
nected by a préposition, the first noun only, as a rule, takes the mark 
of the plural.* 4 must agrée with subject of the verb. 5 agrées with 
' interests,' not with the gender of person spoken of. 6 présent tense. 
7 m'a fait part de. 8 singular. 9 insert à. 10 ' ours.' n voici au'. 
12 en date du. 13 use cardinal numéral, omit préposition and write 
' February ' with small letter. 14 after the noun. 15 P emportent sur. 
10 ' by,' after verbs of feeling, is usually translated by de. 17 applaudir à. 

9. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Celui (masc. sing.), celle (fem. sing. ) = that, that of, the one. 
Celui qui, celle qui = he who, she who, the one who or which. 
Ceux (masc. pi.) celles (fem. pi.) = those, those of, the ones. 
Ceux qui, celles qui = they who, those who, the ones who or which. 

Thèse forms of the démonstrative pronoun stand for some 
definite person or object. They frequently express the posses- 
sive case of the nouns for which they stand, and thus correspond 

* The récent ministerial decree states that such compound nouns may 
be written without the hyphen, and that their component parts, as regards 
the formation of their plural, may be governed by the ordinary laws of 
syntax. Ex.: un chef <P œuvre, des chefs d' œuvre. 



22 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

to the 's in English. Ex. : j'ai entendu votre voix et celle de 
votre sœur = / heard your voice and your sister's. 

They also frequently add a limiting or descriptive sensé to 
the noun for which they stand. In such cases, the pronouns 
are followed by some adjective phrase or relative clause. Ex. : 
vous admirez la robe de soie, et moi, celle de velours ; je crains 
ceux qui ne craignent pas Dieu ; cette rose est celle que je 
préfère. When the sensé of celui, celle, ceux, celles, is thus 
already limited by the addition of a possessive or descriptive 
phrase or clause, they cannot be followed by -ci or -là. 

Exercise 17. 

i. Your brother's library is large, 1 but my father's 2 is better 3 
selected. 2. That man has spent his fortune and that of his 
wife. 3. My cows give more milk than those of my neighbor. 
4. This dress is better 3 made 4 than your sister's. 2 5. The 
faults of Peter the Great were 5 those of a soldier, and his 
virtues those of a great man. 6. The books that you sent 6 
me are not those that I bought. 6 7. The one who is mis- 
taken does not like to admit 7 his 8 error. . 8. The climate 
of Europe is temperate ; that of 9 Africa is torrid. 9. The 
comédies of Molière are superior to those of Terence. 
10. The éloquence of Cicero is not comparable to that of 
Demosthenes. 11. Those who love danger will perish in 10 
it. 12. This man is the one who struck u me. 13. Cotton 12 
sheets are less expensive than linen ones. 13 14. I admire the 
exploits of Bayard, but I admire 14 still more those of Turenne. 

1 nombreuse. 2 'that of my father.' 3 'better' is hère an adverb; 
must it be rendered by mieux or meilleur? 4 apply rule for agreement 
of participles conjugated with être. 5 imperfect. 6 put verb in past 
indefmite; apply rule for agreement of participles conjugated with avoir. 
7 reconnaître. _ 8 son or sa? 9 insert defmite article. 10 à. n past 
indefmite. 12 ' the sheets of cotton.' 13 ' those of.' u ' admire still 
more ' = j'estime davantage. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 23 

Celui-ci (masc. sing.) = this one celui-là (masc. sing.) = that one. 

Celle-ci (fem. sing.) = this one celle-là (fem. sing.) = that one. 

Ceux-ci (masc.pl.) = thèse ceux-là (masc.pl.) = those. 

Celles-ci (fem. pi.) = thèse celles-là (fem. pi.) = those. 

Thèse pronouns, like the first forms given, are used to repre- 
sent persons or things previously mentioned in the sentence ; 
they stand for something known and hâve a defmite antécédent. 
Their inflections for gender and number prove this fact. Celui- 
ci, celle-ci, celui-là, celle-là, etc., are used only to bring out the 
contrast between things compared, replacing the emphasis given 
in English by the two distinct forms this and that, lacking in 
French. Ex. : this one is white, that one is black = celui-ci est 
blanc, celui-là est noir. 

Thèse emphatic forms of the pronoun also translate the 
words former and latter ; celui-là, celle-là, ceux-là, celles-là 
standing for the fon?ier ; celui-ci, celle-ci, ceux-ci, celles-ci, for 
the latter. 

Exercise 18. 

1. Look at 1 thèse beautiful roses! This one is budding, 
that one is in full bloom. 2 2. You hâve given me my 3 choice 
of thèse books ; I will take thèse for my brother and those for 
myself. 4 3. This diamond 5 ïs more brilliant 6 than that one. 
4. What a différence between thèse two brothers ! The 7 one 
is ignorant, the other 8 is well educated. 5. Bossuet and 
Fénelon are éloquent ; the latter is fascinating ; the former is 
persuasive. 6. I know 9 thèse two men ; I despise the one, 7 
and fear the other. 8 7. I hâve brought two cushions ; which 
one will you hâve, 10 this one or that one ? 8. This one is too 
large and that one is too hard. 9. Hère are several hats ; try 
on this one. 10. This one is not becoming to me 11 ; I will 
take that one. ri. The rose and the tulip are two lovely 12 
flowers, but the latter is without fragrance, while 13 the former 
exhales a delicious fragrance. 



24 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

1 voyez. 2 tout épanouie. 3 le. 4 moi. 5 add -ci. 6 a plus de feu. 
7 ' this one.' 8 ' that one.' 9 savoir or connaître ? 10 voulez-vous ? 
11 ne me sied pas. 12 charmantes ; place after the noun. 13 <?£. 

Ceci = this. Cela = that. 

Thèse pronouns hâve no inflections for gender and number 
because, unlike celui, celle, etc., they never stand for any person 
or thing previously mentioned in the sentence. They either 
refer to something pointed to by the speaker, literally or figura- 
tively, as : avez-vous lu cela ? or, they represent a clause, phrase, 
or idea just expressed or about to be, as : vous le demandez et 
cela est impossible = y ou ask it and it is impossible. 

Exercise 19. 

i. Hâve you learned this? Yes, but I hâve not learned that. 
2. That is a very great misfortune. 3. Hâve you copied ail 
this and ail that? 4. I hâve finished this, but I hâve not 
quite 1 finished that. 5. Did you see 2 that? Where did you 
find 2 this? 6. That is not easy to explain. 7. This is a family 
relie. 3 8. This will cost you much more than that. 9. You 
assure me that 4 he is my friend ; that is quite 5 possible. 
10. That is an invention of his.enemies. 11. That is a very 
pretty compliment. 12. You désire that I should be 6 his 
friend, but that is impossible. 13. Don't forget to send me 
this. 14. Read this and tell me what 7 you think 8 of it. 
15. Pride is a great fault, remember 9 that. 16. My dear chil- 
dren, understand 10 this: work is a treasure. 17. If you are 
selfish, you will never n hâve any 12 friends, remember that. 

1 tout-à-fait ; place as in English between auxiliary and participle. 
2 past indefinite. 3 ' relie of family.' 4 hère a conjunction; translate by 
que. 5 fort. 6 this verb dépends on désirer, a verb of sentiment; trans- 
late by subjunctive présent of être. 7 ce que. 8 penser hère takes de, 
not à, because the verb means ' to hâve an opinion of.' 9 retenez bien. 
10 écoutez bien. n place after verb. 12 de. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 2$ 

10. WHEN TO USE 'CE,' WHEN 'IL,' WITH 'ÊTRE.' 

Ce, before être, translates he, s/te, it, they, and the indefinite this and 
that. The English pronoun it is either personal or inderlnite. 
As an indefinite, it is merely an expletive, introducing the real, 
logical subject of the verb. Ex. : it is my brother = c'est mon 
frère. Since it, as an inderlnite, has no spécial form for plural, 
the personal pronoun they is used — though still with the exple- 
tive sensé — when the verb is followed by a plural noun : they 
are my brothers = ce sont mes frères. Observe that the French 
keeps the singular form of the expletive ce. 

But we can say both in French and English : he is my 
friend y she is my friend, they are my friends = il est mon 
ami, elle est mon amie, ils sont mes amis, etc. The différ- 
ence between thèse forms and 'c'est mon ami,' 'ce sont mes 
amis,' is purely one of emphasis in the thought, the use of 
il, elle, etc., before the verb adding a shade of sentiment or 
feeling to the expression. 

Rule. — Translate he, she, it, they, this, that before être, by ce 
when the verb is followed by a noun, pronoun, infinitive verb, 
or noun clause. Since thèse are the logical subjects of the verb, 
he, she, it, they (in French, ce) must be understood as expletives 
standing for no antécédent expressed. 

For ce combined with qui or que forming the pronoun what, see chapter 
on Relative Pronouns, page 31. 

Il translates he, it, before être, when thèse words are personal pro- 
nouns, standing for derlnite and expressed antécédents. In 
this case, the verb is followed by an adjective, or attribut e, an 
adjective phrase or clause. 

Exception. — Ce is found before être, followed by an adjective, in 
only one case, namely when ce means cela, and can be changed 
to cela without altering the sensé. In this case, ce, like cela, refers 
to somethiug pointed to, or to an antécédent understood but not 
expressed. Ex. : Comment trouvez-vous cela ? c'est magnifique, or 



20 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

cela est magnifique. When used parenthetically, both il and ce are 
used with the clause ' it is true ' = il est vrai. 

Il translates it and also there in ail impersonal constructions : it is 
time to start = il est temps de partir ; there came a inan to our 
village-— il vint un homme, etc. 

Il is also used as subject of ail real impersonal verbs : it seems, il 
rains, it matters = il semble, il pleut, il importe, etc. When 
the verb is not- a true impersonal, cela is used : it kurts me to 
see y ou this way = cela me fait de la peine de vous voir ainsi . 

Exercise 20. 

i. It is hope that sustains man in adversity. 1 2. It is your 
friendship that I prize. 3. Hère is the book that I found; 2 
it is your sister's. 4. No, it is not hers, it is raine. 5. The 
counsel is good, but it is not new. 6. It is a misfortune 3 not to 
hâve 4 any friends. 7. It is your sister who deserves 5 praise. 
8. It is in adversity that one recognizes the true 6 friend. 9. It 
was 7 your aunt whom I met 8 in Europe. 10. It is ambition 
which causes the ruin of so many men. 11. It is to God that 
we owe ail the blessings 9 which 10 we enjoy. 12. It was 11 the 
Egyptians who invented 2 arithmetic. 13. The principal qual- 
ity which distinguishes the French 12 language 13 is clearness. 
14. It is you whom I désire 14 to see. 15. It is the one or the 
other of thèse two men who betrayed 2 the secret. 16. It often 
happens 15 that vice spoils the happiest disposition. 16 1 7. It 
takes 17 great courage to 18 stand injustice. 18. It is virtue that 
makes heroes. 19. It is beautiful to die for one's 19 country. 
20. We must 20 work when we 21 are young. 21. It is we 11 who 
make 22 ourselves unhappy. 22. It is friendship that makes ail 
the charms 23 of life. 

1 ati milieu des revers. 2 past indefinite. 3 place de after this word. 
4 place both négatives {ne point) before infinitive. 5 insert 'some' and 
put noun in the plural. 6 véritable ; place after noun. 7 présent. 
8 past indefinite of connaître. 9 avantage, m. pi. 10 ' of which ' {dont) 
because jouir takes de. u put this verb in the présent; when être is 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 2/ 

preceded by ce and followed by a plural noun or a pronoun of the third 
person, the verb becomes plural,* but it remains singular if the pronoun 
is of the first or second person plural. 12 adjectives of nationality follow 
nouns. 13 insert c\ which is used hère to give emphasis to the expres- 
sion. 14 this verb requires no préposition before infmitives. 1S arriver 
(impersonal) ; place adverb after it. 16 naturels, m. pi. 17 falloir ; 
place un after verb. n pour. 19 sa. ^falloir, followed by infinitive. 
21 on. 22 se rendre. 23 singular. 

Exercise 21 (Same Subject). 

i. It is hard l to be good to 2 the wicked. 3 2. It is impru- 
dent l to speak of the faults of others. 3. It is possible that 
ours are 4 greater. 4. It takes 5 strength of soûl to endure good 6 
and evil fortune. 5. It is sweet 1 to love those whom one 
must 7 respect. 4 6. It is we who shape our destinies. 8 7. I 
believe that it will rain to-morrow. 8. It is we whom you 
accuse unjustly of this crime. 9. It is late ; we must 9 go 
home. 10. It is already half past four. 10 n. It is better to 
be ignorant than to u know evil. 12. It is useless 1 to speak 
to her ; she will not listen to you. 13. It is glorious x to con- 
quer 12 one's passions. 14. It is true that I ought to hâve 13 
confessed my fault. 15. It is too damp in this house. 16. It 
is proper that you 14 should return 4 their visit. 17. I did not 
read your book because it is not interesting. 18. It is certain 
that he has lost his fortune. 19. It may be 15 that we shall 
find 4 her at her mother's. 16 

1 this adjective governs de before infinitives. 2 avec. 3 plural. 4 sub- 
junctive présent. 5 falloir ; insert ' some ' before 'strength.' 6 use 
definite article before both adjectives. 7 qu'il faut qu'on. 8 singular. 
^falloir. 10 quatre heures et demie ; before nouns, demi is invariable; f 

* Even the best writers do not always observe this rule, and hereafter 
c'est, instead of ce sont, will be allowable in this case. 

t The Minister's decree authorizes the agreement of this adjective with 
its noun, whether it précèdes or follows the noun. When it précèdes, the 
usual hyphen may be omitted. 



28 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

after a féminine noun, it becomes féminine, but never plural. n que de. 
12 surmonter ses. 13 use past conditional of devoir. u insert ' to them.' 
15 se peut. 16 chez. 

11. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Qui or qui est-ce qui (emphatic) = who, nominative case for persons. 

Note. — Quel, quelle, quels, quelles are sometimes used before the 
verb to be for the nominative who. Ex. : who is this lady ? = qui est cette 
dame ? or quelle est cette dame ? In the latter case, quelle agrées with 
the noun dame understood. 

Qui or qui est-ce que (emphatic) = whom, direct object for persons. 
Que or qu'est-ce que (emphatic) = what, used as direct object only 

for things. 
Qu'est-ce qui = what, nominative case for things. 
A qui or de qui or à qui est-ce que or de qui est-ce que (emphatic) = 

to whom, ofwhom, indirect object for persons. 
A quoi or de quoi or à quoi est-ce que (emphatic) — to what, of what, 

indirect object for things. 

Notice that que changes to qu' before vowels, but that qui and quoi 
are never elided. 

The above pronoun forms hâve no spécial infiections for masculine or 
féminine; this would seem to indicate that their function is not to repre- 
sent a noun previously mentioned. Compare them with lequel = which 
one (masc. sing.), laquelle (fem. sing.), lesquels = zvhich ones (masc. pi.), 
lesquelles (fem. pi.), which stand for a noun already mentioned, or about 
to be, and must agrée with it in gender and number. 

Study the following list of idiomatic sentences : — 

i . A qui est ce livre ? = whose book is this ? 

2. Que de bontés ! que de bienfaits ! = what kindnessl what good- 

ness ! 

3. Quoi de plus heureux ! = what coidd be 7nore forttmate ! 

4. Que vous êtes bonne ! = how kind you are! 

5 . Quoi ! vous êtes encore ici ! = what ! you are still hère ! 

6. Que parlez-vous si haut ? = why do you speak so loudf 

7. Que vous en semble-t-il ? = what do you think ofit? 

8. De quoi s'agit-il ? = what is it ? whafs the maiter? 






EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 2Ç 

9. De quoi vous mêlez-vous ? = ivhat are y on meddling with? 

10. À quoi bon tant de mystère ? = ivhat is the zise of so much mys- 

tery ? 

1 1 . Qu'est-ce que c'est que la vie ? = what (emphatic) is life f 

12. Qui vous dit que je veuille aller la voir ? = how do you know or 

what makes you suppose that I want to go and see her f 

Learn the following Gallicisms : — 

What is it ? = qu'est-ce or qu'est-ce que c'est ? 

What is that ? = qu'est-ce que cela or qu'est-ce que c'est que cela ? 

Exercise 22. 

In the following exercise, when the pronouns can be rendered by tvvo 
forms, one emphatic and one unemphatic, give both forms for the sake of 
drill in their use. 

1. Whom do 1 you love? Who loves you? 2. Whom does 
he admire? What do you want? 3. Of whom do you speak? 
To whom hâve you spoken ? 4. Who is speaking ? Whom do 
you see? 5. What do you see? Of what do you speak? 
6. What do you hear? What are you reading? 7. What 
page? what line? 8. Of which house are you speaking? 
9. What is disturbing you? 10. Wlio is disturbing you? 
1 1 . Which letter do you read ? Which one 2 are you answer- 
ing? 12. Who wants to play with us? What 3 do you want 
to play? 13. With what shall we write? Whose exercise is 
this? 4 14. What exercise hâve you written ? Which one shall 
we write to-morrow? 15. Of which one are you speaking? 
16. Who is the lady who was speaking? 17. Who is singing? 
What is he singing? 18. What makes your brother laugh? 5 
19. What can 6 I do for you? 20. At whom are you smiling? 
Of 7 what are you thinking? 21. What hâve I done to you? 
22. Who told 8 you that I was 9 hère? 23. Who is knocking? 
24. With 10 whom are you living? 

1 remember that emphatic and progressive forms like ' do love,' ' is 
speaking ' are translated into French by the simple présent tense of corre- 



30 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

sponding verb. 2 ' to which one.' 3 ' to what.' 4 ' to whom is this 
exercise ? ' 5 compare this English construction with the équivalent 
French fait rire votre frère ? 6 use puis not peux, in the interrogative, 
when subject follows. 7 à. 8 past indefinite. 9 imperfect. 10 chez. 

Exercise 23 (Same Subject). 

i. Which one of thèse houses did 1 your father 2 buy? 
2. What prevented 3 you from coming 4 last night? 3. What is 
that ? 5 4. For whom are you looking ? What are you looking 
at? 5. Which ones are you looking at? 6. What troubles 
you? What do you mean? 7. Why 6 don't 7 you listen to me? 
8. How 8 beautiful your sister is ! 9. Whom are you expect- 
ing? 10. What 9 is more terrible than such 10 passions! 
11. To which one of thèse men did 1 you apply? 12. What 
has happened to your brother? 13. To which one of your 
friends hâve you written? 14. Whose 11 beautiful rings are 
thèse? 15. Of what hâve you to 12 complain ? Of whom hâve 
you to complain? 16. With 12 what are you amusing yourself? 
17. In 13 what is she guilty? 18. Of ail thèse éditions, which 
one do you advise me to buy? 19. Of what are you accused? 14 
20. Who told 3 you that ? What has happened ? 15 21. Which 
one of thèse young ladies is he going to marry? 22. What is 
the use of 16 weeping? 4 23. How 17 shall we amuse ourselves? 
24. To whom must 18 I return this book? 25. What is the use 
of 16 so much ceremony? 26. Who has sent me thèse beauti- 
ful flowers ? Whose n gloves are thèse ? 

1 ' did . . . buy ' ; this emphatic form, especially in the interrogative, is 
usually translated by the past indefinite; in this case, the participle should 
agrée with object of verb. 2 construe : ' your father has he bought.' 
3 past indefinite. 4 infinitive présent. 5 see examples of Gallicisms. 
6 see No. 6 in list of idiomatic sentences. 7 render this word by putting 
ne before the verb and omitting pas. 8 construe ' that {que) your sister 
is beautiful ! ' 9 see No. 3 in list of idiomatic sentences. 10 que de telles. 
11 see No. 1 in list of idiomatic sentences. 12 à. 13 en. 14 put in the 
active voice with on. 15 past indefinite of se passer. 1G see No. 10 in 
list of idiomatic sentences. 17 ' to what.' 18 présent indicative of devoir. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 



12. RELATIVE OR CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 

Qui = who, which, what, nominative case for persons or things. 
Lequel, laquelle, etc., are sometimes used for qui,when the rela- 
tive pronoun has two antécédent nouns to either of which it 
might refer. 

Qui = whom, direct object for persons, when there is no antécédent 
expressed. Ex. : devinez qui j'ai rencontré aujourd'hui = gness 
whom I met to-day. 

À qui, pour qui, auquel, or pour lequel, etc. = object of prépositions 
for persons. Ex. : l'ami à qui or auquel j'écris = the friend to 
whom I am writing. 

Auquel, pour lequel, etc. = only forms as objects of prépositions for 
things. Ex. : la plume avec laquelle j'écris = the pen with 
which I write. 

Que = whom, which, that, objective case for persons or things. This 
pronoun can never be omitted in French. 

Dont or duquel = whose, of whom, of which, possessive case for 
persons or things; de qui is also used for persons. Whèn 
whose is preceded by a préposition, de qui or duquel must 
be used, never dont. Ex. : the pupil in whose exercise I 
found a mistake = l'élève dans le devoir duquel j'ai trouvé 
une faute. Whose in English is never separated from its 
governing noun ; dont is frequently so, and always heads the 
relative clause. Ex : / a?n going to see the frie7id whose 
address you hâve given ?ne = je vais voir l'ami dont vous 
m'avez donné l'adresse. 

De qui, duquel, not dont, are used to express from whom. Ex. : the 
friend from whom I hâve received this gift = l'ami de qui j'ai 
reçu ce cadeau. 

Dont is used to express the idea of issuing, of being born, of descend- 
ing, with such verbs as 'sortir," descendre,' or their équivalents. 

D'où = from which, whence, is used to express the physical action 
of coming ont. Ex. : la chambre d'où je sors = the room from 
which I corne. 

Quoi is an indefinite relative, referring to some such antécédent as 
ce, rien, chose, voici, voilà, and is only used after prépositions. 
Ex. : voici de quoi il s'agit = this is the question ; je voudrais 



32 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

savoir à quoi vous pensez = I should like to know of what you 
are thinking. 

Où is generally used for à or dans and a relative pronoun with référ- 
ence to place or time. Ex. : la maison où je vous ai connu = 
the house where I met y ou. 

Ce qui = what (that which), nominative case. 

Ce que = what {that whzch), objective case. 

Ce dont = what . . . of. Ex. : what I cotnplain of {that of which 
I complairi) — ce dont je me plains. 

Ce à quoi = what ... to or with. Ex. : what y ou are amusing 
y our self with = ce à quoi vous vous amusez. 

Exercise 24. 

i. The thing of which I am thinking is very interesting. 
2. The merchant for whom I keep 1 books is very rich. 3. I 
want to know of what you are thinking. 4. Young men talk 2 
of 3 what they are doing ; old men, of 3 what they hâve done, 
and fools, of 3 what they intend 4 to do. 5. I know whom you 
mean. 6. Ail that 5 glitters is not gold. 6 7. You ought 7 to 
confess frankly what 5 you hâve done. 8. I want to know of 
whom you are thinking. 9. It is not the dress, 8 it is not the 
occupation 9 of a man 10 that dégrades him ; it is n the shame- 
ful 12 vices to which he is addicted 13 and of which he does not 
want to correct himself. 10. I hâve read the works which 
Fénelon has written. 14 ri. I know what 5 you are going to say 
to me. 12. What 15 God does is well done. 13. He 16 is 
happy whose 17 heart is pure. 14. He 16 is happy who has a 
pure 12 heart. 15. We do not admire the things which we are 
accustomed 14 to see. 16. We do not admire the things to 
which we are accustomed. 14 17. Vanity is an idol to which we 
sacrifice every thing. 18. It was 18 Racine who introduced 19 
into the poetic 12 language of the French 20 that richness and 21 
élégance of style to which it owes ail its glory. 22 19. You will 
never 12 know whom I love. 20. The society which you fré- 
quent is not good. 21. The site on which I wish to build is 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 33 

very large. 22. There is the book about m which I hâve 24 
spoken to you so 3 often. 3 

1 tiens les. 2 disent. 3 omit this word. 4 se proposent de. 5 stands 
for ' that which.' 6 in this proverb, does the noun ' gold ' require the 
definite article? "' conditional présent of devoir ; no préposition. 

8 habit, m. 9 métier, m. 10 ' which dégrades a man.' n ce sont. 
12 after the word modified. 13 il se livre. 14 composer ; should this 
participle agrée? if so, with what? 15 'God does well what He does.' 
16 celui-là. 17 ' of whom.' 18 présent. 19 past indefinite. 20 plural. 
21 repeat ' that.' 22 lustre, m. 23 de. 24 insert tant. 

Exercise 25 (Same Subject). 

1. I do not know on what his pretensions may be founded. 1 
2. I contemplate the marvels which God has created. 1 3. The 
means 2 which he has used 3 are 2 not honest. 4. He is a man 
in whose 4 prudence you can trust. 5. That is what 5 I am 
sure of. 6 6. What I admire most 7 is courage in adversity. 
7. It is a disease the cause of which 8 is not known. 8. The 
friends from whom 9 you expect so many services will do nothing 
for you. 9. The family from which 10 he descends is honor- 
able. 10. The spring from which 10 the greatest rivers flow 11 
is scarcely noticed. 1 11. There is nothing of which God is 12 
not the author, nothing that has 12 not 13 corne out 14 of His 15 
hands ; we owe Him 15 the light that we enjoy 16 and the air 
that we breathe. 12. We do not always love the persons 
whose 8 talents we admire. 13. What is there 17 more fragile 
than riches, which, 18 nevertheless, we pursue ail our lives? 2 
14. The laws according to which God has made ail things are 
also those according to which he governs them. 15. The 
divine promises in which I hâve always had faith, hâve comforted 
me for many griefs. 19 16. What pleases 20 me does not please 
everybody. 17. Intoxication is the most shamefui 21 state into 
which 22 a man can 12 fall. 18. The body of man retums to the 
earth whence it came. 23 19. Health is a blessing without which 
ail 24 others are nothing. 20. The wicked man 25 rejoices over lti 



34 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 



what causes 26 the ruin of others. 27 21. The violet, hiding 28 
under the bush, perfumes everything that cornes near * it ; it is 
the symbol of the modest 21 savant. 

1 see note 14 of Exercise 24. 2 singular. 3 past indefinite. 4 con- 
strue : ' to the prudence of whom'; for the translation of ' of whom ' see 
grammatical notes under dont. 5 ' that is what ' = voilà. 6 ' that of 
which,' etc. 7 insert c\ 8 construe : ' of which one knows {connaître) 
not {point) the cause.' 9 dont or de qui ? 10 dont or d^où ? ll s'échap- 
per ; put verb after subject. 12 subjunctive présent. 13 retain ne before 
verb, but omit pas because 'nothing' takes its place. H conjugated with 
être. 15 no capital. 16 French verb takes de. 17 qu'y a-t-il de. 
18 ' after which, nevertheless, we run,' etc. 19 de bien des misères. 

2) French verb takes à. 21 after the noun. 22 où. 23 past indefinite 
of sortir. 24 insert 'the.' 25 omit this word. 26 faire. 27 d' 'autrui. 
28 use past participle. 29 approcher ; no préposition. 



13. INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 

Review their forms and uses. 



Adjectives. 

(Construed with nouns.) 

MASCULINE AND FEMININE. 

Sing. chaque = each, every. 
Sing. quelque = some, a little. 
PI. quelques = some, a few. 



Sing. quelconque = 

(after its noun) 

PI. quelconques. 



' whatever ; 

any . . . what- 
soever ; 

some sort of ; 
[ any kind of. 



Pronouns. 

(Construed as nouns.) 

Masc. Sing. chacun, f. chacune = 
each one, every one. 

Masc. Sing. quelqu'un = somebody, 
anybody. 
quelques-uns, f. 
quelques-unes = 
some, a few, several. 

Masc. Sing. quelque chose = some- 
thing, anything (in 
the positive sensé). 

Masc. Sing. qui, quiconque = who- 
ever (used chiefly for 
persons in the singu- 
lar). 

Masc. Sing. on, l'on = one, people, 
they. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 



35 



Masc. Sing. autrui = others, one's 
neighbor or fellow- 
man (only for per- 
sons and usually after 
prépositions). If oth- 
ers refers to a distinct 
noun, and therefore 
has not a vague or 
gênerai sensé, trans- 
late by autres. 

Masc. Sing. personne = anybody, 
any one ; (indef.) no- 
body, no one (usually 
with ne). 

Masc. Sing. rien = anything ; noth- 
ing (usually with ne). 

Masc. Sing. l'un l'autre = each 
other. 

Fem. Sing. l'une l'autre = each 
other. 

Masc. PL les uns les autres = 
one another. 

Fem. PI. les unes les autres = 
one another. 



Masc. Sing. 
Masc. Sing. 

Masc. Sing. 
Masc. PI. 
Masc. Sing. 
Masc. PI. 
Masc. Sing. 
Fem. Sing. 
Masc. PI. 
Fem. PI. 



Adjectives or Pronouns. 

nul, f. nulle = no, no one, none (usually with ne). 

aucun, f. aucune = any one (with référence to a distinct 

noun); no, no one, nobody, none (usually with ne), 
tout, f. toute = every, ail, any, whole, everything. 
tous, f. toutes = ail. 
tel, f. telle 
tels, f. telles 
l'un et l'autre 1 
l'une et l'autre J 
les uns et les autres 



such ; un tel = such a (one). 



= both. 



les unes et les autres 



both kinds. 



Remarks. — i. On is the most important indemnité pronoun. It trans- 
lates one, people, they, and we when thèse words hâve in English a vague, 



36 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

gênerai, indefinite or impersonal sensé. It is frequently found as subject 
of a verb in the active voice when, in English, the passive voice would be 
used. Remember that it is used only of persons, always nominatively, and 
always requires a singular verb. 

2. The relatives qui, quel, quoi, OÙ form with a following que indefi- 
nite pronominal phrases : qui que = whoever ; quel que = whatever and 
quoi que = whatever ; où que = wherever. Ex. : qui que vous soyez, 
quelle que soit votre fortune, quoi que vous disiez = whoever y ou may be, 
whatever may be your fortune, whatever y ou may say. 

Exercise 26. 

1. No one 1 is 2 perfect hère below. 2. When one seeks 
truth, one finds it. 3. Both of 3 them 3 came 4 to see my 
father. 4. Put thèse books back each one in its 5 place. 
5. No man 6 is 2 a 3 prophet in his own 3 country. 6. I do not 
know any one who is 7 exempt from faults. 7. They hâve 
loved 8 each other since their childhood. 8. Did any one 9 
corne 10 to see me? Nobody came 2 to see you. 9. We must 
help 11 one another. 10. Every man has some 12 qualities of 
which he is proud. 1 1 . I hear a 13 noise in that room ; I am 
sure that there is some one there. 3 1 2, Whoever is envious 
and mean is naturally sad. 13. No man is 2 perfectly happy. 

14. Men pass one 14 half of their life in 15 regretting the other. 

15. We ail 16 hâve strength enough to 17 bear the ills of others. 

16. No one has 2 ever seriously doubted 18 the existence of 
God. 17. The jealous man 3 loves no one. 18. I hâve never 
seen such 19 audacity. 19. No path of flowers leads 2 to glory. 
20. Speak and we 20 shall listen to you. 21. I want to read 
something ; give me any 21 book. 

1 nul or personne. 2 put ne before the verb and omit pas because the 
subject is a négative word. 3 omit this word. 4 past indefinite; make 
participle agrée with subject. 5 à sa. 6 nul. - 7 présent subjunctive. 
8 s'aiment. 9 unlike ' any one ' in sentence 6, ' any one ' has hère a posi- 
tive sensé, and is équivalent to ' some one ' ; use quelqu'un. 10 past 
indefinite. n a verb followed by ' each other,' ' one another,' must be 
put in the reflexive form in French. 12 ' some ' has hère a more emphatic 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 2>7 

or restrictive sensé than would be implied by des ; use indemnité adjective. 

13 du. u la. 15 à ; must be followed by infinitive présent. 16 ' we hâve 
ail enough of.' 17 pour. 18 insert de. 19 ' a such.' 20 Von ; verb in 
the singular. 21 ' any ' is hère emphatic, standing for any kind of. 

Exercise 27 (Same Subject). 

i. No one is 1 foolish enough 2 to 3 believe him. 2. Every 
one believes himself better than his neighbor. 3. Did you 
meet any one? 4 4. I hâve not read anything 5 interesting. 

5. One recognizes great writers by 6 the simplicity of their style. 

6. Each one of us hopes. None of you will succeed. 1 7. Give 
me 7 other reasons. 8. Each passion speaks a différent lan- 
guage. 8 9. Men sacrifice everything to their passions. 10. No 
one is 1 wise at ail times. 9 11. This pupil is not making any 
progress. 10 12. I hâve not received any 11 of the letters that 
you hâve written 12 to me. 13. Birds seem to talk 13 to one 
another. 14 14. There is never 15 anybody at your house. 
15. Men judge 13 one another ill. 16 16. The two adversaries 
seized 13 each other. 17. No troops 10 were 17 better dis- 
ciplined 12 than those of Napoléon. 18. Every one is always 
indulgent to 3 himself. 18 19. We must bear patiently with the 
faults of others. 20. I saw 19 something 5 pretty to-day. 

1 see note 2 under Exercise 26. 2 hère an adverb of degree; place 
before the adjective and omit de. 3 pour. i see note 9 under Exercise 
26. 5 ' nothing,' 'not anything,' 'something' require de before adjec- 
tives; in compound tenses, the négative forms are placed between auxiliary 
and participle. G à. 7 insert d\ 8 langue (f.) is the language or 
idiom of a particular nation : langage (m.) is the gênerai term, signifying 
the manner in which one expresses his thought. 9 à toute heure. 10 this 
word is commonly used in the plural; adjective must agrée. u féminine 
singular. 12 is there agreement or not? 13 see note 11 of Exercise 26. 

14 construe : ' the ones to the others,' and note the position of ' to ' in the 
two languages. 15 what are the three négatives required in this sentence? 
18 adverb follows verb. 17 past definite. 18 the reflexive pronoun is 
soi-même, not lui-même, when the subject of the verb is an indefinite 
pronoun. 19 past indefinite. 



38 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 



14. 'TOUT,' 'MEME,' 'QUELQUE/ 'QUEL QUE.' 

Tout may be an adjective, a pronoun, an adverb, or a noun. It is 
an adjective, and consequently variable, when it directly pré- 
cèdes the noun. In this case, it lias the sensé of every or any 
when thèse words might be replaced by ail, followed by a plural. 
When accompanied by an article or pronoun, it means ail, ail 
the, the whole, a whole. The plural tous translates ail, every. 

Tout is a pronoun and variable when it translates everything or ail, 
not followed by a noun. As a noun, it means the whole, the 
whole thing. - Ex. : Je prendrai le tout = 1 will take the whole. 

Tout is an adverb, and consequently invariable, when it modifies an 
adjective or other adverb. It is then translated by quite, very, 
wholly, entirely, rather. To préserve the sound of 't,' tout, 
although an adverb, takes the féminine and plural inflections 
before adjectives beginning with a consonant or aspirated ' h.' * 

Même may be an adjective or an adverb. It is an adjective, and 
consequently variable, when it limits a noun. Placed before 
the noun, it means sa?ne ; placed after the noun, it means very. 
Ex. : la même leçon = the saine tesson ; ce jour même = that 
very day. It is also joined to the disjunctive personal pro- 
nouns moi, toi,f etc., and translates self, selves. 

Même is an adverb and invariable when it modifies a verb, an adjec- 
tive, or participle. It then translates even, even thongh. When 
modifying a verb, it usually follows it. 

Quelque may be an adjective or an adverb. It is an adjective and 
variable when it limits a noun. It then translates some, a Utile 
(in the plural a few), and is more restrictive in sensé than the 
partitive articles du, de la, des. 

Quelque . . . que is an adverb and invariable when it modifies an 
adjective or an adverb. As an adverb, it means however. 
Ex. : quelque habile que vous soyez = however clever y on may 

* The Minister's decree authorizing the agreement of tout before fémi- 
nine adjectives beginning with a vowel or silent ' h,' has since been nulli- 
ned by the décision of the French Academy. 

f The usual hyphen which serves to connect thèse pronouns with the 
word même, mêmes may hereafter be omitted. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 39 

be. Tout . . . que is also used with this meaning. With a 
numéral, it means some. Ex. : il y a quelque cinquante ans = 
some Jîfty years ago. 
Quel que, quelle que, quels que, quelles que, written in two words 
and found before verbs, means whatever and agrées in gender 
and number with the subject of the verb. Ex. : quels que 
soient vos talents . . . , quels (talents) que soient vos talents = 
whatever your talents may be. 

Exercise 28. 

1. Any woman will understand that. 2. Everything has 
its place. 3. Every child loves playing. 1 4. Everything dépends 
upon 2 éducation. 5 . We can start ; the boats are ail 3 ready. 
6. Thèse ladies are quite 3 happy. 7. This young lady is quite 4 
confused, quite 4 ashamed. 8. She was 5 quite 4 surprised to see 
me. 9. The whole 6 house bumed/ and they hâve lost every- 
thing. 8 10. Ail 6 serpents are not venomous. n. We ail 9 
hâve the sarae origin. 12. The same causes produce the same 
effects. 13. Even 10 the wicked 11 respect virtue. 14. Some 
crimes always 9 précède great crimes. 15. The gods themselves 
became 5 jealous of the shepherds. 16. Gentleness captivâtes 
ail 6 hearts. 17. We 12 must obey the laws, though 3 unjust. 

18. I received 7 your telegram the very day of my arrivai. 

19. Mothers love even 3 the faults of their children. 20. He 
has some talents ; he will make his way. 21. However 3 good 
your reasons 9 may be, they will not be heard. 13 22. Whatever 14 
human beings may be, we must 15 live with them. 23. We lost 7 
some five hundred men in that engagement. 24. It is easy to 
deceive even 3 the most clever. 11 25. Rome adopted 5 ail the 
gods and ail the superstitions of the peoples whom she had 
vanquished. 16 26. Whatever 14 your illusions may be, time will 
destroy them. 27. From one end of the earth to the other, 
men hâve the same virtues and the same vices. 

1 le jeu. 2 de V '. 3 is the French équivalent for this word, as hère 
used, an adverb or an adjective? 4 why does tout agrée hère, though an 



40 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

adverb? 5 past definite. 6 'all the.' 7 past indefinite. 8 précèdes 
'lost.' 9 place after the verb. 10 place after the noun, and see note 3. 
11 plural. 12 on. 13 ' one will not listen to them.' 14 see examples in 
the rules under quel que. 15 il faut. 16 pluperfect; with what does 
the participle agrée? 

15. VERBS CONJUGATED WITH 'ÊTRE.' 

The following verbs are always conjugated with être. This 
auxiliary should not convey to the American pupil the meaning 
of to be, but of to hâve : thus, il est tombé does not mean he 
is fallen, but he has faïïen. Most of the following are verbs of 
motion, and they usually indicate not only the action, but a 
change of position or condition of the subject as the resuit of 
the action. 

aller = to go. parvenir = to attain, reach,succeed 
partir = to go away, to leave, to in. 

start. provenir = to corne from, to issue, 

sortir = to go out, to corne out. rester = to remain, stay. 

arriver = to arrive. tomber = to fall. 

entrer = to enter, corne in. naître (active in French) = to be 
rentrer = get in, corne home, get born. 

home. éclore = to hatch, to open, to dawn. 

venir = to corne. mourir = to die. 

revenir = to return, to corne back. décéder = to die, to decease, to ex- 
devenir = to become. pire. 

entrevenir = to intervene. advenir = to occur, happen. 

Note. — The exercise given below offers numerous examples of the use 
in French of the past indefinite where the simple past tense is required in 
English. This différence between the two languages should be carefully 
noted by the learner. He should also apply the rule for the agreement of 
the participle with the subject of the verb when the auxiliary is être. 
See page 79. 

Exercise 29. 

1. We went 1 to see your sister yesterday. 2. We found 1 
no one at home ; everybody had gone 2 to 3 the country. 
3. My master went out 1 early this morning, and he has not 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. . 41 

yet returned. 4 4. Did you go ouf 1 yesterday morning? No, 
I stayed 1 at home ail the morning, on account of the bad 
weather. 5. I arrived 1 too late to 3 catch the ten o'clock train. 5 
6. I should hâve arrived in 6 time if I had started 2 two minutes 
sooner. 7. The joke went 1 too far. 8. How long 7 did he 
stay in 6 Paris? 9. Did you return for your sister's wedding? 8 
10. This insect was 9 born and died 2 the same day. n. My 
sister fell 1 in 6 the middle of the street. 12. The Jews had 
left 10 Egypt under the guidance of Moses. 13. Reading has 
become a cheap 11 pleasure. 14. Your brother went out 1 to 3 
buy a newspaper. 15. He got into 12 the carriage with his 
father, and I hâve not seen 13 him since. 16. The works of 
this author perished 14 with 15 him. 17. I should hâve died 
rather than 16 consent to that proposition. 18. People 17 hâve 
succeeded in 6 taming thèse wild u beasts. 19. About twelve 
o'clock, 18 I came down 1 to the dining-room to eat 19 my lunch. 
20. I hâve not seen your friend lately. What has become of 
him? 20 21. We entered 1 the boat and 21 started. 1 22. A 
new project has dawned 22 in his imagination. 23. We came 
home l very late. 24. Ail sciences, ail arts were 9 born 23 among 
free n nations. 

1 past indefinite. 2 pluperfect of partir. 3 pour. * rentré. 5i train 
of ten hours.' 6 à. 7 combien de temps. 8 les noces de. 9 présent. 
10 pluperfect of sortir de. n place after the noun. 12 monter en ; omit 
' the.' 13 revoir. 14 mourir. 15 comme. 16 phitôt que de. 1T on. 
18 vers midi. 19 prendre. 20 ' what has he become ? ' 21 repeat subject. 
22 éclos. 23 masculine plural. 



16. REFLEXIVE VERBS. 

Simple and Compound Tenses. 

The following are among the most frequently found of re- 
flexive verbs ; the meanings of some differ when the verb is 
not reflexive : as, douter = to doubt; se douter = to suspect. 



42 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 



The compound tenses of reflexive verbs always take être, 
and the past participle agrées with the pronoun objects me, te, 
se, nous, vous, se. 



tromper = to deceive. 

se tromper = to be mistaken. 

appeler = to call. 

s'appeler = to be named. 

servir = to serve. 

se servir de = to use. 

lever = to raise. 

se lever = to rise. 

plaire = to please. 

se plaire à = to delight in, to like. 

s'amuser = to enjoy one's self. 

s'arrêter = to stop. 

se fier à = to trust. 

se coucher = to go to bed. 

s'habiller = to dress. 

s'endormir = to go to sleep. 

se taire = to be silent, to keep si- 
lence. 

s'efforcer = to endeavor. 

s'ennuyer = to be bored, lonesome ; 
to find time tedious. 



trouver = to find. 

se trouver = to be. 

apercevoir = to see. 

s'apercevoir = to notice, become 

aware of. 
passer = to pass. 
se passer de = to do without. 
aller = to go. 
s'en aller = to go away. 
rire = to laugh. 
se rire de = to make fun of. 
se rappeler = to recall. 
se souvenir de = to remember. 
s'emparer de = to seize, to take 

possession. 
s'empresser = to be eager to. 
s'approcher de = to corne up, go 

up to. 
s'éloigner de = corne away from, 

go away from. 



Exercise 30. 

i. We abstained 1 from any 2 remarks. 2. Were you lone- 
some 3 while I was 4 absent? 3. I hâve always rejoiced over 
your success. 4. Why did you not come? We should hâve 
been delighted 5 to see you. 5. If I had 6 youth and health, I 
should not mind 7 poverty. 6. One often 8 repents having 9 
spoken. 7. Why did you go away 3 from the window? 8. Do 
you remember thèse young ladies? g. You forgot * to water 
your flowers, and they hâve faded. 1 10. The French took pos- 
session 1 of Holland in the dead of 10 winter. 11. The love of 
the native 8 soil never 8 dies 11 in the heart of raan. 12. Fish 
are caught 12 with hooks, and men are caught with présents. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 43 

13. If any one had entered the apartment, I should hâve 
waked up. 14. The wicked fear, 13 hâte, avoid one another. 
15. My father will be angry if you stop to 14 talk with 
me. 16. You are sleepy because you went to bed 1 late last 
night. 17. The things of which we complain 15 most bitterly 
are sometimes very insignincant. 18. Use my dictionary. 
19. He remembers that you made fun l of him. 20. Make 
haste to rise and 16 dress yourself. 21. My mother likes to cul- 
tivate her flowers. 22. You behaved 1 very well 17 in that affair. 
23. I noticed 18 that you had gone to sleep. 19 24. Don't worry 
too much about the future. 

1 past indefinite. 2 toutes. 3 in the interrogative of compound tenses 
of reflexive verbs, the object pronoun précèdes, and the subject pronoun 
follows the auxiliary. 4 imperfect. 5 past conditional of se bien réjouir 
de. 6 change to avec. 7 présent conditional of se soucier peu de. s place 
after word modified. 9 infinitive présent. 10 dans le fort de. u s* éteindre. 
12 se prendre. 13 place se before each of thèse verbs and omit ' one 
another.' 14 à. 15 insert le. 16 repeat préposition. 17 place between 
auxiliary and participle. 18 past definite. 19 pluperfect. 

17. ACTIVE VOICE WITH < ON ' FOR THE SUBJECT. 

Note. — In the following exercise, the subjects of ail the principal 
verbs, — such words as people, we, one, they, mortals, men, etc., — must be 
rendered into French by the indefinite pronoun on, and the verbs and ail 
attributes of the subject must agrée with it in the singular. 

Exercise 31. 

1. People envy the fate of a rich 1 and beautiful young girl. 
2. We praise noble 2 deeds, but we do not imitate them. 3. One 
is never ugly when one has a beautiful soûl. 4. Mortals wear 
away life in 3 pursuing 4 happiness, and 5 die without having 4 
attained it. 5. People often 6 lose their " réputation for having 4 
ill chosen their 8 friends. 6. We cease to be unhappy when we 
begin to hope. 7. Much rest is often lost 9 for a little gold. 
8. People rarely 6 succeed when they 5 undertake a great many 



44 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

things at once. 9. Men are moulded 9 by éducation. 10. When 
we hâve not what we 10 like, we must u like what we 10 hâve. 

11. The beloved 6 voice of a friend is easily 6 recognized. 9 

12. When we are hungry, the coarsest 6 food seems deli- 
cious. 13. Men run to 12 a venge a light offence and they 10 
often 6 forgive a very serious 6 wrong. 14. We do not hâte ail 
those whom we 10 despise. 15. Joseph's cup was found 13 in 
Benjamin's bag. 16. When we oblige a 12 friend 12 promptly, 
we oblige him 12 twofold. 17. The canary is more easily 6 
raised 9 than the nightingale. 18. The 12 more one talks, the 12 
less one thinks. 19. It was formerly believed 9 that the appear- 
ance of a cornet foreboded 14 great events. 20. One succeeds 
in many things with a little patience. 21. It was formerly 
believed 9 that the earth was 14 flat. 

1 place 'rich' and 'beautiful' after the noun. 2 les belles. 3 à. 
4 remember that, with the exception of en, ail prépositions govern the 
infinitive. 5 repeat on. 6 place after the word modified. 7 sa. 8 ses. 
9 change to active form, thus: on perd souvent bien du, etc. 10 Pon. 
11 il faut. 12 omit this word. 13 past definite; see note 9. 14 put 
both verbs in the imperfect. 



18. FOUR IMPORTANT MODAL VERBS: 'DEVOIR,' 'FALLOIR,' 
«POUVOIR/ 'VOULOIR.' 

a. Devoir : to owe ; must, to hâve to ; to be to ; ought, etc. 

Note. — This verb, of constant use in French, offers much difficulty 
to the learner. Not defective in a single part, its différent tenses 
correspond to a number of defective English auxiliaries : must {must 
hâve had to, s hall hâve to, shoidd hâve to), to be to (am to, was to), 
ought (ought to hâve), etc. Whenever thèse English verbs refer to 
some past action, their forms remain unchanged, but the infinitive 
following them changes from a présent to a past ; this is because the 
English modal verbs hâve no form for the past participle. In French, 
the infinitive remains unchanged, while the auxiliary verb is put in a 
compound tense, exactly like any other verb. Ex. : / ought to say, 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 



45 



I onght to hâve said = je devrais dire, j'aurais dû dire. This différ- 
ence in the construction is also observable in pouvoir and falloir. 

The following conjugation of devoir, — as well as that of falloir, 
pouvoir, vouloir, given further, — is intended to assist the student in 
understanding the literal and idiomatic meanings of the most impor- 
tant tenses of thèse verbs ; the less common tenses and more infre- 
quent constructions hâve been purposely omitted, so as'not to confuse 
the mind of the learner at this stage of his work. He should memo- 
rize perfectly the meanings of the moods and tenses given, and 
constantly refer to them while translating the English forms into 
French. 



Indicative 
Présent : 

Indicative 
Imperfect : 

Past 
Definite : 



Future : 



Conditional 
Présent : 



Subjunctive 
Présent : 



Subjunctive 
Imperfect : 



Simple Tenses. 

Je dois = I owe. 

Je dois aller = I am to go, I must go, I hâve to go, I 

am obliged to go, it is necessary for me to go. 
Je devais = I owed, I was owing. 
Je devais aller = I was to go, I had to go, I was obliged 

to go, it was necessary for me to go. 
Je dus = I owed. 
Je dus aller = I had to go, I was obliged to go, it was 

necessary for me to go. 
Je devrai = I s h ail owe. 
Je devrai aller = I shall hâve to go, I shall be obliged 

to go, it will be necessary for me to go. 
Je devrais = I should owe. 
Je devrais aller = I ought to go, I should go, I should 

hâve to go, I should be obliged to go, it would be 

necessary for me to go. 
Que je doive = that I may or shall owe. 
Que je doive aller = that I may hâve to go, that I must 

go, that I may be obliged to go, that it may or shall 

be necessary for me to go. 
Que je dusse = that I might or should owe. 
Que je dusse aller = that I might hâve to go, that I 

should be obliged to go, that I should hâve to go, 

that it might or would be necessary for me to go. 



4 6 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 



Past 
Indefinite 



Indicative 
Pluperfect : 



Future 
Anterior 



Conditional 
Past: 



COMPOUND TENSES. 

" J'ai dû = I hâve owed. 
J'ai dû aller = I hâve had to go, I hâve been obliged 
to go, it has been necessary for me to go, I must 
hâve go ne. 
' J'avais dû = I had owed. 
J'avais dû aller = I had had to go, I had been obliged 
to go, it had been necessary for me to go. 
r J'aurai dû = I shall hâve owed. 
J'aurai dû aller = I shall hâve had to go, I shall hâve 
been obliged to go, it will hâve been necessary for 
me to go, I must hâve gone. (The future ante- 
rior of ordinary verbs sometknes has this idio- 
matic meaning. Ex. : elle aura rencontré sa mère, 
she must hâve met her mother.) 
' J'aurais dû = I should hâve owed. 
J'aurais dû aller = I ought to hâve gone, I shculd hâve 
gone, I should hâve had to go, I should bave been 
obliged to go, it would hâve been necessary for me 
togo. 



Exercise 32. 

Note. — In the following exercise, where must or its équivalents occur, 
devoir and not falloir must be used. Remember that when devoir is 
used as an auxiliary, it never takes any préposition before the following 
infinitive. 

i. She is looking at you curiously ; she must be surprised to 
see you hère. 2. You must 1 hâve been 2 very glad to see your 
friend again after such a long 3 séparation. 3. Your mother is to 
meet you at our house at three o'clock. 4. The poor little créa- 
ture must be frozen. 5. I ought 4 not to speak of myself. 

6. The best of 5 things must be taken 6 in 7 small quantities. 8 

7. She ought 9 to hâve shown 2 more tenderness. 8. Every 
mortal must act. 9. Thèse were 10 reasons which I could 11 
not but 5 understand. 10. He must 1 hâve left 2 you a great 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. tf 

deal of money. n. Tell him that he ought 4 to be ashamed 
of 5 himself. 5 12. I related 12 to him how I had had to 13 part 
from my only friend. 13. You must 1 hâve walked 2 a long 
time ; how hungry you must ail be ! 14 14. You must hâve 
been told 15 that I was 16 a 5 great friend of your father. 15. I 
am going to see the judge who is to question you to-morrow. 
16. Young men must ask counsel of 17 old men. 17. The feast 
was to u last ail night. 18. You must hâve received 1S a very bad 
impression of me. 19. My sister should 9 not hâve corne ; 2 she 
ought to hâve stayed quietly at home. 20. We must make 
moderate use 19 of the advantages that fortune procures us. 
21. He who is loved by ail should 4 live fore ver. 22. I do not 
know if he is to marry her. 23. The countess was 16 the 
woman who ovved 16 her the most. 24. He must hâve had 20 
time to hide them. 25. He must hâve gone 20 to see them 
yesterday. 26. He did not 21 hâve 16 his watch ; he must 13 
hâve sold it to buy différent objects for himself 22 and 23 me. 
2 7. My son-in-law is a raan ; he ought 4 to protect me. 28. You, 
too, 24 must be very much 5 changed. 29. It was there that we 
were to 16 spend the night. 30. You ought not to remain thus 
six weeks without writing to your mother. 31. He knew 16 that 
this 25 was to 16 cure him. 32. We must take some 26 précautions 
against the cold. 33. He must hâve hidden 20 himself some- 
where while we were 16 out of doors. 34. You should 4 not 
allow that child to behave thus. 35. In a few days, you will 
know what you will hâve to 27 do. 

1 past indefinite. 2 put in the présent infinitive. 3 une si longue. 
4 observe that the spécial function of the présent conditional of devoir is to 
translate ' ought ' or ' should ' as used hère. 5 omit this word. 6 past 
participle must agrée in the féminine plural. 7 en, not dans, is generally 
used when the following noun is not preceded by an article or limiting 
adjective. 8 singular. 9 past conditional. 10 c" 1 étaient-là des. n trans- 
late by the imperfect of devoir in the affirmative. 12 past delinite. 13 plu- 
perfect of devoir. u turn : ' how (comme) you must hâve ail hunger!' 
15 change this passive to the active voice, and see notes 1 and 2. 1G imper- 



4 8 



fect. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 



emporte?'. 19 user avec modération. 20 replace devoir 



by future anterior of this verb. 21 plus. 22 lui. 
24 repeat the subject. 25 cela. 26 nos. 27 future. 



repeat préposition. 






b. Falloir : must, to hâve to, to be obliged to, to be necessary. 



Indicative 
Présent : 

Future : 

Indicative 
Imperfect : 

Past 
Definite : 

Conditional 
Présent : 

Subjunctive 
Présent : 

Subjunctive 
Imperfect : 

Past 

Indefinite : 



Pluperfect : 



Conditional 
Past: 



Il faut que vous veniez = you must corne, it is neces- 
sary that you should corne. 

Il faudra que vous veniez = you must corne, you will 
hâve to come, you will be obliged to come, it will 
be necessary for you to come. 

Il fallait que vous vinssiez = you should hâve come, 
you had to come, you were obliged to come, it was 
necessary that you should come. 

Il fallut que vous vinssiez ( = same meanings as those 
of the imperfect, but referring to some definite 
moment in the past). 

Il faudrait que vous vinssiez = you should hâve to 
come, you would be obliged to come, it would be 
necessary for you to come, you ought to come. 

Croyez-vous qu'il faille venir ? = do you think that I 
must come ? that I should come ? that it is neces- 
sary for me to come? 

Croyiez-vous qu'il fallût venir? = did you think that I 
should come ? that I had to come ? that I was obliged 
to come? that it was necessary for me to come? 

Il a fallu que vous vinssiez = you hâve had to come, 
you hâve been obliged to come, it has been neces- 
sary for you to come. 

Il avait fallu que vous vinssiez = you had had to come, 
you had been obliged to come, it had been neces- 
sary for you to come. 

Il aurait fallu que vous vinssiez = you would hâve had 
to come, you would hâve been obliged to corne, it 
would hâve been necessary for you to come, you 
ought to hâve come. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 49 

Falloir as the équivalent of the impersonal verb it takes : — 

Il lui faut une heure pour venir ici = it takes her an hour to corne 

hère. 
Il lui fallait, etc. = it used to take her an hour, etc. 
Il lui fallut, etc. = it took her (on one particular occasion) an hour 

to come hère. 
Il lui faudra, etc. = it will take her, etc. 
Il lui faudrait, etc. = it would take her, etc. 
Croyez-vous quïl lui faille, etc. = do you think it will take, etc. 
Croyiez-vous qu"il lui fallût, etc. = did you think it would take, etc. 
Il lui a fallu, etc. = it has taken her, etc. 
Il lui avait fallu, etc. = it had taken her, etc. 
Il lui aura fallu, etc. = it will hâve taken, etc. 
Il lui aurait fallu, etc. = it would hâve taken, etc. 

Other meanings of falloir are : to want, to need, to lack. 
Ex. : avez-vous tout ce qu'il vous faut? Il me faut une chan- 
delle et du savon = hâve you ail that yoti need? I need a 
candie and some soap ; il lui faut encore dix francs = he still 
lacks ten francs. 

Note. — The following remarks are to be carefully studied by the pupil : 
they are intended to emphasize some of the différences which exist 
between the nature and uses of falloir and must. 

1. Falloir is an impersonal verb; must is not. 

2. Falloir is defective in the présent participle only; must is 

defective in ail parts but one ; and, as in the case of 
devoir, replaces the parts wanting by to hâve to, to be 
oblige d to, etc. 

3. It is necessary naturally suggests itself to the mind of the 

beginner as the proper translation for il faut, because 
both forms are impersonal and therefore seem to corre- 
spond, but they do not always in sensé. On the contrary, 
the impersonal verb to be necessary would, in many 
cases, mistranslate falloir, which has not only ail the im- 
perative force of must, but ail the forms of mood and 



.SO EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

tense which are lacking in must; thus, il ne faut pas que 
vous trahissiez sa confiance does not mean it is not neces- 
sary that you should betray his confidence, but you must 
not betray his confidence. 
4. Falloir, as a verb of necessity, is followed either by an in- 
finitive past or présent, or by a subjunctive clause. The 
latter construction is considered to give more clearness, 
more definiteness, to the statement. The infmitive con- 
veys the idea of necessity in a more gênerai, more vague 
and less personal sensé. Ex. : il faut payer ses dettes = 
011e must pay one's debts ; il faut pardonner à ses amis = 
we should forgive our friends ; il faut s'accoutumer aux 
petites misères de la vie = we must get used to the small 
worries of life. However, the infmitive often follows 
when the idea of personal necessity is implied by some 
sentence preceding falloir. Ex. : vous arrivez toujours 
un peu en retard; il faut partir plus tôt = you always 
arrive a Utile late ; you must star t ear lier. 

Exercise 33. 

Note. — In the following exercise, where must or its équivalents occur, 
falloir and not devoir must be used. While in some cases synonyms, 
falloir corresponds more closely to the English verb in expressing impera- 
tive necessity. It will also translate properly the passive voice. Ex. : he 
must be spoken to ; il faut qu'on lui parle. When falloir is in a past 
or conditional tense, it is followed by the infmitive rather than the sub- 
junctive. 

1. The child must 1 obey. 2. You must go and 2 see your 
aunt to-morrow. 3. I hâve exactly what I need. 3 4. We 4 
must think deeply 5 before we act. 6 5. It was necessary 7 that 
you should keep me informed 8 of this affair. 6. You must 
endure what you cannot prevent. 7. We shall hâve to get up 9 
very early to take that train. 8. We 4 must render to each 
one what is due to him. 9. We shall hâve to get under 
shelter 10 in the first house we meet. 11 10. The law must 1 be 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 5 1 

severe and men indulgent, n. We 4 must not judge a man 12 
by what he says, but by what he does. 12. He has to be 
amused 13 like a child. 13. My father must not suspect that 
we hâve talked together. 14. It did not take 14 me long to 
understand the cause of ail thèse cries. 15. You spoke 15 to 
me, but I did not hear you ; you must speak louder. 16. You 
must accept my proposition now or never. 17. I should give 
up my rights if I had to 7 claim them before the courts. 
18. One 4 must not occupy houses that 2 are 2 badly built and 
unhealthy. 19. He is in a perspiration ; 1G he must hâve run. 17 
20. We must 13 keep some provisions for our dinner. 21. One 
of us will hâve to sit up 18 to keep up the fire. 22. This affair 
must 1 be promptly concluded. 23. I did not believe 7 that it 
would be necessary 19 to take this journey. 24. It was neces- 
sary 14 that Heaven should raise 20 Joan of Arc to deliver France 
from the English. 25. Hère is one card of invitation; you 
don't need two. 21 26. It must be confessed 13 that I, too, was 
terribly hungry. 22 27. One 4 must know how 2 to be rich. 
28. Will it take you very 2 long to run to my sister's? 29. Do 
you think it is necessary ^ to pay that money now ? 30. If I 
had not had to 24 take care of 25 the house, I should hâve gone 
to your house. 31. It is 26 ten o'clock; I must 1 leave you. 
32. Your master owes me too much money already;-' you 
must go away from hère. 

1 ' it is necessary that.' 2 omit this word. 3 'what to me is neces- 
sary.' i such subjects as ' we,' ' one,' etc., found before must in sentences 
where the idea expressed is gênerai or impersonal, must be rendered into 
French by il. 5 réfléchir mûrement. 6 intinitive présent. v imperfect. 
8 me tenir au courant. 9 in this construction, the verb may be translated 
either by the subjunctive présent of the corresponding French verb, or by 
the infinitive, as in English, preceded by a personal pronoun object of the 
same person as the subject of the (irst verb. 10 se mettre à l'abri ; see 
note 9. n future. 12 juger de quelqu'un. 1:î ' it is necessary to ' . . . 
14 use past definite of falloir, 15 past indelinite. 1C en nage. 17 trans- 
late 'hâve run' by the third person singular of the past subjunctive of 



52 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 



courir. 18 turn : ' it will be necessary that one of us sit up ' (présent 
subjunctive). 19 imperfect subjunctive. ^suscitât. 21 add ' of them' 
and place before the verb. 22 ' had a hunger terrible.' 23 présent sub- 
junctive of falloir. 24 pluperfect indicative of falloir, preceded by m 1 ; 
omit the second négative. 25 garder. 26 voici. 27 place immediately 
after devoir. 



c. Pouvoir : can, could ; may, might ; to be able. 

Indicative 

Présent : 

Indicative 

Imperfect : 

Past 

Definite : 



Je peux or puis aller = I can go, I may go. 
Je pouvais aller = I could go, I was able to go. 



Future : 



Je pus aller = I could go, I was able to go (on some 
particular occasion) . 

Je pourrai aller = I can go, I shall go, I shall be able 
togo. 

Conditional J je pourrais aller = I could go, I might go, I should be 

Présent : | able to go. 
Subjunctive f Que je puisse aller = that I can or may go, that I shall 

Présent : *| g , that I may be able to go. 
Subjunctive f Que je pusse aller = that I could or might go, that I 
Imperfect : 1 should be able to go. 

Past J J'ai pu aller = I could go, I can hâve gone, I hâve been 
Indefinite : \ able to go, I was able to go. 

Indicative f Javais pu aller = I could hâve gone, I had been able 
Pluperfect : 1 to go. 

Future f J'aurai pu aller = I shall hâve been able to go, it will 
Anterior : j hâve been possible for me to go. 
Conditional f J'aurais pu aller = I could hâve gone, I might hâve 
Past : | gone, I should or might hâve been able to go. 

f Que j'aie pu aller = that I may hâve or shall hâve 
Subjunctive J gQn ^ that j can haye gon ^ that j may have been 

I able to go. 
Subjunctive f Que j'eusse pu aller = that I might or should have 
Pluperfect : 1 gone, that I might or should have bèen able to go. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 53 

Infinitive Past : Avoir pu aller = to hâve been able to go. 

_ ,, . • i -s Ayant pu aller — having been able to go. 

Présent Participle : [ ' • * 6 6 

Note the following remarks : — 

i. The second négative is frequently omitted after pouvoir, 
and no préposition ever follows directly. 

2. Notice that the compound tenses of pouvoir are followed 

by an infinitive présent in French, and translated by the 
past of the infinitive verb in English. This is because 
the ordinary English équivalents of pouvoir — can, could, 
may, might — hâve no participle forms. Ex. : j'aurais 
pu aller chez lui = / could hâve gone to his house. 

3. The use of pouvais and pourrais should not be confused. 

Pouvais is past, and translates could in the sensé of was 
able; pourrais is conditional or potential, and translates 
could in the sensé of would be able, might, might be able. 

4. The future, and not the présent, must be used to translate 

can, when the verb refers to a future and not a présent 
action. Ex. : je ne sais pas si je pourrai venir demain = 
I do not know if I can corne to-morrow. 

5. Pouvoir is also used in such reflexive and impersonal forms 

as il se peut, irr the sensé of it may be, it is possible. 
When so used, it is always followed by the subjunctive. 

6. The subjunctive présent of pouvoir used independently 

translates may, to express desi?-e, wish, congratulations. 
Ex. : puissiez-vous être heureux ! = may you be happy ! 

7. When ' I cannot,' ' I could not,' mean / do not know how, 

thèse forms are sometimes translated by the conditional 
of savoir instead of pouvoir. In this use of the verb, 
pas is omitted. Ex. : je ne saurais vous dire où elle 
demeure = I could not tell you where she lives ; l'homme 
le plus heureux ne saurait se passer d'un ami == the hap- 
piest of men cannot do without a friend. 



54 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

Exercise 34. 

i. Could x you tell me what plant is the most useful 2 to man? 
2. When I can 3 follow you, I shah 1 . 4 3. I did not do the way 5 
you told 6 me to do, because I couldn't. 7 4. May I talk 8 with 
you for half an hour? 5. You might 9 hâve broken 10 your leg. 
6. Not knowing Latin, you might 11 forget this word. 7. You 
told 7 my sister that you could 1 not corne to dine at our 
house. 8. I hâve never been able to speak of it to any one. 
9. I might 11 perhaps givê you a good counsel. 10. My 
brother could 1 not believe that he had spoken 12 so indiscreetly. 
11. That is unfortunate, but we 13 can't help it. 14 12. Never 
can 3 I 15 leave the country where I was born. 13. You would 
like 16 to remain hère, but that cannot 17 be. 14. Agriculture is 
the noblest occupation 18 whictTa man can 19 follow. 20 15. I 
cannot accept your conditions. 16. How can 7 you hâve 
passed 21 ten long 22 days without seeing her? 17. She used to 
scold 23 me gravely as a mother 24 might hâve 9 done. 25 18. One 
moment 26 may destroy a century of happiness. 19. You will 
do ail you can 3 to go to sleep? 20. The lover might 11 suspect 
that he has a rival. 21. He has done ail that he could 7 to 
render me that service. 22. I hâve spent many 27 hours in 28 
asking myself how I could 6 hâve said such a thing. 29 23. You 
are right; I could not 30 live without you. 24. You think you 
can 31 dépend on that young man? 25. Heaven grant 32 you 
long and happy days ! 26. I am afraid that you cannot 19 suc- 
ceed. 27. No one can read thèse touching words without 
weeping. 28. I do not know what 33 others might hâve 9 thought 
of me ; but to be sincère, I must déclare that I thought 23 myself 
superb. 29. Although my friend was 34 guilty, I could 23 not 
think 35 of abandoning him. 30. Since I had left Paris, I had 
not been able to earn a cent. 31. A grand inquisitor might 
hâve 12 envied that smile. 32. I thought 36 that in the midst of 
thèse blocks of granité, we might u flnd a shelter against the 
coolness of the night. ^^. Where can 7 he hâve hidden them? 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 55 

34. I do not know if I can 3 come to-morrow. Why could you 
not come to-morrow? Because I hâve a thousand things to 28 
do. 35. I could 9 not hâve finished this work, if you had not 
helped 6 me. 36. May I be useful to you in 37 anything? 
37. I hâve only you to whom I can 19 complain. 38. Who 
could weary of admiring nature? 39. If I thought 23 that 
your project could 34 succeed, I would not refuse to take 
part in it. 38 

1 see remark (3). 2 turn: 'what is the plant the most useful.' 3 see 
remark (4). 4 repeat 'follow.' 5 comme. 6 put the French verb in the 
pluperfect indicative. 7 past indefinite. 8 s'entretenir avec. 9 past con- 
ditional of pouvoir. 10 put this verb in the refiexive form and translate the 
following possessive adjective by une. n présent conditional of pouvoir. 
12 put the French verb in the pluperfect subjunctive. 13 insert y. 14 ' help 
it ' must be rendered by rien. 15 must précède ' can.' 16 présent condi- 
tional of vouloir. 17 use the refiexive form. 18 métier, m. 19 présent 
subjunctive. 20 exercer. 21 rester. 22 grands. 23 imperfect indicative. 
24 place after the predicate. 25 put this verb in the présent infinitive. 
26 instant, m. 27 bien des. 28 à. ^parole, f. 30 see remark (7). 31 ren- 
der ' you can ' by infinitive présent. 32 turn : ' give you some,' and see 
remark (6). 33 insert d\ 34 imperfect subjunctive. 35 ' hâve the idea to' 
{de). 36 past definite. 37 en. 38 de ni 1 y associer. 

d. Vouloir : to want, to wish, to will ; Vouloir bien, to be willing 
to, to agrée to, to consent, to acquiesce. 

Indicative f J e veux = 1 wish ' l want > l wilL 
p t . ^ J e veux bien = I am willing, I consent, etc. 

[ Je ne veux pas = I will not, I don't want to, I won't. 

Indicative J Je voulais = I wished, I wanted, I would. 

Imperfect : 1 Je ne voulais pas = I did not want to, I wouldn't. 

Je voulus = I wished, I wanted, I would (on a par- 

ticular occasion) . 

Je ne voulus pas = I did not wish or want to, I 

wouldn't. 

Je voudrai = I shall wish, I shall want, I will, etc. 

Je ne voudrai pas = I shall not want to. 



Past 
Definite 



Future 



56 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 



' Je voudrais = I should like, I should wish to or want 
to, I would. 
Je voudrais bien — I should very much like to. 
Je ne voudrais pas = I shouldn't like to, I wouldn't. 
Subjunctive J Que je veuille = that I may or that I shall wish to or 
Présent : j want to. 

Que je voulusse = that I might or that I should wish 

to or want to. 
Jai voulu = I wanted, I wished, I would, I hâve 

wished, I hâve wanted, I hâve been willing. 
J'ai bien voulu = I hâve agreed, consented, acqui- 

esced. 
Je n'ai pas voulu = I didn't wish to or want to, I 
wouldn't. 



Conditional 



Subjunctive 
Imperfect : 



Past 
Indefinite 



Indicative 
Pluperfect : 



J'avais voulu = I had wished or wanted. 

Je n'avais pas voulu = I hadn't wanted to or wished 

to. 
J'aurais voulu = I should hâve liked, I should hâve 



Conditional T'aurais bien voulu = I should hâve liked ever so 
Past : much to, etc. 

Je n'aurais pas voulu = I shouldn't hâve wished to 
or wanted to, I wouldn't hâve. 
Subjunctive J Que j'aie voulu = that I may or shall hâve wished or 

, Past : wanted. 

Subjunctive f Que j'eusse voulu = that I might or should hâve 
Pluperfect : | wished or wanted. 



Note the following remarks : — 

Will is used in English either to form a future tense : she 
will return soon = elle reviendra bientôt ; or, to express 
wish, désire, willingness, consent, acquiescence : will you 
go to the garden with me ? = voulez-vous aller au jardin 
avec moi ? Notice that the verb vouloir translates only 
the latter of thèse two meanings. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 57 

2. Je veux translates / wish, I want, in the sensé of 'it is my 

will.' Ex. : / want y ou to go out every day = je veux que 
vous sortiez tous les jours. Je voudrais translates / wish, 
I want, in the sensé of 1 1 should like,' ' it is my désire.' 
Ex. : Iwish, I want, I would like to speak to my mother = 
je voudrais parler à ma mère. 

3. When the désire or wish expressed refers to one's self, 

the following verb is put in the infinitive as in English. 
Ex. : / want to start immediately = je veux partir tout de 
suite. But when that désire or will refers to some one 
else, the following verb cannot, as in English, be put in 
the infinitive, but must be put in a subjunctive tense. 
Ex. : I want y ou to le ave immediately — je veux que vous 
partiez tout de suite. 

4. Veuillez — an imperative and subjunctive forai of vouloir — 

is frequently used for 'please,' 'be kind enough to,' etc. 
Ex. : please w ait for me hère = veuillez m 'attendre ici. 

5. After devoir, falloir, pouvoir, vouloir, the infinitive which 

complètes the sensé of thèse verbs is often omitted in 
French as in English. Ex. : You hâve not given this 
matter ail the attention that you should '= vous n'avez pas 
donné à cette affaire toute l'attention que vous auriez dû ; 
he was trying to talk, but he couldrft = il s'efforçait de 
parler, mais il ne le pouvait ; you don't want to obey, but 
you must = vous ne voulez pas obéir, mais il le faut ; / 
begged him to stay, but he wouldrft = je l'ai prié de rester, 
mais il n'a pas voulu. 

Exercise 35. 

1. Will you stay with me while your mother is 1 in 2 the 
country? 2. I should hâve liked to wait for you; but I was 3 
afraid of missing my train. 3. She hesitated; 3 she did not 
want 3 to let him go. 4 4. He could 5 hâve written, if he had 
wished 6 to. 7 5. Please tell my cousin that I ara waiting for 



58 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

her. 6. Would you like to speak to my father? 7. You could 
hâve gone 4 with them. Yes, but I did not want 8 to. 7 8. He 
could 9 serve me in this matter, if he wished. 3 9. I regret that 
you do not wish 10 to follow my advice. 11 10. If you wish to 
succeed, you must work. 1 1 . I should hâve written to you, if 
you had wished it. 12. Will you accept my father's proposi- 
tion? 13. I should like 9 to be able to relieve ail the suffer- 
ing 12 that I see. 14. I will do everything that you want 1 us to 
do. 13 15. If you like, 14 I will go and 7 get him. 16. We should 
like to speak to your daughter in private. 15 17. Does she want 
to go with us or stay with them? 18. It is not possible that 
your mother wishes 10 to leave us so soon. 19. What do you 
want me to do 13 with 16 such a sum? 20. Be good enough to 
carry 17 this letter to its address. 21. I wanted 3 to take 18 you 
to the park. 22. You do not know whether 19 she will want to 
stay hère after your departure. 23. The lazy boy 7 would like 
to eat the nut, but he does not want to break the shell. 24. I 
wished 20 to explain my reasons to him, but he would 20 not lis- 
ten to me. 25. I should like 5 to hâve slept, but I was too 
thoroughly excited 21 to 22 find calm and sleep. 26. The master 
wants me to know 13 my lessons well. 15 27. I am willing to for- 
give him. 28. We should like to accept your kind 23 invitation. 
29. May God help you ! 24 30. I would like 5 to hâve said 
good-by to my father. 

1 future. 2 à. 3 imperfect. 4 partir. 5 past conditional. 6 plu- 
perfect. 7 omit this word. 8 past indefinite. 9 présent conditional. 
10 présent subjunctive. n plural. 12 tous les malheureux. 13 for the 
construction, see remark (3). 14 présent indicative of vouloir. 15 put 
adverbs or adverbial phrases directly after the verb. 16 de. 17 remettre. 
18 enwiener ; retain the infinitive form of the verb and place the pronoun 
object before it. 19 si ; the future of the verb is never used after si, 
except when it stands for ' whether,' as in this case. 20 past defmite of 
vouloir. 21 profondément ému. 22 pour. 23 aimable. 24 construe : 
' may (çue) God wish (subjunctive présent*) to assist you ! ' 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 59 

19. USES OF THE PAST INDEFINITE, PAST DEFINITE, 
AND IMPERFECT. 

a. Past Indefinite (Présent Perfect). 

Did you see my father? Yes, I saw him but I did not speak 
to him = avez-vous vu mon père ? Oui, je l'ai vu, mais je ne 
lui ai pas parlé. Observe that in English the interrogative 
and négative sentences are formed by the use of the auxiliary 
verb did and the infinitive see, while in the affirmative sentence, 
the verb is put in the simple past tense saw. Then, note that 
ail three of thèse verbs are rendered into French by the past 
indefinite of voir. In translating such sentences, the student 
should be on his guard against falling into the natural error of 
using the imperfect to which he at first inclines, partly because 
it is a simple tense, and also because it is the first past tense 
usually given in the conjugation of French verbs. On the 
contrary, he should make it a gênerai rule to use the past 
indefinite, which may be called the great narrative tense of 
colloquial or conversational French, though it is also found in 
literary style. The time of the action it describes may be 
definitely specified or not ; it may hâve entirely elapsed or 
not; but thèse actions are usually of récent occurrence and 
may be defined as the separate and detached individual acts 
and doings of everyday life. This accounts for the constant 
use made of this tense, which the student must learn to look 
upon as the proper one to render ideas or describe actions 
which, in English, would often hâve to be expressed by the 
simple past. 

It should be added that the past indefinite corresponds 
exactly to the English présent perfect when the latter is used 
to express the state of vacuity that follows the finishing of an 
action. Ex.: / hâve s tu die d French = j' 'ai étudié le français 
(/ am no longer studying it) ; she has been hère = elle a été 
ici {she is no longer hère) . 



60 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

However, the past indefinite is not the équivalent of the 
présent perfect when the latter refers to a state or action 
which had its beginning in the past, but still continues in the 
présent. In this case, the French requires the présent tense. 
Ex. : my sister has been hère three years = ma sœur est ici 
depuis trois ans. 

b. Past Definite. 

The past definite, sometimes called prétérit and also the 
narrative tense, is used to speak of actions which were both 
begun and completed at a definite moment of the past. It 
differs from the past indefinite in that the time of the action, 
as well as the action itself, must make no part of the présent, 
must not be conceived of as merging into it, but the action 
must hâve reached completion at a definite moment of a past 
that has entirely elapsed. That is why the past definite is 
properly used to speak of historical events or facts, while it 
should not ordinarily be used in conversation and familiar 
correspondence, which ordinarily deal with facts or events 
either présent or only recently past. As has been said, the 
past indefinite is the proper one to use in such cases, this latter 
being primarily a conversational tense, while the past definite 
is really a literary tense. Both are frequently accompanied by 
adverbial expressions of time ; but, in the case of the past 
definite, they refer rather to a distant than to a récent past. 

c. Imperfect or Descriptive Tense. 

The underlying idea of the imperfect is the exact opposite 
of that of the past definite. It describes not only actions, but 
scenery, backgrounds, conditions, situations, mental and physi- 
cal habits, traits of character, émotions, feelings, etc. Thèse 
may hâve been begun in a historical as well as a récent past, but 
they must not be conceived of as having reached completion 
in the past. On the contrary, the chief idea of the imperfect 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 6l 

is one of either progression, development, or permanence, con- 
tinuity for the time being in the past. The reason of the great 
difficulty in understanding the distinction between the use of 
the past definite and imperfect is the fact that, in English, no 
past tense exactly corresponds to either of them. The learner 
is confronted with new shades of expression of the past, and 
thèse shades are too varied and too délicate to be compressed 
within the limits of a gênerai rule. It takes close observation 
in reading and constant application of a few principal rules 
to assimilate the foreign idea. This is possible, as there are 
équivalents in English for sorae of the uses of the imperfect. 
The English progressive form renders perfectly the idea of pro- 
gressive action, condition, or even of certain mental processes, 
expressed by the French imperfect. Ex. : we were walking 
= nous marchions ; she was reclining = elle était couchée ; 
I was fkznh'ng = ]e pensais; they were fancying=ih s'imagi- 
naient, etc. For the expression of feelings, émotions, for the 
description of mental traits, permanent conditions in the past, 
etc., the progressive form is no longer adéquate, and we go 
back in English to the use of the simple past tense. For the 
expression of habits, customs, the forms 'used to,' 'would,' 
render the idea of the imperfect. Ex. : elle se levait de très 
bonne heure = she used to rise very early; elle venait s'asseoir 
auprès de moi = she would corne and sit down beside me. But 
thèse équivalents can but faintly represent the characteristics 
of this tense which, with the past definite, contributes in a 
great measure to give the French language its clearness and 
précision. 

Note. — As rules on the use of thèse very important tenses are of gên- 
erai application, it has not been considérée! necessary to supply spécial 
exercises on thèse subjects, the student having ample opportunity to put 
them to practical test in ail exercises, and especially in the translation of 
connected English prose. 



02 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

20. CONDITION AL CONSTRUCTIONS. 

A condition may be expressed : — 

i. by the présent and future tenses. Ex.: si vous êtes attentif, 
vous comprendrez = if you are attentive, you will under- 
stand. The action is still to take place, therefore entirely 
problematical. 

2. by the imperfect and conditional présent. Ex. : si vous 

étiez attentif, vous comprendriez = if you were attentive, 
you would understand. The conditional hère refers to a 
présent action and represents it negatively : it is probable 
that you are not attentive. 

3. by the pluperfect indicative and conditional past. Ex. : si 

vous aviez été attentif, vous auriez compris = if you had 
been attentive, you ivould hâve understood. The action 
hère referred to is past and therefore no longer proble- 
matical : it is certain that you hâve not been attentive. 

The following re marks should be carefully noted : — 

1. Generally speaking, the French conditional corresponds to 

the English. But it must be observed that the French 
mood is always one of real condition. Therefore, it can- 
not be made to translate ail the meanings of such con- 
ditional and potential forms as should, could, might. 
(See chapter on Modal Verbs.) In such sentences as, 
you should tell Mm what you said, the verb ' should tell ' 
is not properly translated by the conditional of dire, but 
must be rendered by the conditional of devoir which 
means ought. 

2. In conditional sentences, ' si,' meaning if, must ne ver be 

followed by a conditional, but always by the indicative 
présent or imperfect, or their compounds. Ex. : si nous 
venions de plus bonne heure, seriez-vous prêt? = if we 
should coîne earlier, would you be ready ? 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 63 

3. ' Si,' expressing doubt rather than condition, and meaning 

whether, is followed by a future or conditional. Ex. : je 
ne sais si je le verrai = I do not know whether I s hall see 
him ; je ne savais pas si ces livres vous conviendraient = 
I did not know whether thèse books would suit y on. 

4. An emphatic conditional may be expressed by the condi- 

tional in both clauses. In such cases, the dépendent 
clause is introduced by ' quand,' ' quand même,' even if, 
even though, never by 'si.' Ex. : quand même vous me 
haïriez, je ne cesserais de vous aimer = even if y oit should 
hâte me, I should not cease to love you. Sometimes, the 
independent clause is preceded by 'que.' Ex.: il me 
haïrait que je ne cesserais de l'aimer = even though he 
hated me, I should not cease to love him. 

5. To give force or vivacity to expression, the imperfect indic- 

ative is sometimes used instead of the past conditional. 
Ex. : si j'avais dit un mot, il se donnait (se serait donne) 
la mort = if I had said one word, he would hâve killed 
himself ; il tombait (serait tombé), si je ne l'eusse retenu 
= he would hâve fallen if I had not caught him. 

6. In formai or élégant language, the pluperfect subjunctive is 

frequently found in one or even both verbs of the con- 
ditional sentence. Ex. : si j'eusse (avais) été méchant 
comme tant d'autres, je serais heureux comme eux = if 
I had been wicked like so many others, I should hâve been 
fortunate like them ; il est vrai, s'il m'eût (avait) cru, 
qu'il n'eût (aurait) point fait de vers = it is true that, 
if he had taken my advice, he would not hâve written 
verses. 

7. The conditional mood is frequently found in certain sen- 

tences where the condition is understood ; as, for instance, 
in expressing a désire : je voudrais apprendre l'italien = 
I should like to study Italian ; sometimes also in exclama- 
tions, to express surprise : comment, vous feriez une 



04 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

chose pareille ! = is it possible that you would do such a 
thing! or, to replace the somewhat harsh imperative by 
a more polite form of expression : auriez-vous l'obligeance 
de remettre cette lettre à monsieur votre père? = would 
you hâve the kindness to hand this letter to your father ? 

Exercise 36. 

i. If we lived 1 on 2 hope, we should run the 3 risk of dying 
of hunger. 2. If the occasion présents itself, you will not 
neglect 4 it. 3. If you 5 sow the wind, you will reap the whirl- 
wind. 4. If Rome had not been 6 corrupted, the Barbarians 
would not hâve conquered her. 5. If any one 7 accused your 
absent 8 friend, you would défend him. 6. I should be very 
ungrateful if I ever 8 forgot your kindness. 9 7. If you employ 
my cousin, you may 10 repent it. 8. I should hâve gone to 
Rome with you, if you had been willing 11 to take me. 9. If 
we were more temperate, we should live longer. 10. If the 
lamb should stray 1 from the shepherd, he would become the 
prey of the famished 8 wolf. n. If you do not start now, you 
will miss the train. 12. If no one had the superfluous, 12 every 
one would hâve the necessities of life. 13 13. Flatterers would 
corrupt the best disposition. 14 14. If we always 8 listened to 
the voice of our conscience, we should never 8 know 15 remorse. 

15. If the heat 16 continues, the harvest will not be good. 17 

16. If the earth were 1 harder, the ploughman could not culti- 
vate it„ 17, If we ask 18 her to corne, will she corne? 18. If 
the sun were 1 suddenly 8 annihilated, everything that is on the 
earth would soon 8 perish. 19. You would be very proud if 
you should reach 1 that fine position. 20. If I see my son once 
more, I shall die content. 21. If you confessed 19 your faults, 
they would be forgiven 20 you. 22. Without a 3 guide, you 
would certainly hâve lost yourself in thèse mountains. 23. The 
woman said to the serpent, " If we eat of the fruit of this tree, 
we shall die." 24. If one 7 abuses them, the best things finish 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 65 

by becoming insipid. 25. If you were older, you would under- 
stand better the importance of work. 26. The man who should 
feign one thing and 21 do another would be considered per- 
fidious and wicked. 27. If men employed their time better, 8 
they would not complain of its brevity. 28. If you should 
pick 1 your pears before they are perfectly ripe, 22 you would 
préserve them longer. 29. We do not know whether 23 my 
mother will go to Europe next 8 year. 30. He has invited me, 
but I do not know if 23 I shall accept his invitation. 31. We 
thought 24 that you would never 8 corne. 32. I admire him 
now, but I do not know whether I shall continue to admire 
him when I shall know him better. 

1 see remark (2). 2 de. 3 omit this word. 4 laisser échapper. 5 use 
second'person singular. 6 pluperfect. 'Von. 8 place after word 
modified. 9 vos bontés. 10 future of pouvoir bien. n pluperfect of 
bien vouloir. 12 use masculine singular of the adjective. 13 ' necessities 
of life ' = le nécessaire. 14 naturel, m. 15 connaître. 16 plural. 17 abon- 
dante. 18 prier (de). 10 convenir de. 20 put in the active voice. 
21 insert en. 22 avant leur complète maturité. 23 see remark (3). 24 im- 
perfect. 

21. THE SUBJUNCTIVE: PRINCIPAL CASES OF ITS USE. 

The indicative mood présents a fact or an idea as real, actual, 
évident, or probable ; the subjunctive présents an idea, not as 
real or évident of itself, but as subordinate to, or depending 
upon another idea expressed in the independent clause. It 
should be remembered that the use of the subjunctive never 
dépends upon a word, but always upon some idea of doubt, 
uncertainty ', possibility in the mind of the speaker with regard 
to the action in question. If this idea changes to one of 
certainty, reality, probability, the subjunctive is replaced by 
the indicative ; this liability to change in the governing idea 
accounts for the numerous exceptions given in grammars under 
most cases of the use of the subjunctive. Thèse cases are not 



66 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

treated hère. Whenever they occur, the reason will lie in the 
change from doubt to certainty expressed by the verb of the 
independent clause. 

Case I. 

The Subjunctive depending upon Verbs and Conjunctions. 

i. The subjunctive is used after ail verbs and expressions of 
the will, and after everything relating to the idea of will ; as, 
désire, intention, permission, entreaty, command or order (dire, 
écrire, prétendre, entendre que), consent, prohibition, require- 
ment, etc. 

2. After ail verbs and expressions of the feelings; as, joy, 
regret, shame, surprise, merit, approval, dissatisfaction, fear, 
appréhension, anger, delight, préférence, etc. 

3. a. After ail conjunctions which express condition ; as, à 
condition que, supposé que, au cas que, à moins que, pour peu 
que, si peu que, si tant est que, soit que . . . soit que. 

b. After conjunctions which express fear or appréhension ; 
as, de peur que, de crainte que, etc. 

c. After conjunctions expressing purpose of the will; as, 
afin que, pour que, de façon que, de sorte que, etc. 

d. After conjunctions or other words which dénote conces- 
sion ; as, quoique, quoi que, bien que, encoî'e que, malgré que, 
quel que, quelque, si . . . que, tout . . . que, qui que, etc. 

e. x\fter conjunctions of time, when referring to actions still 
in the future and therefore uncertain ; as, avant que, jusqu'à 
ce que, en attendant que ; also, after que, used in the sensé of 
à moins que, avant que, sans que, de peur que, de crainte que. 

4. After verbs and conjunctions which express an idea of 
doubt, négation ; as, douter, nier, disconvenir, contester, etc., 
and non pas que, non que, ce rf est pas que, sans que, bien loin 
que, jamais que, etc. 

Note. — See rule for the Séquence ofthe Tenses of the Subjunctive with 
those of the Indicative, page 78. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 6/ 

Exercise 37. 

i. Your friend wants l you to go 2 and see him. 2. I am 
delighted 3 that you hâve enjoyed 4 yourself. 3. I prefer that 
Mary should finish 5 her work before going out with you. 
4. My sister asks that you answer her letter as soon as pos- 
sible. 6 5. Allow me to tell you the truth. 7 6. The merchant 
insists 8 that this bill shall be settled immediately. 7. You 
deserve to be punished. 9 8. God required 10 that Abraham 
should sacrifice n his son Isaac ; but he did not allow 1() this 
sacrifice to be performed. 12 9. I wish you to talk 2 less and 
do 13 more. 10. My mother has forbidden me to corne 2 and 
see you. 11. I will prevent 14 his plan from succeeding. 15 
12. If you receive 16 thèse people in your house, I fear 14 you 
will regret 17 it. 13. I intend 18 that you shall obey my orders. 
14. Tell Mary to wait 19 for me at my aunt's. 15. Do you 
want me to describe 2 to you the house that I live in? 16. I 
wish 20 that you may hâve a pleasant 21 journey. 17. I wish 22 
that he would talk 11 a long time. 18. We are very happy that 
you should hâve succeeded. 4 19. Caligula used to wish 20 that 
the Roman people had n only one 23 head. 20. Your friend is 
delighted 24 that you should not hâve forgotten 4 him. 21. I 
am glad that I am made to 25 study. 22. I am sorry 26 that you 
did not wait 4 two minutes. 23. I am surprised that he should 
hâve said 4 that. 24. I am afraid 14 this child is not truthful. 27 
25. I am sorry 28 that you should waste so much time in doing 
nothing. 29 26. We were afraid 30 that you would corne 11 too 
late. 27. Your grandmother complains that you write to her 
so rarely. 31 28. The children are afraid 14 that it will rain to- 
morrow. 29. He can go out from time to time, but I don't 
want him to go out 2 every evening. 30. I tremble u lest your 
décision may hâve serious conséquences. 31. Children would 
like to hâve éducation corne 32 to them without trouble. 
32. I am ashamed that my brother should hâve behaved 4 so 
badly toward you. ^^. Wait until 83 he has answered 4 your 



68 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

letter. 34. Our cousins want us to take 2 a walk with them. 
35. Socrates used to ask the gods that his little house might be 
filled with true friends. 

1 désirer. 2 see remark (3) under the verb Vouloir in chapter on 
Modal Verbs. 3 charmé. 4 past subjunctive. 5 présent subjunctive. 
6 le plus tôt possible ; place immediately after the verb. 7 construe : 'allow 
that I tell {près, sue/.) you the truth.' 8 exiger. 9 construe : ' that one 
punish {près, subj.) you.' 10 past definite. n imperfect subjunctive. 
12 que ce sacrifice s" 1 exécutât. 13 agir davantage. u the négative adverb 
ne is used expletively after empêcher and éviter before a personal verb- 
form {always a subjunctive) ; and also after ail verbs or expressions of 
fear or appréhension {craindre, trembler, appréhender, avoir peur, de peur, 
de crainte, etc.), when thèse are used amrmatively, or interrogatively with- 
out implied négation.* 15 construe : ' that his plan succeed.' 16 accueillir. 
17 construe : ' that you of it will hâve some regret.' 18 prétendre. 19 ' that 
she wait ' {près. subj.). 20 souhaiter. 21 faire un bon. 22 aimerais. 
23 ne . . . qu'une seule. 24 se réjouir. 25 qu'on me ... 25 désolé. 
27 ' not truthful ' = menteur. 28 regretter. 29 à ne rien faire. 30 im- 
perfect of craindre .; see note 14. 31 donniez si rarement de vos nou- 
velles. 32 construe : ' would like that instruction should corne ' {imper f. 
subj.) ... 33 que. 

Subjunctive after Conjunctions and Verbs of Négation. 

Exercise 38. 

1. Although Europe is smaller than America, it is much 
more thickly 1 populated. 2. I cannot forgive you before you 
hâve made 2 to me the confession of your faults. 3. My sister 
will join you next 3 week in case you are still in London. 
4. Corne after us to-morrow evening unless 4 it rains. 5. Yes, 
I will punish you until I hâve cured 5 you of your laziness. 
6. Although it is fertile, your field needs cultivation. 7. What- 
ever 6 you may do, I shall always 3 be your friend. 8. Mortals, 
whatever 7 they may be, are equal before the law. 9. God has 

* The Minister's decree makes the use of the expletive ne no longer 
pbligatory in either of thèse cases. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 69 

made man compassionate, in order that he may be helpful. 
10. I do not deny 8 that he is very éloquent. 11. Speak 
louder, so that everybody can hear you. 12. Before I go 
out, I want to give you a little money. 13. Do you doubt 8 
that 9 long-continued prosperity begets négligence and pride? 
14. However rare 10 real love 11 may be, it is less so than real 12 
friendship. 15. Read over your lesson so that you may know 
it better. 16. Behave in such a way 13 that everybody will 
speak well 14 of you. 17. It cannot be denied 15 that the ele- 
phant's trunk has several advantages over the human 16 hand. 
18. I will stay hère until he cornes back. 19. I hâve given 
you a good éducation so that you may be happy. 20. I doubt 
if 17 they are convinced. 2 1 . Whatever 7 the merit n of a man 
may be, he cannot escape envy. 22. It seems to me absurd 
to deny 8 that there is a ruling 1 intelligence in the world. 
23. Let us go home before it gets dark. 18 24. The moon is 
the smallest of the planets, although it 19 appears the largest. 20 

25. Don't talk so loud for fear that 21 somebody will hear you. 

26. Arrange it so that 22 I can see her. 27. You will hâve this 
house provided you pay the worth of it. 28. She will remain 
faithful to me until I can marry her. 29. Far from being 2 
lazy, this boy is working well. 30. Suppose he consents to 
your proposition, what advantage will you get 23 from it? 31. I 
do not doubt 8 that your persévérance will overcome 24 ail obsta- 
cles. 32. Do not start without hearing 2 from me. ^^. I hâve 
promised to explain his reasons to you, not that * I believe one 
word of what he says. 

1 omit this word. 2 présent subjunctive. 3 place after word modified. 
4 ne is used expletively after à moins que (unless), or que used for à moins 
que* 5 past subjunctive. G use pronoun form. " use adjective form. 
8 words or expressions of ' doubt ' or ' déniai,' if used negatively (or inter- 
rogatively with implied nega/i on), requiie ne before the following or dé- 
pendent verb; * observe that they do not require ne if used affirmatively 

* The récent decree allows the omission of ne in this case. 



yO EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

(or interrogatively with implied affirmation}. 9 insert une; i long- 
continued ' = longue. 10 insert que. n reverse positions of subject and 
predicate. 12 véritable. 13 de telle sorte que. 14 dire du bien ; see 
a of rule for séquence of tenses, page 78. 15 on ne peut disconvenir ; 
see note 8. 16 ' the hand of man.' 17 que. 18 faire nuit. 19 insert 
'to us.' 20 grosse. 21 see note 14 under Exercise 37. ^faites en sorte 



Case IL 
The Subjunctive depending upon Imper sonal Constructions. 

1. Impersonal verbs or constructions which express reality, 
certainty, or probability govern the indicative. Ex. : il est 
certain, évident, positif, hors de doute que ; il est clair, établi, 
prouvé, remarquable, incontestable que ; il est probable, vrai- 
semblable, naturel que ; il s'ensuit que, il résulte que, il arrive 
que, etc. 

When thèse are used negatively or interrogatively, they no 
longer express certainty, and consequently govern the subjunc- 
tive. 

2. Impersonal verbs or constructions which express possi- 
bility, necessity, appréciation, négation, restriction, or any other 
similar idea, govern the subjunctive. Examples : — 

Possibility (or with an élément of négation) : il est possible, 
il se peitt que, il est impossible, il est douteux, ?'are, difficile 
que, il est faux, il est singulier que, etc. 

Necessity : il faut, il est nécessaire, il est urgent, il est indispen- 
sable que, il importe, etc. 

Appréciation or sentiment : il est bon, il est mauvais, il est juste 
que, il est heureux, malheureux, préférable que, il convient, 
il vaut mieux que, il est triste, il est étonnant que, il est 
inutile que, etc. 

Also the following, which are équivalent to impersonal con- 
structions : c'est assez que, c'est beaucoup qtie, c'est peu 
que, c'est dommage (a pity) que, etc. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. Jl 

Note. — II semble and il paraît que, expressing possibility only, gov- 
ern the subjunctive, but when preceded by a personal pronoun object, as il 
mè semble, il me paraît, they express a thought, and govern the indicative. 

Exercise 39. 

i. It 1 is probable that my cousin is at home, but it is not 
probable that he will hâve 2 time to see you. 2. It often 3 
happens that one is deceived. 3. We must 4 hâve finished 5 
this vvork this evening. 4. It is évident that your father is 
very proud of you. 5. It is beyond doubt that this man is 
guilty. 6. It is incontestable that you are a genius of the 
first order. 6 7. It is singular that he should start 2 after ail 
that he has said. 8. It is rare that an upright 3 heart is not 
a noble 7 heart. 9. You must 4 not forget that men do not 
love to admire you. 10. It seems to me that you are enjoy- 
ing yourself hère. 11. The resuit is 8 that my brother has lost 
his position. 12. It is a pity that the weather is not fine. 
13. It is shameful that you should not know 2 how 9 to read at 
your âge. 14. It is possible that you are gentle and kind, but 
you hâve never loved. 15. My name is little known, but it is 
enough for me that my friends do not forget it. 16. It is 
strange that you do not recognize him. 1 7. It is just that you 
should be 2 repaid ail the money that you hâve spent for me. 
18. It would be ridiculous that you should prétend 10 to 9 know 
everything. 11 19. It is right 12 that children should amuse 2 
themselves after work. 20. It is time that the light should 
reach the lowest 13 ranks of society. 21. Does it not often 3 
happen that we 14 smile upon flattery while 15 despising it? 
22. It is not true 16 that there are 2 savages who hâve 2 no idea 17 
of Divinity. 23. It seems that nature has given us pride to 
spare us the sorrovv of knowing 18 our imperfections. 24. I 
must 4 know what to expect. 19 25. It is rare that a mother 
does not delude herself about her children. 26. Thèse men 
cannot prove their innocence, but does it follow s that they are 



J2 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

guilty? 27. It is important that you should send me as soon 
as possible the papers that I hâve asked you for. 9 28. It may 
be that I am richer than- IJ you think. 29. Is it possible that 
he dénies a thing so évident? 30. It is wise 21 that you should 
accept 2 his invitation. 31. It is proper that you should make 
your excuses to him. 32. It is shameful that men 22 should 
hâve 2 so many diseases, for good morals produce health. 
33. It is seldom that one does not acquire prudence with 
âge. 23 34. It is not enough 24 that you should write him. 
35. You had 2 " 3 a pretty watch ; it is too bad that you hâve 
lost it. 36. It is better that you should throw up the game. 26 
37. You must 4 not be afraid of offending me. 

1 review rules for ce or il before être, page 25. 2 présent subjunctive. 
3 place after the word modified. 4 il faut qtie ... 5 past subjunctive. 
6 rang, m. 7 élevé ; see note 3. 8 il s'ensuit que. 9 omit this word. 
10 imperfect subjunctive. n must précède savoir. 12 bon. 13 parvenir 
jusqu'aux derniers. }^ on. 15 tout en. 16 it is not true = il est faux. 
17 notion, f. 18 connaître. 19 à quoi m'en tenir. 2j in comparisons of 
inequality, if the verb of the principal clause is in the affirmative, ne is 
placed immediately before the verb of the dépendent clause ; * but this ne 
is not required if the first verb is négative. 21 prudent. 22 c'est une honte 
pour les hoi?imes qu'ils ... 23 les années. 24 il ne suffit pas. 25 imper- 
fect. 25 quitter la partie. 

Case III. 

The Subjunctive in Relative Clauses. 

1. When the dépendent clause is introduced by the relative 
pronouns qui, que, dont, où, the indicative mood is used if the 
verb of the independent clause expresses something that is cer- 
tain, positive, or actual ; the subjunctive is used if the action or 
state expressed by the verb, represents something still uncertain, 
not yet found or discovered, or the existence of which is even 
doubtful. Compare the folio wing sentences : je cherche un lieu 
où je sois tranquille ; j'ai trouvé un lieu où je suis tranquille. 

* In this case also, the récent decree tolérâtes the omission of ne. 






EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 73 

The first sentence states that I ara looking for a place where I 
shall be quiet, but I do not know if I shall find it, if it exists. 
The second states that such a place exists, for I hâve found 
it. Following are similar examples : indiquez-moi une per- 
sonne qui connaisse cette affaire ; indiquez-moi une personne 
qui connaît cette affaire. J'habiterai une maison qui soit au 
bord de l'eau ; j'habiterai une maison qui est au bord de l'eau. 

2. When the relative clause dépends upon an expression of 
restriction, négation, or an interrogation équivalent to a néga- 
tion, the verb of the relative clause is put in the subjunctive. 
Examples : — 

Restriction = il y a peu d'hommes qui sachent sacrifier leurs 

intérêts. 
Négation = il n'y a plus personne qui sache l'histoire. 
Interrogation équivalent to négation = y a-t-il un homme qui 

puisse dire qu'il est toujours heureux? 

3. The verb of the relative clause is also put in the subjunc- 
tive when that clause dépends upon an adjective in the super- 
lative degree, or upon such expressions as, le seul, Punique, le 
premier, le dernier. Ex. : Le fils de Napoléon III est le plus 
joli enfant que j'aie jamais vu ; vous êtes la première personne 
qui m'ait parlé de cette affaire. Such absolute, gênerai, or 
emphatic statements may not be strictly true. Their excessive 
affirmation is counterbalanced by the use of the subjunctive, in 
which there is alvvays an élément of négation. 

Exercise 40. 

1. Show me a road that leads to her village. 2. I am look- 
ing for a house that will suit T my wife. 3. Choose a place 
where you will be comfortable. 2 4. I want a horse that I can 
drive myself. 5. There was need of ;! a man who knew 4 the 
spirit of the nation. 6. There is no one who has not some 
motive for sorrow. 5 7. It is only* 5 genius that can 7 reach the 



74 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

sublime. 8. If I lived in the country, I should want an apart- 
ment from which 8 I could 9 take in 15 a vast horizon. 9. Show 
me the palace that belongs to the King 11 of Italy. 10. Do not 
marry a man who is much older than you. 11. The move- 
ments of the stars are the most regular that we know. 4 
12. Innocent 12 pleasures are the only ones 7 that are not 13 fol- 
lowed by 14 some bitterness. 13. There is no one in ]5 the 
world who has as much need of help as I hâve. 16 14. There 
are few kings who know how 7 to govern. 15. I hâve need of 
a society that I can love. 16. The least that you can do is 17 
to 14 orîer an indemnity for the damage that you hâve caused. 
1 7. Sincerity is the most important quality that one should 18 
look for in a story. 18. Nothing proves that this man is 
guilty. 19. Always 12 use a language that is simple and clear. 

20. There are few people who are satisfied with their lot. 

21. Education 19 is the only blessing that fortune cannot 13 take 
from us. 20 22. There is not a 14 poet who has not 13 drawn ail 
his philosophy from the ancients. 23. Reason is the most 
precious 12 gift that God has made to man. 24. Formerly, the 
Venetiàns were the only ones 7 who manufactured 9 and sold 9 
mirrors. 25. The most beautiful things that an author can 
put in his books, are the sentiments that come to him from 
his you th. 26. Is there a man who can satisfy everybody? 
27. There is no 21 man that fortune does not 13 come to visit 
once in his life. 28. Do not say anything that can depress 
those who are listening to you. 29. The temple of Solomon 
was 22 the first that men consecrated 23 to the true 24 God. 

30. I would like to live in a country whose climate was * mild. 

31. There is no 21 disguise that can long hide love where it 
exists, 22 nor feign it where it does 22 not. 32. That is 25 the best 
wine that I ever drank. 23 33. Sainte-Beuve is assuredly one of 
the most agreeable talkers that I hâve heard. 34. She is the 
last woman that I should want 9 to hâve for a 7 friend. 35. Man 
is a strange animal ; I am not the first one 7 who has said so. 2G 



EXERCISES IX GRAMMAR AXD SVXTAX. 75 

36. I am the onlv friend that lias remained faithful to you. 

37. Rossini was one of the wittiest 12 men that I hâve ever : 
seen. 38. There is not a single people of antiquity that did 
not make human sacrifices. 27 

1 présent subjunctive. - à votre aise. 3 il fallait. 4 connaître; 
what tense? 5 tV affliction. 6 il n'y a que. ' omit this word. s a" où. 
9 imperfect subjunctive. 10 embrasser. n no capital. M place after 
word modified. 13 use ne but not pas. u de. 15 à. 16 must be pre- 
ceded by en. 1T c'est. 1S devoir. 19 instruction, f. -° nous ravir. 
21 ne . . . point. — est. 23 past subjunctive. ' 2i véritable; see note 12. 
25 voilà bien. -> /'. 2 " turn; 'that did not sacrifice (past subj.) some 
victims human.' 

Case IV. 
The Subjunctive in Négative or Interrogative Sentences. 

1. Verbs of thought or of expression like croire, penser, 
espérer, compter, savoir, connaître, dire, s'imaginer, supposer, 
déclarer, assurer, affirmer, soutenir, etc., and also impersonal 
constructions like il est vrai, il est clair, il est certain govern 
the indicative when used affirmatively. 

They also govern the indicative when used negatively, if 
there is no uncertainty in the mind of the person speaking 
concerning the reality or actuality of the action or fact in 
question. If there is such doubt, the subjunctive should be 
used. Notice the great différence in meaning in the fol- 
lowing sentences : mon ami ne sait pas que son père est 
malade (= lus fa the r is ill ; I know it, lut lie docs not) ; 
mon ami ne sait pas que son père soit malade (= my 
friend docs not know whether or not his father is ill, and 
neither do I) . 

2. When croire, penser, savoir, etc., are used interrogatively, 
the idea of doubt or certainty in the mind of the speaker is 
again clearly indicated by the use of the subjunctive or indica- 
tive in the second verb. Ex. : savez-vous que cet enfant fait 



?6 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

des progrès? (= this child is improving; do y ou know it?) ; 
savez-vous que cet enfant fasse des progrès ? ( = / do not know 
if this child is improving; could y ou tell me if he is ?). 

Exercise 41. 

i. You believe that this man is your friend, but I do not 
believe that he is. 1 2. He has gone to 2 South America, but 
I do not think that he will make a 3 fortune there. 3. Is it 
true that your friend has written a beautiful novel? 4. This 
child does not always 4 tell the truth, but is it certain that he 
is deceiving you in this? 5. Mary déclares that our uncle is 
rich, but I do not think he is. 1 6. You imagine that I ara 
happy; no one else 3 hère thinks that I am. 1 7. I do not 
even 4 hope that you will consent 5 to my proposition. 8. My 
mother expects 6 that we shall wait for her a little while, but 
she does not expect that we shall wait 5 two hours. 9. Do 
not believe that happiness dépends upon riches. 10. What 
makes you think that we had a good time ? 7 11. Your teacher 
says that you are often absent ; 8 is it true that you are ? 9 
12. Do you think that it is necessary 10 to believe ail that the 
masses 11 say? 13. I do not believe that you are wrong, but 
I cannot 12 affirm that you are right. 14. I hâve never noticed 
that youwere 13 sad. 15. I do not imagine that you are a 
bad woman. 16. Do you know that your mother has arrived? 
17. Do not believe that you inspire 14 me with 3 the least 
envy. 18. Is it true that I hâve only twenty-three -years 
to live? 19. I do not think that I can go to see you to- 
morrow. 20. We did not know 15 that it would be neces- 
sary 30 to take that journey. 21. Do you believe that the soûl 
is immortal? 22. Don't you know that two and two make 
four? 23. I do not insist that the 16 man is my friend. 
24. I do not believe that God is cruel. 25. I shall never 4 
believe that you hâve forgotten me. 26. "You are ignorant 
fellows ! " 1; cried the Greek ; " do you not know that Chaos 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. J*J 

is the 3 father of ail?" 27. I do not expect 6 that the war 
will be 5 long. 28. My cousin does not yet 4 know that her 
mother is dead. 

1 must be preceded by le (so). 2 partir pour. 3 omit this word. 
4 place after the word modified. 5 présent subjunctive. 6 compter. 
7 past subjunctive of s'amuser. 8 ' are absent ' = s'absenter. 9 turn : ' that 
you absent y ourself thus.' ^falloir. n la foule ; place after the predi- 
cate, which must be in the singular. 12 use ne but not pas. 13 imperfect 
subjunctive. 14 faire. 15 indicative imperfect. 16 cet. 17 des ignorants. 

22. MINOR CASES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

a. When the dépendent clause beginning with que, précèdes 
the independent clause, the verb is always put in the subjunc- 
tive. Ex. : que vous soyez condamné ou non, l'opinion public 
sera contre vous. 

b. In such sentences as : ' Puissiez-vous réussir ! ' ' Qu'il 
vienne ! ' ' Que la victoire vous soit favorable ! ' ' Vive le roi ! ' 
etc., the subjunctive verb dépends upon a verb of désire or 
wish understood, thus : 'je souhaite (désire) que vous puissiez 
réussir,' etc. 

c. Savoir is the only verb of the language which can be used 
independently in the subjunctive, and then only in the first 
person singular, negatively. Ex. : je ne sache pas qu'il soit 
mon ami. This implies stronger négation than 'je ne sais pas 
qu'il soit mon ami.' 

Que je sache, from the Latin ' quod seiam,' is used for je 
ne pense pas que je (le) sache. Ex. : est-ce que Marie est 
sortie? Non pas que je sache. 

d. The subjunctive is also found in the cry of sentinels : 
'Qui vive?' This is not properly a subjunctive, but is prob- 
ably borrowed from the Italian ' Chi vive ? ' 

e. The conjunction si governs the indicative, but in dépend- 
ent clauses, that conjunction is replaced by que ; in such cases, 
the subjunctive and not the indicative must be used. Ex. : 



yS EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

s'il fait beau et que nous ayons le temps, nous sortirons, instead 
of s'il fait beau et si nous avons le temps. 

Exercise 42. 

i . Whether it rains 1 or not, 2 I will expect you to-morrow. 
2. Whether he cornes 1 to-morrow or next week, it makes no 
différence to me. 3 3. May 4 you be as happy as you deserve 
to be ! 5 4. May we always 6 be friends ! 5. If he wants to 
see me in private, let him corne 4 early to-morrow morning. 
6. May 4 peace be with you ! May God protect you ! 7. God 
grant 7 that my presentiment may not be fulfilled ! 8 8. God be 
praised for 9 the good news 10 that you bring me. 9. No one 
has corne yet 11 that I know of. 12 10. Let 4 hatred and resent- 
ment die promptly in your heart ! 11. May God reward 
you for 9 your generosity ! 12. I do not know 12 that there 
are men wholly bad or wholly good. 13. Long live the 
Republic ! God bless the Queen ! 14. God préserve us 
from another 13 war ! 15. Perish 4 the traitor who has caused 14 
our defeat ! 16. Let him do what he likes! 15 17. If he 
wants me to believe him, let him tell the truth. 18. I do not 
know 12 anything 16 more beautiful. 

1 see a under Minor Cases of the Subjunctive. 2 faire beau. 3 cela 
m'est égal. 4 see b. 5 must be preceded by le (so) . 6 place after 
word modified. 7 présent subjunctive of vouloir. 8 se réaliser. 9 de. 
10 singular. n place between auxiliary and participle. 12 see c. 13 d'une 
nouvelle. 14 est cause de. 15 future of plaire, preceded by lui. 16 in- 
sert de. 

23. SEQUENCE OF TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE WITH 
THOSE OF THE INDICATIVE. 

a. When the verb of the independent clause is a présent, 
future, or imperative, the verb of the dépendent clause is put in 
the présent subjunctive when one is speaking of a présent or 
future action, and in the past subjunctive to speak of a past 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 79 

action. Ex. : je ne crois pas qu'il ait tort = I do not believe 
that he is wrong; je ne crois pas qu'il ait eu tort — I do not 
believe that he was wrong. 

b. When the verb of the independent clause is in one of the 
tenses of the past or in the conditional, the verb of the dépend- 
ent clause is put in the imperfect subjunctive to speak of a 
présent or future action,* and in the pluperfect subjunctive, to 
speak of a past action. Ex. : je craignais que vous ne partissiez 
trop tard (aujourd'hui, ou de7?iain) =1 was a/raid that y ou 
might start too late ; je craignais que vous ne fussiez parti trop 
tard {hier, la semaine dernière) = I was a/raid that you had 
started too late. 

24. PRINCIPAL CASES OF THE AGREEMENT OF THE PAST 
PARTICIPLE. 

Case I. The Past Participle used without the Auxiliary. 

Case II. The Past Participle used with Etre. 

Case III. The Past Participle used with Avoir. 

Case IV. The Past Participle of Reflexive Verbs. 

Rule for Case I. 
The past participle used without the auxiliary agrées, like 
the adjective, in gender and number with the noun or pronoun 
to which it relates. Ex. : un fils aimé ; une fille aimée = a 
loved son ; a loved daughter. 

Rule for Case II. 

The past participle is found with être in two cases : — 

a. In the compound tenses of passive verbs: être aimé; 
être puni = to be loved ; to be punished. 

* The ministerial decree allows the use of the présent, instead of the 
imperfect subjunctive, when the verb of the independent clause is in 
the conditional. 



80 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

b. In the compound tenses of certain neuter verbs of motion, 
like aller, venir, entrer, etc. 

In both of thèse cases, the past participle agrées with the sub- 
ject of the verb. 

Rule for Case III. 

The past participle used with avoir, agrées in gender and 
number with the direct object if that object précèdes the verb.* 
It does not agrée 

a. If the object is indirect. 

b. If it follows the verb. 

c. The past participles of ail neuter verbs conjugated with 
avoir will always be invariable, since thèse verbs can take no 
object. 

Rule for Case IV. 

When found in the compound tenses of reflexive verbs, the 
auxiliary être has the meaning of avoir ; thus,/<? me suis consolé 
stands for j'ai consolé moi. Therefore, the participles of thèse 
verbs corne under the third case,, that is to say, they agrée in 
gender and number with the direct object if it précèdes the 
verb.* They do not agrée 

a. If there is no direct object. 

b. If the direct object follows the verb. 

Ex. : ma sœur et ma cousine se sont écrit {ont écrit à elles) . 
The verb has no direct object ; hence, no agreement. Ma 
sœur et ma cousine se sont écrit des lettres. The object 
follows the verb ; hence, no agreement. Voici les lettres 
que ma sœur et ma cousine se sont écrites. Que stands for 
lettres, direct object preceding the verb; hence, agreement. 

* The récent decree stating that the past participle of verbs conjugated 
with avoir, and the past participle of reflexive verbs may hereafter remain 
invariable in ail cases where it is at présent customary to make them 
agrée, has since been nullified by the French Academy. 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 8l 

Note. — Minor and exceptional cases of the agreement of the past 
participle abound in advanced grammars, to which the pupil is referred 
for further study of this difficult subject. The rules given above will be 
found sufficient to meet the needs of elementary composition. 

Exercise 43. 

CASES I. AND II. OF THE PARTICIPLE. 

i. A lie covered by another lie, 1 is a stain replaced by a 
hole. 2. One never 2 regrets the hours 3 devoted to study. 
3. An obstacle 4 surmounted, increases pleasure. 4. A hundred 
years passed in idleness are not worth one hour well employed. 
5. Thèse fruits turned 5 red when they began 6 to ripen. 6. Ail 
sins entered 6 the world through 7 intempérance. 7. Nature 
présents to us successively skies 8 strewn with stars, and skies 8 
covered with clouds, prairies dotted with flowers, forests 
stripped by 9 frosts, and fields golden with 7 the harvests. 
8. Repelled by fortune, inen throw themselves back upon 
hope. 9. Few persons are endowed with a pure 2 and délicate 2 
taste. 10. Animais and plants were 10 adored 11 in Egypt. 

11. A beautiful thought well expressed, pleases in 12 ail âges. 13 

12. My sister has corne to spend the winter in Italy. 13. The 
earth is fertilized by the sun. 14. Eloquence was 14 born before 
the rules of rhetoric. 15. Voltaire and Rousseau died 6 the 
same year. 16. Cherries were M brought from Asia to Rome 
by Lucullus. 17. Good news are always well received. 16 
18. Noses were 6 invented before spectacles. 19. Thèse chil- 
dren are spoiled by everybody. 20. Since the invention of 
powder, battles hâve become less bloody. 21. The Scotch are 
attached to their country ; they love their mountains with their 
summits covered with snow. 22. Paper, window-glass, and 
chimneys were unknown to the 17 Romans. 23. Our most 
sumptuous monuments will be effaced by time. 24. The natu- 
ral 2 qualities of the horse are perfected by éducation. 25. Men 
seem born for society. 26. France hasbeen governed by three 



82 EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 

races of kings. 27. This letter will be handed to you by my 
brother-in-law. 28. Virtue excepted, one may sacrifice every- 
thing 18 to friendship. 29. The French language is spoken in 
Europe by ail educated 19 men. 30. Children open their 20 eyes 
as soon as they are born. 31. We shall be judged according to 
our works. 32. The French were 6 sooner civilized than the other 
peoples of Europe. ^^. They are delighted with everything. 

1 insert c\ 2 place after word modified. 3 moment, m. 4 la peine. 
5 past indefinite of devenir. G past indefinite. 7 par. 8 des nuits, f. pi. 
9 insert les. 10 imperfect. n when a participle refers to two or more 
nouns, some of which are masculine and others féminine, it agrées in the 
masculine plural. 12 dans. 13 temps, m. pi. 14 présent. 15 past defi- 
nite. 16 accueillir. 17 turn; 'were {imperfecf) not known of the'; 
see also note 11. 18 must précède its verb. 19 éclairé ; place after the 
noun. 20 les. 

Exercise 44. 

CASES III. AND IV. OF THE PARTICIPLE. 

1. Force has never persuaded any one. 1 2. The roses that 
we picked 2 this morning are already faded. 3. It was 3 not 
chance that created 2 us. 4. Ail nations hâve conceived the idea 
of God. 5. Among 4 the Egyptians, a son was obliged to con- 
tinue in 5 the profession that his father had exercised. 6 6. Many 
who went to sleep 7 rich, hâve awakened poor. 7. Contrary 8 
winds 9 hâve conducted us to 10 your isle. 8. Colbert repaired u 
the evils which a stormy 8 reign had caused. 6 9. Préserve 
preciously the friends that you hâve made. 10. Tell 12 me the 
story that you hâve related to her. n. The judges declared 13 
themselves in 14 his favor. 12. They had imagined 15 that we 
had deceived 7 them. 13. The Greeks made themselves illus- 
trious 16 in the arts. 14. The admiration which certain 17 schol- 
ars hâve professed for the ancients, has often degenerated into 14 
fanaticism. 15. I hâve not received any of the letters that you 
hâve written me. 16. At Rome, the censors corrected 18 the 
abuses which the law had not foreseen. 17. Charlemagne was 3 



EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR AND SYNTAX. 83 

the first of the French kings who founded 19 schools. 18. He 
often 8 visited the schools that he had founded. 19. We hâve 
not written to each other. 20 20. Switzerland is not such as it 
has been described by most travellers. 21 21. It is easy to be 
indulgent toward 22 the ingratitude of men when one has not 
experienced it. 22. This cathedral has made the réputation of 
the architect who built 2 it. 23. Turenne is one of the greatest 
gênerais that France has had. 19 24. The battle of Wagram is 
one of the greatest that Napoléon has fought. 19 25. The 
ancients imagined 15 that the earth was 3 motionless. 26. Hearts 9 
less brave would hâve become discouraged 23 before so many 
obstacles to overcome. 27. The advice 24 that your friend gavé 
you was good ; why did you not follow it? 28. She showed 11 
us the laces and jewels that her old aunt had bequeathed 25 
to her. 29. How many governments hâve succeeded one 
another 26 in France in the course of 27 one century ! 

1 this sentence should contain three négative words. 2 past indefinite. 
3 présent. 4 chez. 5 omit this word. 6 reverse the positions of the 
subject and predicate, thus: ' that had exercised {pluperfecf) his father'; 
this order is frequently found in French relative clauses. 7 pluperfect. 
8 place after the word modified. 9 must be preceded by des. 10 dans. 
11 past definite. 12 raconter. 13 past indefinite of se prononcer. 14 en. 
15 pluperfect of se figurer or s'imaginer ; observe that se is hère an indirect 
object. 16 past indefinite of s'illustrer. 17 quelques. 18 imperfect. 
19 past subjunctive. 20 replace ' each other ' by the reflexive pronoun 
nous which hère has a reciprocal meaning. 21 turn : ' as {que) most 
travellers hâve described it.' 22 pour. 23 se décourager. 2i plural. 
25 pluperfect; for word order, see note 6. 26 se, which hère stands for an 
indirect object. 27 'in the course of = depuis. 



Part II. 

EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 



EASY PROSE COMPOSITION. 



1. THE CHILDHOOD OF DUGUESCLIN. 

Note. — In this, and in following exercises, the student should be re- 
quired to give reasons for the use of the past definite or imperfect tenses. 

Duguesclin, son of a poor 1 Breton 2 lord, was born 3 in 4 
1320, in a castle situated near Dinan. He was 5 a very 
ngly 6 child. He had 7 a pug nose and green eyes; 8 he 
was 7 very short, 1 with 9 broad shoulders and long arms ; but 
he showed 3 early that he would. be very brave. When he 5 
played 7 with the children of his âge, it was always games 
of war that he preferred; 10 and when he was 11 fifteen years 
old, 12 there was 7 not in ail 13 Brittany a knight capable of 
competing 14 with him. 

It was 15 at the âge of fifteen 16 that Duguesclin began 3 to 10 
serve in the armies ; he soon 17 became 3 a good captain. 
He was 7 not only brave, but 12 he was also very clever. 
The dauphin Charles, who was very fond of him, 18 put 3 
him at the head of a little army, and charged 3 him to fight 
Charles the Bad, who possessed 7 several cities and castles 15 
in 4 Normandy, and who was 7 the ally of the English. 



1 petit. 2 use small letter, and place after the noun. 3 past definite. 
4 en. 5 fêlait. G place 'very ugly' after the noun. " imperfect. 8 turn : 
'the nose pug and the eyes green.' 9 insert de. 10 it was . . . preferred; 
c'était toujours à la guerre. n past definite of avoir. ia omit this word. 
13 insert la. 14 de se mesurer. 15 c'est. 10 insert ans. 1T place after the 
word modified. 18 who was . . . him; qui l'aimait beaucoup. 

87 



88 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

A few days after the accession to the throne 1 of Charles, 
Duguesclin beat 2 Charles the Bad at Cocherel, near 3 Éve- 
reux, and thus began the new reign by a brilliant victory. 4 

2. DUGUESCLIN AND THE "FREE 5 COMPANIES." 

In those days, 6 the king of France had 7 soldiers whom he 

5 paid, and who served in 8 companies under the orders of 
captains. Thèse soldiers were, for the most part, Italians, 9 
Swiss, Germans, etc. They made 10 war to earn the pay that 
was given them, 11 but also to enrich themselves by pillage. 12 
They were 13 brigands who robbed and massacred the peas- 

io ants of France, and thèse unfortunates dreaded the soldiers 
of their king as much as those of the king of England. 

As Charles V., at the beginning 14 of his reign, was 15 at 16 
peace with the English, he wished 2 to rid himself of the 
"companies," and he commanded 2 Duguesclin to take them 

15 to 16 Spain. Duguesclin went to 17 their principal chiefs, who 
were 15 at Chalon-sur-Saône. He knew 15 them ail, for he 
had already fought against them or with them. He was 2 , 
received very joyously, and drank 2 with them the best wines 
of Burgundy. He promised 2 them large 18 sums of money, if 

20 they would 19 follow him in the country where he wished 19 to 
lead them, and they followed 2 him to 16 Spain. 

1 accession . . . throne; V avènement. 2 past definite. 3 auprès de. 

4 and thus . . . victory; et étrenna par cette victoire le nouveau règne. 

5 Grandes. 6 dans ce temps-là. 7 ail verbs in this paragraph, excepting 
the infinitives, must be in the imperfect, because they dénote habit or 
custom in the past. 8 par. 9 put des before each one of thèse proper 
nouns. 10 insert definite article. n put in the active voice, thus : ' that 
one gave {imperfect} them.' 12 en pillant. 13 c'étaient des. 14 au début. 
15 imperfect. 16 en. 
fect of vouloir. 



EASY PROSE COMPOSITION. 89 

3. DUGUESCLIN A 1 PRISONER IN SPAIN. 

Spain was 2 then divided into 3 several kingdoms, among 
which was 2 that of Castile. Peter the Cruel, friend of the 
English, was reigning in 3 Castile at this time. 4 His brother 
Henry, the 1 friend of 5 France, had rebelled 6 against him. 
Duguesclin, with the companies, drove 7 Peter away from 5 5 
Castile, and Henry became king in 8 his place. 

But the Prince 9 of Wales arrived 7 with an army to drive 
away Henry. He was 7 victorious, and Duguesclin was 7 made 
prisoner. The Prince of Wales, happy to hâve 10 in 3 his 
power the best gênerai of the king of France, conducted 7 10 
him to Bordeaux. One day, the prince met 7 Duguesclin in 
the 11 street. " How are 12 you, Bertrand?" said 13 he to 
him. "I am 12 very well, 14 my lord, and 1 very 1 pleased," 1 
replied Duguesclin, " for they say 15 that I am the greatest 16 
knight in 17 the world, since you will 18 not permit me to 15 
ransom myself." It was 2 the custom in those days, 4 to set 
a prisoner free 19 when he had paid his ransom ; and Dugues- 
clin was insinuating 20 to the Prince of Wales that he was 2 
afraid of him, since he did not permit 2 him to redeem him- 
self and 17 return to the 21 king of France. The Prince of 20 
Wales was 7 piqued by this remark. 22 "Fix your own ran- 
som," 23 said he to Duguesclin, who fixed 7 it at a 1 hundred 
thousand livres. It was, 2 for the time, an enormous 24 sum. 
"Where will you get 25 this money?" asked the Prince of 

1 omit this word. 2 use imperfect, because this tense describes statcs, 
conditions, sentiments, or characteristics in the past, considered permanent 
for the time being. 3 en. 4 à cette époque. 5 insert definite article. 6 était 
révolté. 7 past definite. 8 fut roi à. 9 do not use capital. 10 de tenir. 
11 une. 12 présent of aller. Vi past definite of demander. 14 ' very well; 
à merveille. là on dit. 16 premier. 17 de. 18 présent of vouloir. 19 to 
set . . . free; au 'un prisonnier fût remis en liberté. ^semblait dire. 
21 auprès du. ^parole, f. 23 Fix . . . ransom; fixez vous-même votre 
rançon. 24 place after the noun. 25 future of prendre. 



Ç)0 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

Wales. And Duguesclin, who knew 1 that he was loved 2 in 
every hut in 3 France, replied : "There is not a spinner in 
France who would not 4 spin a distaff full to pay my ransom." 

4. DUGUESCLIN A 5 CONSTABLE OF FRANCE. 

Duguesclin, once more 6 free, returned 7 to 8 Spain, where 

5 he defeated. Peter the Cruel ; then he came back to 8 France, 

where war was beginning again with the English. Charles V. 

gave him the sword of a 5 Constable. It was 9 a great honor, 10 

for the dignity of Constable was 9 one of the highest 11 of the 

kingdom of France. Duguesclin, who was 9 modest, did not 

10 wish 9 to accept this honor, saying that he was 9 not of suffi- 

ciently high nobility 12 to command the princes and ail the 

nobles who were 9 in the army; 13 but Charles V. answered 

him that every body, even the princes, would obey 14 him. 

He was called 15 "the good Constable." The people 14 

15 loved 9 him because he was brave and because he was good. 

He forbade 9 his soldiers to do any harm 16 to the weak 13 and 

to those who could 9 not défend themselves, like the church- 

men, the women, the children, and the poor people. 14 

When he died, 7 he was buried 15 at Saint-Denis, near Paris, 
20 by the side of the 17 tombs of the kings of France. 

1 imperfect of savoir, because the verb refers to a fact, not a person. 

2 put in the active voice, thus : 'that one loved (imperfect} him,' etc. 

3 de. 4 ne voudrait; omit pas. 5 omit this word. 6 once more; 
devenu. 7 use past definite, which describes distinct and separate acts 
occurring at a definite moment in the past. 8 en. 9 see page 89, foot- 
note 2. 10 add qu'il lui faisait. n élevées. 12 of . . . nobility; de 
noblesse assez haute. 13 put in the plural. 14 put in the singular. 15 put 
in the active voice, thus : ' one called {imperfect} him.' 16 de faire du 
mal. 17 auprès des. 



EASY PROSE COMPOSITION. 0,1 

5. EXPLOITS OF 1 CHEVALIER BAYARD. 

Bayard was boni- at the Château of Bavard, near Gre- 
noble. From his 3 childhood, he prepared himself for a 
military career: 4 for, in 5 the castle where he spent his 
earliest B years, he heard : unceasingly of the exploits of 
his ancestors, who had fought in 5 the service of the kings 5 
of France. When he had reached 8 his thirteenth year, his 
parents sent him to the'' Duke 1 " of Savoy, who admitted 
hira to the number of his pages. 

j{ Six raonths later, 11 the duke took him to Lyons, where 
Charles VIII. was, 1 - to whom some one 13 spoke of the young 10 
page as the M boldest rider that anv one had ever seen. 15 
The king asked the Duke 10 of Savoy to give him this page, 
who promised 16 to become a good knight. The duke con- 
sented to it ; and it was 17 thus that Bayard entered 5 the 
service of France. 15 

At the âge of eighteen, Bayard made his first campaign 15 
in Italy, when Charles VIII. went 19 there in 1494. He stayed 
there during ail the reign of Louis XII., and his exploits be- 
came celebrated in the entire--' world. 

In the interval of battles, he loved 16 to go on little 21 20 
expéditions in search of the enemy. Being within 5 a few 
leagues of Milan, then occupied by Ludovic Sforza, the 
enemy of Louis XII. . he started one fine morning, with 

1 du. - in this historical narrative, translate every English verb that 
is in a simple past tense and is a real predicate, by the past dehnite, unless 
otherwise indicated in thèse notes. 3 dès V . 4 he prepared . . . career; 
il se destina au métier des armes. h à. * premières. " he heard; il 
entendait parler. s past anterior of atteindre. 9 auprès du. M do not 
use capital. u après. ] - reverse the positions of the subject and predi- 
cate, thus: 'where was (imperfect') Charles VIII.' M l'on. u as the; 
comme du. 15 any one . . . seen; qtàon eût Jamais :u. 16 imper fect. 

'est 1S his first campaign ; ses premières armes. n se rendre, --"'place 
after the word modified. - 1 to go on little; à faire de petites. 



92 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

fifty cavaliers, to 1 attack three hundred, who were 2 encamped 
in front of 3 the city. 

The combat was a 4 very hard one, 4 but Bayard cried: 5 
"Courage, friends ! 6 Let us redouble our 7 blows." And to 
5 the cries of " France ! France ! " the little troop put the 
enemy to flight. 8 The Frenchmen pursued them, and stopped 
only 9 at the gâtes of Milan ; but Bayard did not stop. He 
entered 10 the city at a 7 gallop, still. 11 pursuing the cavaliers, 
and he arrived thus at the very gâtes 12 of Ludovic Sforza's 
io palace, where 4 he was made prisoner. 

Ludovic had so much admiration for his courage that he 
set him at 13 liberty, without asking 14 him any 15 ransom. 

During the battle of Marignan, Bayard fought like a hero. 
The evening of the first day, he found himself 2 in the midst 

15 of the enemy, 16 in great danger of being 14 taken or killed. 
He descended from his horse, and began to 17 creep on his 7 
hands and 18 feet, until he arrived 19 in the midst of the 
French. 

At the end of the battle, Francis I. sent for 20 Bayard, and 
20 told him that he wished to be knighted 21 by him. Bayard 
could 2 not 22 believe that the king wished 19 to do him such 
an honor. 

"Sire," said he to him, "you are the king of so noble a 23 

kingdom ; crowned and consecrated, you are knight above 

25 ail 24 other knights." "Friend, 6 " answered the king, " make 

1 to; pour en. 2 imperfect. 3 in front of; en avant de. 4 omit this 
word. 5 disait. 6 this word must be preceded by possessive adjective 
7 definite article. 8 put . . . flight; força les cavaliers ennemis à s' 
fuir. 9 ne . . . que. 10 insert dans. n place after word modified 
12 at . . . gâtes; jusqu'aux portes. 13 he set him at; le fit remettre en 
14 remember that ail prépositions except en govern the infinitive. 15 de, 

16 use the plural form. 17 se mettre à. 18 repeat préposition and article 
19 imperfect subjunctive. 20 faire chercher. 21 that . . . knighted; qu'il 
voulait être armé chevalier. 22 use ne, but omit pas. 23 say un si . . . 
2i par dessus tous les. 



EASY PROSE COMPOSITION. 93 

haste and do my command." Then, Bayard performed 1 the 
ceremony as it was usually performed. 2 He touched the king 
on 3 the shoulder three times with his sword, and told him 
that he dubbed him knight. 4 

Then, he kissed his sword, lifted it in the 5 air, and ex- 5 
claimed : " Surely, good sword, 6 thon shalt be honored above 7 
ail others, thou that hast given knighthood to so handsome 
and so powerful a 8 king ! " 

"6. ANECDOTES ABOUT 9 LOUIS XI. 

Louis XL, who was 10 the enemy of the nobles, 11 pretended 12 
to love the poor people 13 and the burghers. At Paris, there 10 
were several burghers whom he used to call "crony," 14 and 
he called their wives "gossip." 15 He often went to dine at 
their houses, 16 but he would punish the burghers who resisted 
him, quite as 17 harshly as he punished the lords. He loved 
solitude, and did not like to be looked at or followed 18 when 15 
he travelled. The very year of his accession, as he wanted 
to take a journey, he published throughout 19 the kingdom 
that those who should follow him would be hanged. 

In the castles where he shut himself up, he loved that the 
few 20 companions with whom he lived, should relate 21 stories 20 
to him, and he sometimes told some himself. 22 It was 23 also 

1 faire. 2 it . . . performed; comme on la faisait d'ordinaire. 3 à. 
4 that he . . . knight ; qu'il Vannait chevalier. 5 en V . 6 see page 92, 
footnote 6. " entre. 8 un si beau et si puissant. 9 sur. 10 past 
defïnite. n grands. 12 this verb, like ail others in this sélection 
which describe customary actions, physical habits, or mental character- 
îstics, must be put in the imperfect; the absence of this tense in Eng- 
lish is felt in the use of such expressions as ' would,' ' used to,' ' was 
in the habit,' found before the verb. 13 gens, m. pi. u mon compère. 
15 ma commère. 16 chez eux. n quite as; tout aussi. 18 did not like 
. . . followed ; ne voulait pas qu'on le regardât ni qu'on le suivît. 
19 fit publier dans tout. 20 rares. 21 contassent. 22 and he . . . him- 
self; et lui-même, il en contait volontiers. 23 c'était. 



94 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

one of his greatest 1 pleasures to watch 2 fights of dogs 
and rats. 

He was 3 tormented ail his life by the fear of death. He 
believed, like ail men of his time, 4 that his destiny was 
5 written in the stars, and he used to consult astrologers to 
know it. He would pay devout people and hermits, in 
order that they should ask 5 God to let him live a long 
time. He 6 himself prayed very 6 often ; he wore 7 around 
his hat figures in lead, of saints and virgins, before which 

io he used to kneel down. When he prayed to 6 the Virgin, he 
would address her as 8 " My good Lady." He thought that 
he could win over 9 saints, like men, by 10 giving money to 
their churches. 

When he felt himself 3 on the point of death, 11 he had 

15 brought to his bedside 12 the relies kept in 13 the Sainte- 
Chapelle at Paris, hoping that thèse relies would cure 
him. He also sent for 3 Saint-François de Paule, whom 
he implored in vain to 14 prolong his life by a miracle. 

7. HENRY IV., KING OF NAVARRE. 

Henry IV. was born 15 at the Château of Pau. On 6 the day 

20 of his birth, the king of Navarre, his grandfather, made him 16 

drink a drop of wine, in order, said he, to give him a robust 

constitution. 17 Henry was brought up, not as a 18 prince, but 

as a soldier. He lived 19 like the children of the country, 20 

1 grands. 2 de regarder des. 3 past definite. 4 of his time; de ce 
temps-là. 5 imperfect subjunctive. 6 omit this word. 7 avait. 8 he 
. . . her as; il lui disait. 9 win over; gagner à sa cause. 10 en. 
11 de mourir. 12 he . . . bedside; il fit apporter auprès de son lit. 
13 à. u whom ... in vain; auquel il demanda inutilement de. 
15 give a reason for the use of the past definite in this and following 
verbs. 16 made him; lui fit. 17 tempérament vigoureux, m. 18 not 
as a; non en. 19 give a reason for the use of the imperfect in this and 
the following verbs. 20 pays, m. 



EASY PROSE COMPOSITION. 95 

ran, played, fought with them, and better than they, he 
climbed the trees and scaled the walls and rocks. 

While he was still very young, 1 he came to the court of 
France. He was a 2 Protestant and took part in the civil 
wars. He displayed a brilliant courage. 3 He endured 4 5 
without complaining the fatigues of war, and privations of 
every kind. 5 

He was 6 witty and gay, but he was serious when it was 
necessary to be, and he knew very well how 2 to make him- 
self obeyed." He was simple in his manners, afïectionate 10 
toward ail, but he had noble thoughts and felt ail 2 the 
greatness of the country over which 8 he became king. 

Sully was the childhood friend 9 of Henry IV. He 
called himself 6 the " spécial friend" of the king, but the 
two friends did not always get on. 10 Sully did not hâve 6 an 15 
even disposition. He was jealous of the affection which 
his master showed 11 others. Several times, he irritated 12 
the king, and it was thought 13 that they would not be 
reconciled. 14 

Once, when they had been angry at each other some 20 
time, 15 Sully came to speak to the king on business. 16 
When he had finished, 17 Henry said to him : " Hâve you 
nothing else to 18 say to me?" Sully answered that he 
had not. 19 " Well, I hâve something to say to you," re- 
plied the king. 20 Then, he had 12 with Sully a friendly con- 25 

1 while he . . . young; de bonne heure. 2 omit this word. 3 he 
displayed . . . courage; il y montra tme éclatante bravoure. 4 imper- 
fect. 5 plural. 6 see page 94, footnote 19. 7 put in the infinitive présent. 
8 of the country over which; de cette France dont. 9 was . . . friend; 
fut le compagnon d'enfance. 10 ne s'entendaient pas toujours. n insert 
à d\ 12 see page 94, footnote 15. Vi l'on crut. u reflexive for m. 
15 Once, when . . . some time; un jour qu'ils se boudaient depuis long- 
temps. 16 d'affaires. n past anterior. 18 ne . . . rien autre à. 
10 that he had not; que non. 20 turn : 'I (moi), replied the king, 
(je) hâve something to say to you.' 



ÇÔ EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

versation, 1 and, 2 taking him by the hand, he led him toward 
a group of courtiers and said to them : " Gentlemen, I love 
Sully more than ever ! " 

8. THE YOUTH OF SULLY. 

Sully was born in 1560, at the Château of Rosny, near 

5 Mantes, of a noble Protestant family. 3 At the âge of 
eleven, 4 he was presented 5 to Henry, King of Navarre, 6 
who was then eighteen years old. He made him a beauti- 
ful court bow, then a pretty speech, and so greatly pleased 7 
the young king that he 8 kept him near his person. 9 

10 When Henry of Navarre came 5 to Paris to 10 wed the 
sister of the king, Charles IX., Sully was 11 with him. Both 
ran a great danger on the eve of 12 Saint Bartholomew. 
Henry was 11 at the Louvre. Charles IX. sent for him 13 
and 14 threatened to hâve 15 him killed, if he did not be- 

15 corne 16 a 17 Catholic. " Death or the mass," said he to 
him, furiously. 18 Henry did not want to die ; he answered 
the king that he preferred 11 to go to mass, and was thereby 19 
saved. 

Sully was then 20 living in 21 the Latin Quarter. He 

20 lodged 11 with 22 a Protestant 20 innkeeper, and was attending 
the courses of a collège called Collège de Bourgogne. He 

1 cordial entretien, m. 2 replace by puis. 3 turn : 'of a family 
noble, protestant.' 4 add 'years.' 6 see page 94, footnote 15. 6 turn: 
' to the king of Navarre, Henry.' 7 so greatly pleased; plut tant au. 
8 celui-ci. 9 auprès de lui. 10 pour y. n when, in the course of the 
narrative, it becomes necessary to introduce subordinate explanations of 
facts, states, or conditions considered permanent for the time being, the» 
tense changes from the past definite to the imperfect. 12 la nuit de la. 
13 le fit appeler devant lui. u repeat the object pronoun. 15 ' to hâve,' 
in the sensé of ' to cause ' a thing to be done, is rendered by faire, fol- 
lowed immediately by the infinitive of the second verb. 16 imperfect of 
se faire. 17 omit this word. 18 avec fureur. 19 ainsi. 20 place after 
the word modified. 21 à. 22 chez. 



EASY PROSE COMPOSITION. 97 

was awakened 1 during the night by the cries of the assas- 
sins and the groans of the wounded. Two of his servants 
went out to learn 2 what was passing. 3 They did not re- 
turn ; they were killed 4 in the street. Sully was 5 still very 
young ; he was twelve years old ; but he had much près- 5 
ence of mind. He dressed, 1 put a big mass-book under 
his arm, and went down into the street to go to his collège. 
A band of assassins stopped 6 him ; but they saw that he 
had 5 a mass-book and believed that he was 5 a 9 Catholic. • 
They therefore let him pass. 7 Sully arrived at the col- 10 
lege, and the principal hid him for a few days. 

Sully left the 8 collège when the massacre was ended ; 
but, like his master, Henry of Navarre, he became a 9 Cath- 
olic. While Henry of Navarre was retained a 9 prisoner at 
the court, Sully lived at Paris ; in 1575, Henry escaped, and 15 
Sully followed him. Both then declared that they had be- 
come Catholics because they had been forced to it, and they 
became Protestants again. They went over to the 10 Protes- 
tants, and took part in 11 ail the civil wars of the reign of 
Henry III. < 20 

Sully was 5 flfteen years old when he began to fight in this 
way. 12 He proved himself right away a 9 brave and bold 
soldier. One day, Henry of Navarre, who had seen him 
fight in 11 the first rank, in an encounter where there was 5 
much danger, said to those who stood around him : " There 25 
is 13 a young nobleman of good family ; he will some day 
amount to something good, 14 or I am 15 much mistaken." 16 

1 the narrative proper is resumed; hence, the past definite. 2 savoir. 
3 reflexive form. 4 use the active voice. 5 see page 96, footnote 1 1 . 
6 verb agrées in the singular. 7 turn : ils le laissèrent donc passer. 
8 sortit du. 9 omit this word. 10 went over to the; se rendirent au 
milieu des. ll à. vl ainsi. 13 voilà. 14 he will . . . good; il fera 
un jour quelque chose de bon. 15 future. ™ fort trompé. 



98 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

9. YOUTH OF RICHELIEU. 

Richelieu was born at Paris in 1585. He was 1 the fourth 
child of a nobleman of 2 Poitou, who was 1 not rich. He 
was 3 at first destined to the military profession, 4 and com- 
menced by being a brilliant cavalier. But he had 1 a brother 
5 who was 1 Bishop of Luçon, and this brother died. 3 Then 
Richelieu's mother advised 3 him to become 5 a 6 priest, prom- 
ising 7 him that she would obtain for him the bishopric of 
his brother. Richelieu consented, and the cavalier be- 
came Bishop of Luçon in 1607 ; he was 1 then twenty-two 

10 years old. His bishopric was 1 one of the poorest in 8 
France. Richelieu was miserably housed; 9 his chimneys 
smoked ; he had no garden. He performed very well 10 
his duties as 8 bishop, but he was discontented. He longed 
to corne to the court, to 11 be a 6 minister, and to 11 play a 

15 grand rôle. * 

During the minority of Louis XIII., Richelieu found 
favor with 12 the queen, Marie de Médicis, by ail kinds of 
flatteries and compliments. He even became minister 13 in 
1616; but Louis XIII. , who was entering upon 14 his four- 

20 teenth year, quarrelled with his mother, who was govern- 
ing the kingdom very badly, 15 and who was obliged to leave 
the court. Richelieu followed her ; during several years, he 
employed his skill to reconcile the king with his mother. 
He succeeded; 16 and, to reward him, Marie de Médicis had 

25 him appointed 17 cardinal. 

Marie de Médicis desired 18 also that Richelieu should 

1 see page 96, footnote il. 2 du. 3 narrative is resumed; hence, 
past definite. 4 au métier des armes. 5 se faire. 6 omit this word. 



10 



au mieux. 



7 participle must be preceded by en. 8 de. 9 mal logé. 
11 pour. 12 found favor with; se fit bien venir de. 13 he even . . . min- 
ister; il devint même une première fois mitiistre. u dans. 15 place 
after the word modified. 16 say ' to it.' 17 le fit nommer, 18 past definite. 



EASY PROSE COMPOSITION. 99 

become 1 prime minister of Louis XIII. The king did 
not at first 2 consent. 3 "I know him better than you do, 4 
madame," said ne to his mother; "he is a raan of bound- 
less ambition." 5 He finished, however, by yielding ; and 
in 1624, Cardinal Richelieu became prime minister of Louis 5 
XIII. 

At the end of the year 1642, the Cardinal fell seriously ill. 
He felt 6 that his end had come. He asked his doctor how 
much time he had 7 yet to live. " Tvventy-four hours," was 
the ansvver. 8 Richelieu employed his last hours in 9 prepar- 10 
ing himself for 9 death, but he occupied himself 7 still with 10 
the affairs of the State. He gave the king counsels on what 
should be done after his death. 11 He pointed out to him 
the men that were to 12 replace him, and then 4 he expired 
peacefully. 15 

It is difficult to love Richelieu, for he was 6 not good and 
he was 6 often hypocritical; but it is impossible not to 13 ad- 
mire him, for he desired 14 the greatness of France, and he 
gave her this greatness. 15 

10. COLBERT, MINISTER OF LOUIS XIV. 

Colbert was the 4 son of a merchant of Rheims, and he 20 
had raised himself 16 by dint of hard 4 work to the 17 rank 
which put 7 him above the greatest lords. 

No one in 9 the world has ever 4 worked more than Col- 
bert. He encouraged 18 agriculture, industry, commerce. 
He reorganized 19 the finances, and he gave 18 to Louis XIV. 25 

1 imperfect subjunctive. 2 place after word modifiée!. 3 say ' to it.' 
4 omit this word. 5 turn : ' of an ambition boundless.' 6 past definite. 
7 imperfect. 8 répondit-il. 9 à. 10 de. u on what . . . death; sur 
ce qu'il y avait à faire après lui. vl imperfect of devoir. 13 de ne pas. 
14 past indefinite of vouloir. Vo he gave . . . greatness; il a donné à la 
France cette grandeur. 1G pluperfect. 17 jusqu'à ce. 18 past indefinite. 
19 he reorganized; il a mis un ordre parfait dans. 

LefC 



100 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

the money necessary for the enormous expenses of that 
prince, in times of peace and war. 1 

He used to rise 2 before daylight, 3 and he worked six- 

teen hours a 4 day. He was not fond of intruders and 

5 was called 5 "the man of marble." Solicitors were afraid 

of his thick 6 eyebrows, 7 of his wrinkled 6 forehead, and of 

his hard, deep-set eyes. 8 

One day, a lady came 9 to ask him a favor. As he did not 
answer, 10 she insisted, and finally went down on her knees 11 
io and said to him : " My lord, I 12 entreat you, listen to me." 
Then, Colbert went down on his knees before her and said : 13 
" Madame, I entreat you, let me alone ! 14 " It was 15 thus that 
he used to get rid 2 of those who made 13 him lose his time. 

11. DEATH OF LOUIS XVI. 

After five months of captivity in the tower of the Temple, 
15 the king appeared 16 before the Convention. He defended 17 
himself with nrmness, and received with the résignation of a 
Christian the news 7 of his condemnation. On 18 the 20th of 
January, 1793, Louis XVI. obtained the permission to see his 
family for the last time. 19 The final 6 interview took place 

1 of that . . . war; que fit ce prince aussi bien dans la paix que 
dans la guerre. 2 explain the use of the imperfect in this and fol- 
lowing verbs. 3 le jour. 4 par. 5 put in the active voice. 6 place 
after the word modified. 7 use the singular form. 8 turn : ' of his eye 
profound and hard' {dur). 9 tell why the use of the past definite 
should be resumed hère. 10 use imperfect. 11 and finally . . . knees; 
puis, finit par se mettre à genoux devant lui. V1 insert en. 13 this verb 
must be preceded by lui. 14 laissez-moi trattquille. 15 c'est. 15 com- 
parut. 17 observe that this sélection recounts a séries of historical facts 
conceived of as beginning, developing, and reaching completion at a 
definite moment of the past; hence, every predicate verb should be in 
the past definite. 18 in dates, do not translate the prépositions; use the 
cardinal form of the adjective — usually, simply the figure; do not use 
capitals for names of months. 19 turn : ' to {de) see a last time his family.' 



EASY PROSE COMPOSITION. IOI 

in the dining room of the prison. The queen entered first, 1 
holding her son by the hand ; then, came Madame Eliza- 
beth, sister of the king, and the royal 2 princess, daughter 
of Louis XVI. They fell into 3 the arms of the king. 

For almost 4 tvvo hours, they remained closely clasping 5 
one another. 5 The séparation was heart-rending, but the 
king preserved ail his fortitude. 6 

He rested 7 quietly during the night. At five o'clock 
in 8 the morning, his valet Cléry awoke him. Louis XVI. 
made his last préparations ; 9 he heard mass and took com- 10 
munion. At nine o'clock, the soldiers came to get him. 
" Let us go," 10 said the king. During the journey and on 
the scaffold, he kept up the noblest attitude. 11 The execu- 
tioner bound his 12 hands. Turning toward the people, he 
tried 13 to pronounce a few words ; but a rolling of drums 14 15 
drowned his voice, and a few minutes 15 after, his head 
dropped into the basket. Thus perished a king who was 
good, virtuous, but too weak, alas ! to resist the fury of the 
Révolution. 

12. NAPOLEON BONAPARTE. 

Napoléon Bonaparte was born at Ajaccio, on 16 the i5th 20 
of August, 1769. His father, Charles Bonaparte, had 17 five 
sons and three daughters. Napoléon was the second in the 

1 la première. 2 place after word modifiée!. 3 they fell into; ils se 
précipitèrent dans. 4 almost : près de. 5 remained . . . another; de- 
meurèrent étroitement serrés les tins contre les autres. c preserved . . . 
fortitude; garda toute sa fermeté. 7 reposer. 8 de. 9 préparatifs m. 
^partir. n turn : 'he kept up {garder) during the journey {trajet, m.) 
and on the scaffold the noblest attitude.' 12 turn : ' to him bound the.' 
13 vouloir. 14 use singular. 15 instant, m. 16 see page 100, footnote 
18. 17 remember that, in a narrative, ail parts vvhich are purely accessory. 
— such as the description of a previously existing state or condition, the 
description of a locality, or explanations interpolated hère and there, — 
must be expressed by the imperfect. 



102 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

family. At ten, 1 he entered 2 the military 3 school of Bri- 
enne, where his masters were 2 struck by 4 his extraordinary 3 
intelligence. At fifteen, 1 he was 2 sent to the military 3 school 
of Paris. At sixteen, 1 he was 5 second lieutenant in a regi- 
5 ment of artillery. He rapidly 3 became captain, then com- 
mander, and he had 5 this rank, when he was sent to the 
army which was besieging Toulon, of which the English 
had taken possession in 1 793. Thanks to him, Toulon 
was taken in a few days, and he was made gênerai. He 

10 was 5 then twenty-four years old. 

When Bonaparte took 6 command of the Army of Italy 
in 1796, he was twenty-six. Illustrious 3 gênerais like Auge- 
reau and Masséna served 5 under his orders. He explained 7 
to them his plans for the 8 campaign, and on 9 hearing him, 

15 Masséna said to Augereau : "We hâve found our master." 

In 9 less than 4 a year, — from the month of April, 1796, to 

the month of February, 1797, — the Army of Italy, which was 5 

very poorly equipped, and which was lacking in almost ail the 

necessaries, 10 carried off twelve great victories. With 55,000 

20 soldiers, Bonaparte triumphed over 4 more than 4 200,000 ene- 
mies, killed 11 more than 20,000, took 11 more than 80,000, and 
returned 12 to 9 France 13 the greatest gênerai of the Republic. 

13. MARRIAGE OF NAPOLEON WITH MARIE-LOUISE. 

Even after ail his victories, Napoléon was considered by 
the kings of Europe a parvenu. 14 The 15 son of a poor 16 

1 add ans. 2 remember that the real canvass of the narrative — namely, 
ail parts essential to it — must be related in the past definite; entrer hère 
governs à. 3 place after the word modified. 4 de. 5 see page 101, foot- 
note 17. 6 insert le. 7 exposer. 8 for the; de. 9 en. 10 in almost . . . 
necessaries; de presque toutes les choses nécessaires. n this verb must be 
preceded by en. 12 revenir. 13 add avec la réputation du. 14 turn : 
'Napoléon, even after . . . was considered (imperfect) by . . . as . . ..' 
15 omit this word. 16 petit. 



EASY PROSE COMPOSITION. 103 

Corsican 1 lawyer, he owed 2 his crown only to 3 himself; 
the other kings ànd emperors had received theirs from a 
long line 4 of ancestors, and although afraid 5 of him, they 
considered 2 him as greatly 6 beneath them. 

Napoléon had 7 the weakness of wishing to enter th~e 8 5 
family of kings. While he was a gênerai, he had married 
Joséphine, widow of General Beauharriais ; 9 and Joséphine, 
after becoming 10 empress, was 2 very popular in France. As 
she had not given him any children, he left 7 her by a di- 
vorce, — for the law permitted 2 divorce in France, — and 10 
he resolved r to marry a princess. 

Napoléon thought 11 at first of a sister of the Emperor of 
Russia, Alexander, but she was refused him. 12 He then 1 
turned toward Austria and forced the Emperory Francis IL, 
to give him his daughter, Marie-Louise. The latter was 15 
regarded 7 by her parents, and she regarded herself,' as a 
victim. 

She abandoned her husband as soon as he was van- 
quished in 18 14, and took refuge at Vienna, taking with 
her 13 the Emperor's son, who was called 14 the " King of 20 
Rome." After the death of Napoléon, she married an 
Austrian 1 colonel. As to her son, he lived 7 at the court 
of Austria, where he bore 2 the title of Duke of Reichstadt. 
His thought was 2 unceasingly turned toward France. He 
died in 1832, and the remains of this unhappy youth repose 25 
to-day near 15 those of the princes of the house of Austria. 

1 place after the word modified. 2 see page 101, footnote 17. 3 ne 
. . . qu'à. i suite, f. 5 although afraid; tout en ayant peur. 6 fort. 
7 see page 102, footnote 2. s dans une. 9 turn : ' he had married 
{épouser} while he was général, Joséphine, widow of the . . . .' 10 after 
becoming; devenue. n songer (à). 12 lui. 13 takin* with her; empor- 
tant. u use the active voice. 15 auprès de. 



MORE ADVANCED PROSE COM- 
POSITION. 



1. LES PRECIEUSES RIDICULES. 

(Comedy byi Molière.) 

# 
The daughter and nièce of a good bourgeois, named 

M. Gorgibus, are two pedantic maidens 2 who dream 3 of 

seeing themselves surrounded by wits, people in 4 the fash- 

ion, who talk only 3 in a pretentious style ; they hâve changed 

5 their names of Madelon and 5 Cathos for the more eupho- 
nious names of Aminte and 5 Polixène, and they pose as 6 
précieuses. Gorgibus who, above 7 ail, is a man of practi- 
cal common 8 sensé, wishes to marry 9 thèse two young girls 
to 10 two young men of good family, named La Grange and 

io Du Croisy. Thèse young men express themselves with sim- 
plicity and naturalness, a fact which does not commend 
them to 11 Cathos and 5 Madelon, who dismiss 12 them with 
contempt. The two noblemen swear to avenge themselves, 
and send to the girls, 13 to this effect, two impudent valets, 

15 who give themselves out 14 for men of quality. 

1 de. 2 pedantic maidens; deux pédantes. 3 ne . . . que. 4 à. 
5 repeat préposition. 6 en. 7 avant. 8 practical, common : gros bon. 
9 marier ; this is the only proper verb to use when the English verb 
has the sensé of giving in marriage, or of performing the religious or 
civil ceremony of marriage. 10 avec. n a fact . . . them to; ce qui 
ne les recommande pas auprh de. 12 éconduisent. 13 to the girls; chez 
elles. u omit this word. 

104 



MORE ADVANCED PROSE COMPOSITION. 105 

Our two simpletons take the extravagances of the Marquis 
de Mascarille and 1 the Vicomte de Jodelet for the perfection 
of wit and 1 gallantry. Ail at once, the masters arrive, with 2 
stick in 3 hand, to seek their servants. They do not fail to 
banter the coquettes on the choice of their admirers, and 5 
leave them confounded and overwhelmed with shame. Gor- 
gibus advises 4 them a little harshly to profit by the lesson, 
and they disappear under the crushing 5 apostrophe: " Go 
hide yourselves, wretches, 6 go hide yourselves ! " 

2. AN ADVENTURE OF RABELAIS. 

(Quart d'heure de Rabelais.) 

The Cardinal du Bellay, having been sent as ambassador 10 
to Rome by Francis I., took Rabelais along, in the capacity 
of 7 doctor. The latter showed very little respect for 8 the 
Pope, and conducted himself in such a way that he was 
obliged to leave Rome in haste, and to escape to France 
on foot, poorly clad and without money. After 9 numerous 15 
days of march, he at last arrived at Lyons. But to con- 
tinue his journey to Paris with less fatigue, 10 he bethought 
himself of a funny 11 stratagem which would hâve been very 
dangerous for a man less celebrated. 12 

He entered a tavern, and asked for a good room. He 20' 
begged his 13 hostess to send him a young boy who could 14 
read and write. As soon as he was alone, 15 he made several 
little packages filled with 16 ashes. The young boy arrives, 
with paper, pen, 17 and ink. Rabelais dictâtes several notes 
to him. On one, were written 18 thèse words, "Poison to 25 

1 repeat préposition. 2 omit, and replace by le. 3 à la. * en- 
gager (a). 5 under the crushing; devant cette foudroyante. 6 vilaines. 
7 in the capacity of ; en qualité de. 8 à . 9 insert de. 10 turn : ' his 
journey with less fatigue to {jusqu'à) Paris.' n plaisant. vl connu. 
13 use definite article. u who could; sachant. 15 as soon . . . alone; 
une fois seul. 16 filled with; de. 17 une plume. 18 sur l'un, on lisait. 



106 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

kill 1 the king;" on another, "Poison to kill the queen;" 
on a 2 third, "Poison to kill the dauphin." A similar label 
is prepared for each one of the children of France. Rabe- 
lais sticks one of thèse labels on each of the packages, 3 and 
5 says to the boy : " My child, take care not to 4 speak of this 
to your raother or 5 any one, for it would endanger 6 your life 
and mine." He then shut up the whole in his valise, and 
called for 7 dinner. The boy ran at once to relate every- 
thing 8 to his mother. The latter, trembling with fear, 9 has- 

10 tened to go to inform the provost of the city. The provost 
repairs at once to the tavern ; and, after a careful search 
of 10 the room of the traveller, takes possession of him and 
his valise. The bad appearance 11 of Rabelais, his evasive 
answers during the examination 12 which he had to undergo, 

15 brought 13 upon him grave suspicions. He repeated 14 without 
ceasing : "Take good care of 15 my valise, and conduct me 
to 16 the king; I hâve strange things to reveal to him." 17 
His hands were tied, 18 he was put 18 upon a good horse, and 
taken 18 to Paris. He lived well 19 ail the way without having 

20 to spend a cent, and upon 20 his arrivai in the capital, he 
4 0_- wa^^rraignetee£ore^j/e kin êfc 1^, ^ ■(" 

Francis I. knew 14 him well. Heasked him where he had 
left Monsieur le cardinal du Bellay. Rabelais then related 21 
his story. His valise was 21 opened ; in the 22 présence of ail, 

25 he swallowed 21 a little of the contents of ail the packages, 
and proved 21 thus that they were 14 entirely harmless. The 

1 faire mourir. 2 use defmite article. 3 turn : 'on each pack- 
age one of the labels.' 4 gardez-vous bien de. 5 ni. 6 it would 
endanger; il y va de. 7 demanda à. 8 turn : 'ran everything to 
relate . . ..' ^transie de pezir. 10 une perquisition minutieuse dans. 

11 mine, f. 12 dans V interrogatoire. 13 firent peser. u imperfect. 
15 p renez fo en garde à. 16 vers. 17 turn : ' I hâve to {a) reveal {ré- 
véler) to him things strange.' 18 use the active voice. 19 insert pendant. 
20 dès. 21 présent. 22 in the; en. 



MORE ADVANCED PROSE COMPOSITION. 107 

court laughed heartily at the ingenious scheme 1 which he 
had imagined to finish his long journey on horseback, 2 
without untying the strings of his purse. 3 

This adventure gave rise 4 to the expression, "le mauvais 
quart d'heure de Rabelais," that is to say, the moment 5 
when 5 one must pay his bill, G — a big bill, especially. 



3. THE STORY OF JACQUES AMYOT. 

Jacques Amyot was born at Melun, on the third of Octo- 
ber, 15 13. His father was a haberdasher, but he had great 
trouble in supporting 7 his family, which consisted of a boy, 
Jacques, and two daughters. Thèse, being older, 8 occupied 10 
themselves with the affairs of the shop ; as for Jacques, he 
had no taste for commerce ; to procure 9 books and 10 devour 
them in secret, such was his only ambition. His mother, 
of whom he was the favorite, had put him at school, where 
he 11 quickly learned to read. His father called him lazy, 12 15 
when he found him with 13 a book in his hand. 

One day, Jacques resolved to go to Paris. He was hardly 
thirteen years old, when he left his parents without even say- 
ing good-by to them ; and without money, poorly clad, wear- 
ing coarse 14 shoes, he took in midwinter the road which led 20 
from Melun to Orléans. 

It took several days at this time 15 to go from Melun to 
Paris ; but the poor child, unaware of this 16 distance, had 

1 heartily . . . scheme; beaucoup du moyen ingénieux. 2 turn : ' to 
finish on horseback his . . ..' 3 without . . . purse; sans bourse dé- 
lier. 4 gave rise; a donné naissance. r ° où. 6 écot, m. " great 
trouble in supporting; beaucoup de peine à nourrir. 8 being older; 
les aillées. 9 use the reflexive form. l ? replace by pour. n where he ; 
et il y. 12 called him lazy; le traitait de grand paresseux. 13 omit 
this word. 14 wearing coarse; chaussé de gros. 15 époque, f. 16 unaware 
of this; très-ignorant de la. 



108 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

imagined that he could 1 arrive there the same evening. 
After having walked until night without having met 2 any 
one of 3 whom to ask his road, he thought 4 that he had lost 
his way, for he had not yet perceived the steeple of the 

5 Cathedral of Orléans. Benumbed with cold, worn out'with 
hunger and fatigue, he lay down near a bush, unable to see 5 
his road through the snow which was beginning to fall. 

Happily, a horseman passed by 6 and heard his groans. 
One of his servants took the child up behind him, 7 and a 

io few drops of cordial quickly revived him. Little Jacques 8 
then related his escapade ; but, when they 9 arrived at Or- 
léans, he was seized with high fever 10 and had lost con- 
sciousness. 

The nobleman who had picked him up on the road, took 

15 him to the hospital of that city, and intrusted him to the 
care 11 of the sisters, whose charity he knew well. 12 The 
next day, he came to see him, gave him a letter of recom- 
mendation to 13 a master in 14 one of the numerous collèges 
of Paris, and went away promising 15 him to go that very 

20 evening 16 to reassure his mother at Melun, where he was to 
return. 

Three days of rest completely cured little Jacques, 8 and 
he was able to résume his journey. 17 He received twelve 
cents and some provisions before leaving 18 the hospital, so 

25 that he could gayly finish the rest of his journey. 19 On 15 

1 conditional présent. 2 infinitive présent. 3 à. 4 past definite. 
5 unable to see; ne reconnaissant plus. 6 près de là. 7 up behind 
him; en croupe. 8 proper nouns preceded by adjectives, require the 
definite article. 9 on. 10 était pris d'une grosse fièvre. u use plural. 
12 dont il connaissait la charité. 13 pour. 14 de. 15 the présent participle 
should be preceded by en when the action which it represents, and that 
expressed by the governing verb, are supposed to take place simultane- 
ously. 16 le soir même. 17 to résume his journey; se remettre en route. 
18 before leaving; avant sa sortie de. 19 he could ... his journey; qu'il 
fit gaiement le reste du chemin. 



MORE ADVANCED PROSE COMPOSITION. IOO. 

leaving the hospital, he swore that if ever he became rich, 
he would endow this establishment. 

In the letter which he had given to Jacques, the kind 
nobleman asked that his protégé be employed as 1 errand 
boy and servant of the professors and pupils. If he showed 5 
any striking disposition 2 for study, he was to be received 3 
later within 4 the school. 

The master to whora Jacques handed this letter, was a 
man full of business 5 and naturally gruff. "Choose 6 your 6 
place at the door," he said to him, " and vve shall see about 10 
giving you r errands." Then, with 8 a brusque gesture, he 
dismissed him. But Jacques was of a resolute and persist- 
ent nature which nothing could discourage. 9 The child 
chose 10 a place in a doorway and carried there a big bunch 
of straw ; he settled down comfortably, and supped gayly 15 
on 8 the remains of the provisions which the sisters of Or- 
léans had given him. 

^The next day, on their way to school, 11 the pupils saw 
the little errand boy, seated, his 12 legs hanging over 13 the 
fresh straw, reading in a book of the 12 Gospels; his pretty 2c 
face 14 charmed them. Several of 15 them questioned him, 
and having learned that he was an 12 errand boy, employed 
him immediately ; thus, he earned some few cents from 
the very first day. 16 

Immediately upon 17 his arrivai at Paris, Jacques had 25 

1 asked that . . . employed as; demandait qiCon employât . . . en 
qualité de. 2 use plural. 3 on devait le recevoir. 4 within; à l'intérieur 
de. 5 full of business; affairé. 6 use singular. 7 about giving you; à 
te faire faire. 8 de. 9 which . . . discourage; qui ne se décourageait 
point. 10 use the reflexive form. u on their . . . school; en se rendant 
aux classes. 12 omit this word. 13 sur. H bonne mine. 15 d' entre. 
10 turn : ' he earned thus, from the very {des le) first day, some few cents 
{quelque menue monnaie). 1T dès ; this préposition, which is some- 
times synonymous with à partir de, marks a point of departure in 
time. 



110 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

written to his mother ; he soon received word from her 
that she was sending him a big loaf of bread by 1 the boat 
from Melun. Every week, she would send him another like 
it, 2 to prevent him from dying of hunger in the great city. 
5 He wondered 3 what he could 4 do to prove, some 5 day, his 
gratitude to this tender mother. To cross the threshold of 
the collège, be admitted into it as a 8 pupil, and become a 
scholar, this was, it seemed to him, 6 the surest means ; 7 
but how was 8 he 8 to reach this goal? 

io One day, after a holiday, a lady passed by, 8 taking her 
two sons back to the collège. " At your service, ladies 7 
and gentlemen," said little Jacques to them. " Why, 9 it is 
our little errand boy," said one of the pupils to his brother. 
" We must recommend him to mamma ; she will give him 

15 more to do 10 than we." Their mother looked at Jacques 
and was charmed by his face and his childish grâce. 11 
Having seen the book which he held in his hand, she 
questioned him, and learned of 8 his passionate ardor for 
reading and learning. "Do you 7 wish 7 to accompany my 

20 sons to collège every day?" 12 she asked him kindly. 
"At my request, the professors will permit you to attend 
ail their lessons, and thus 12 you will be able to learn 
something." 

The child, not knowing how to prove his gratitude to 

25 the good lady, knelt down before her and kissed 13 the 

, hem 14 of her gown. 

1 turn : ' he received soon from her word (l'avis) that a big loaf was 
arriving to him by . . ..' 2 would send . . . like it; elle devait lui 
en envoyer un semblable. 3 rêvait (a). 4 conditional présent. 5 un. 
6 c'était, lui semblait-il. " 7 use singular. 8 omit this word. 9 liens. 



12 



m 



10 elle lui fera gagner plus. n childish grâce; gentillesse, f. 
French, an adverb or adverbial expression is usually placed immedi- 
ately after the verb, even when the verb has an object; observe that 
the reverse is true of English construction. 13 and kissed; en baisant, 
14 use plural. 



MORE ADVANCED PROSE COMPOSITION. III 

He was soon admitted within 1 the collège; he had 2 a 
little room under the roof, and he was authorized 3 to share 
the studies of the pupils. His life, from this time on, 4 be- 
came a combat mil of ardor. 

The big loaf which he received each week from Melun, 4 5 
assured his subsistence ; he could 2 add to this 5 some fruits 
and vegetables, and buy 6 a coat with the small wages which 
the kind lady had procured him; 7 he could 2 also 4 buy 6 
some books ! He then 4 resolved 8 to surpass ail his fellow- 
students in his studies. 10 

After rapid progress in the study of Latin, he wished 2 
to learn the 9 beautiful Greek language, which only 10 a few 
scholars then 4 knew in France. By dint of work, he suc- 
ceeded 2 in learning Greek. The king, Francis I., had insti- 
tuted a chair for the teaching of this language. One day, 15 
Jacques was 2 examined by his professors in the 11 présence 
of Francis I. and his sister, Marguerite de Navarre, who 12 
also knew Greek. The king and princess, astounded at 
his learning, overvvhelmed him with praises, and took 2 under 
their protection the 9 young scholar, who 11 was 11 to 11 be u one 20 
of the future glories of France. 

A few days after, the boat from Melun landed 2 at Paris 
a poor man and his wife clad in the humble garments of 
the artisans of that time ; they were the father and mother 
of Jacques Amyot. " Oh, my dear son!" said the happy 25 
woman to him, pressing 13 him tenderly upon her heart, " I 
hâve brought 14 thee thy father, who has forgiven thee and 15 is 
very proud of thee." 

1 à Pintérieur du. 2 past definite. 3 use active voice. 4 see 
page 110, footnote 12. 5 add to this; y ajouter. 6 use the reflexive 
form. ' turn : ' which to him had procured (assurés) the kind lady.' 
8 songea (a). 9 use démonstrative adjective. 10 qu'à peine. n omit 
this word. 12 insert elle (for emphasis). 13 see page 108, footnote 15. 
14 présent tense. Yo repeat subject. 



112 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

Amyot was ordained priest, then appointée! professor of 
Greek; later, he became tutor to 1 the children of Henry II. 
and finally, Bishop of Auxerre. He left in 2 his testament 
a legacy to the hospital of Orléans, as he had promised to 

5 do 3 in his childhood. 

We 4 owe him a complète translation of the works of 
Plutarch. The language of Amyot is rich, 5 clear, eminently 
French. His vocabulary, like his syntax, is drawn from the 
very traditions 6 of the French language; his expressions 

10 are lively, picturesque, full of grâce and brilliancy. 7 He 
is at the same time 8 familiar and naïf. The success of 
this work was 9 rapid and permanent. Until his death, Amyot 
saw 9 each year marked by a new édition. In 10 the seven- 
teenth century, the French Academy counted 9 him among 

15 the models of the language, and his place has remained by 
the side of Montaigne and Rabelais, among the greatest 
prose writers of France. 

4. JEAN-BAPTISTE LULLI. 

(Creator of the Opéra in France.) 

In 1643, tne Chevalier de Guise was travelling in Italy. 
He was preparing 11 to return to France, when he received 
20 a letter from Mademoiselle, duchesse de Montpensier, 12 in 2 
which she 13 begged 14 him to sélect 15 a bright child of ten or 10 
twelve, of whom she might 16 make a 17 jester. After many 
inquiries, the chevalier decided 11 upon 18 -a little Florentine 

1 de. 2 par. 3 as he . . . to do; ainsi qu'il en avait pris ren- 
gagement. 4 on. ° abondante. 6 singular. 7 fraîcheur. 8 at 
the same time; en même temps. 9 past defmite. 10 à. n re- 
flexive form. 12 turn : ' received from Mademoiselle, duchesse de 

Montpensier, a letter . . . .' 13 celle-ci. 14 imperfect. 15 this 

verb must be preceded by lui. 16 imperfect of vouloir. 17 son. 
18 pour. 



MORE ADVANCED PROSE COMPOSITION. II3 

lad, 1 possessed 1 of a lively imagination and of such 2 sin- 
gular ugliness that his face, at first sight, provoked 3 laughter. 
This child was Jean-Baptiste Lulli. His parents were very 
poor, but his father was a 1 rather good musician, and Lulli 
had learned so early to play on the violin that, at the âge of 5 
ten, lie was already a remarkable performer. 4 His father 
and mother consented gladly to a séparation that was to 
make the fortune of their son ; and soon after, the cheva- 
lier arrived in France with the future jester of Mademoiselle. 
The peculiar physiognomy of Lulli did not find favor with 5 10 
the capricious princess. Instead of admitting him to the 
number of her pages, she made him one of her 6 scullions. 
He soon became the favorite of the numerous valets of the 
house. During the day, he diverted them by his ingenious 
wit, 7 and in 1 the evening, he played for 8 them the prettiest 15 
national 9 airs of Naples and Florence. He played already 
with a wonderful précision, and an originality of exécution 
that was 10 very extraordinary for a child of his âge. 

The Comte de Nogent, coming one day to pay a visit to 
the Duchesse de Montpensier, 11 heard the little virtuoso giv- 20 
ing 12 his habituai 9 concert to the valets of Mademoiselle, on 8 
the lower 9 story, in the servants' hall. 13 The count stopped 
a moment to listen to the violinist ; then, attracted by the 
talent 14 of the performer, the great lord, attired as he was 
for a cérémonial visit, 15 did not disdain to descend to 16 the 25 
servants' hall, where Lulli was doing wonders 17 on his violin. 

1 omit this word. 2 of such; d'une si. 3 that his . . . provoked; 
qu'elle suffisait à première vue pour provoquer. 4 un instrumentiste 
assez remarquable. 5 did not . . . with ; ne put trouver grâce près de. 
6 she made him one of her; elle le fit descendre au rang de ses. ' ses 
naïves saillies. 8 à. 9 place after the nonti. 10 omit ' that was ' 
and 'a child of.' n coming . . . to the Duchesse de M.; qui venait 
un jour en visite chez la duchesse de A/. l - qui donnait. 13 in the 
servants' hall; où se trouvait l'office. u mérite, m. 15 tout paré 
qu'il était pour une visite d'étiquette. 1G jusqu'à. 17 singular. 



114 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

The unexpected visit of the count to 1 the Duchesse de 
Montpensier, changed suddenly the fortunes 2 of Lulli. The 
noble visitor spoke in such glowing terms to Mademoiselle 
of the 3 scullion violinist that she desired 4 to hear him. As 
5 he had descended from the drawing-room to the kitchen, 
so 5 now 5 he reascended from the kitchen to 6 the drawing- 
room. A caprice had condemned him to an obscure posi- 
tion, his precocious talent brought him out of it. 7 He had 
been reduced to having for audience only 8 the valets of the 
io house, yet 5 he deserved 9 to be appreciated by the most 
brilliant assembly. 

The Duchesse de Montpensier gave 9 a concert, which 
was 9 the occasion of a véritable triumph for Lulli. 

The king organized 10 for him the company 11 of the 
15 petits violons de la chambre; and this company, 11 of whom 
Lulli was the leader, acquired 12 a European réputation. 

Hère ends the childhood of Lulli. His skill 13 as a 5 per- 
former had drawn him from obscurity, his genius as a 5 com- 
poser has rendered him forever celebrated. He is justly 
20 regarded 14 as the real creator of the opéra in France. He 
was 9 overwhelmed with glory and riches. The king con- 
ferred nobility upon him; 15 and Molière, who was a judge 
of wits, greatly enjoyed the original conversation of 16 Lulli, 
who was 9 one of his intimate friends. 

1 chez. 2 singular. 3 spoke in . . . of; fit à Mademoiselle un si 
grand éloge du. 4 celle-ci voulut. 5 omit this word. 6 dans. " brought 
him out of it; Ven fit sortir. 8 on Pavait réduit à n'avoir pour 
auditeurs que. 9 past definite. 10 créa. n troupe, f. 12 eut. 

"^•savoir, m. 14 on le regarde avec justice. 15 conferred . . . him; 
V anoblit. 16 was a judge . . . conversation; qui se connaissait en 
hommes d'esprit, faisait le plus grand cas des saillies originales de. 



MORE ADVANCED PROSE COMPOSITION. I 1 $\ 

5. LA MARE-AU-DIABLE. 

(By George Sand.) 

La Mare-au- Diable is a little masterpiece, destined to 
live 1 as long as the French language. 

Germain, the handsome ploughman, 2 a widower with three 
children, at the âge of twenty-eight, must marry again for 
reasons of necessity. 3 " Père Maurice," his fathe'r-in-law, 2 
ad vises this 4 by ail kinds of sensible and practical 5 words, 
and Germain, who still mourns his first wife, consents 
although with 6 regret. "Père Maurice" has already some 
one in view; it is a rather rich widow, 2 who lives 7 some 
leagues from there, and who is said to be 8 a good match. As 10 
it is not a question of a love marriage, but of an arrangement 
between mature and serious persons, one interview, accord- 
ing to "Père Maurice," will suffice to décide everything. 9 
"To-morrow is Saturday," he says to Germain ; "you 10 will 
start about two o'clock in 11 the afternoon, you 10 will be down 15 
there by 7 night ; the moon is full just now, 12 the roads are 
good, and it is a ride of only three leagues." 13 

Ail the interest and action of the novel centre in this 
journey. At first, Germain 2 was to take the trip alone, 
mounted on his good mare, "la Grise." But an old neigh- 20 
bor, "la Guillette," profits by 11 the occasion to intrust to 
Germain her daughter, " la petite Marie," who has just 
been hired 14 as a shepherdess quite near the place where 
Germain is going. 2 Marie seems only a child, yet she is 
going on sixteen. 15 She mounts behind 16 on "la Grise," 25 

1 qui vivra. 2 reverse the order, thus : ' the handsome ploughman, 
Germain.' 3 par nécessité, par raison. * P y engage. 5 positives. 6 s'y 
rend, bien qu'à. ~ à. 8 use the active voice, thus : ' that one says to be.' 
9 pour toitt èclaircir. 10 use singular form. n de. vl grande dans ce 
moment-ci. 13 it is . . . leagues; il n'y a pas plus de trois lieues de pays. 
14 qui vient de s'engager. 16 sur ses seize ans. 16 behind; en croupe. 



Il6 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

and both start off, 1 Germain dreaming of his dead wife 2 
more than of his future one, 1 and Marie weeping at 3 leav- 
ing her mother and home. 4 

After the first moments of silence, Germain 5 begins to chat 
5 with " petite Marie." She knows the 6 motive of his journey. 
He speaks to her of his children, of Pierre who ran away 
angry, 7 bêcause his father would not take him along. 

But suddenly, the mare shies. She has seen something in 
the ditch. It is Pierre, who has gone ahead, and who, while 

io waiting for his father to pass, 8 has fallen asleep. Germain 
scolds-, the little fellow 1 coaxes his father and implores him 
to take him along. " Petite Marie " arranges everything, 
thinks of everything. " La Grise " is strong 9 and can very 
well carry three persons, two of whom 5 weigh so little. 

15 Pierre shall ride in front and Marie 10 behind. One feels 
that this simple child bears within her ail the qualities of 
nature that make of the thoughtful woman u the providence 
of the home. 

Meanwhile, little incidents corne up. " Petit Pierre " is 

20 hungry ; they must 12 stop and take a light repast. Peasants 
do not eat quickly; they 13 lose an hour, it is growing late, 
and they still hâve the great woods to cross. 14 A dense fog 
rises with the night. They 13 miss the road and they 13 are in 
the heart of the forest. They 13 roam around the awful 15 

25 Devil's Pool (it is thus that the country people call it 5 ) and, 
after many efforts to 16 get away from it, they 13 are always led 

1 omit this word. 2 dead wife; défunte, f. 3 de. 4 le pays. 5 reverse 
the order. 6 est au fait du. ' angry; en boudant. 8 while . . . to 
pass; en attendant son père au passage. 9 solide. 10 shall ride in front 
and Marie ; sera devant, comme Marie est ... . n which make . . . 
woman; qui font que la femme prudente est. ^falloir, followed by 
the infinitive. 13 on. 14 it is growing . . . to cross; on est en retard, 
et il reste encore à traverser les grands bois. 15 cette maudite. 16 maint 
effort pour. 



MORE ADVANCED PROSE COMPOSITION. II7 

back to it as by a spell. They décide to 1 stop and camp. 
Hère, in two chapters entitled "Under the Great Oaks " 
and "Evening Prayer," we 2 hâve a séries of exquisite and 
délicate scènes, which hâve not their equal nor 3 their model 
in any idyl, classic or modem. 5 

Germain, like ail men, even the most robust and valiant, 
is impatient by 4 nature ; " petite Marie," like ail women, 
when they are good, is patience itself. 5 She makes a bed 
for the child, lights a 6 fire with dried branches, and opposes 
her 7 good humor to bad luck. Germain, in the 8 présence 10 
of this merit which he had never suspected, ponders. 9 His 
ideas begin to take a certain turn. "What!" he says to 
himself, " I am going very far to look for a woman whom I 
do not know, who is said to be rich, who is proud without 
doubt, who will think that she does 10 me a 8 great honor by 15 
marrying me with my three children ; and hère 11 I hâve 
close to me a child, simple, poor, but rich in 4 the gifts of 
God, in 4 natural qualities and virtues, and who would be a 
treasure in my house and in my heart." 

Meanwhile, nature speaks ; Germain is hungry. They 2 20 
detach a partridge from a certain présent of game which he 
was carrying to his intended. It is again Marie who super- 
intends 12 this improvised feast. "'Petite Marie,' the man 
who marries 13 thee will be no 14 fool!" Such is the idea 
which is born irresistibly in the mind of Germain, on seeing 25 
her so discreét, so industrious. Marie continues to occupy 

1 on prend le parti de. 2 on. 3 n'ont letir pendant ni. 4 de. 5 même. 
6 du. "' la. 8 omit thisword. 9 s'étonner. 1} the object of croire, penser, 
and their synonyms, is often an infinitive, while the object of thèse verbs in 
English is usually expressed by the full clause; thus : 'will think that she 
does me ' is translated croira me faire. u voilà que. 12 qui est l'inten- 
dante de. 13 use the future of épouser ; this verb is the one commonly 
used to translate ' marry ' as a transitive verb ; ' to marry,' in the sensé of 
'to get married,' is translated by se marier. 14 ne sera pas un. 



Il8 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

herself with " petit Pierre ; " she calms his fears, 1 she 
amuses him, and Germain cannot help remarking : " There 
is no one like thee to 2 talk to children." The child says 3 
his prayer, which Marie prompts him word by word; 4 his 
5 eyes close already. But his ideas become confused, and, 
vaguely mixing ail that he has seen and heard during the 
evening, he says : " Father, if you 5 want to give me another 
mother, I want it to be 6 'petite Marie' ! " The little angel 
of innocence expresses thus the idea which has been only 

io vague and floating until now in the mind of Germain. From 
that moment, he perceives that "petite Marie," of whom he 
had never thought as beautiful, 7 is sweeter 8 than a wild 
rose, and he goes over every détail of the 9 graceful portrait, 
concluding thus : 10 "She is 11 cheerful, she is 11 good, 11 indus- 

15 trious, 11 loving, and 11 clever. 12 I do not see what one could 
wish for 13 better." 

As soon as the day dawns, 14 Germain proposes to Marie 
to continue 15 their journey. The young girl then offers 16 to 
conduct his child to the farm, in order to wash his pretty 

20 face and clean his clothes, before presenting him to his new 
mother. The latter is already provided with 13 three suitors. 
Her vanity and coquetry finish disgusting 17 Germain with 13 a 
marriage which has never pleased him. He withdraws from 
the ranks of her lovers, and goes to the farm to get his boy. 

25 There 18 he learns, to his great surprise, that the young girl 
and Pierre hâve already gone away. " Petite Marie," on 

1 le rassure dans ses terreurs. 2 pour. 3 fait. 4 which . . . by 
word; que lui souffle mot à mot la petite Marie. 5 use singular form. 
6 je veux que ce soit la. 7 as beautiful; pour sa beauté. 8 plus fraîche. 
9 goes over . . . of the; il se détaille le. 10 concluding thus; en con- 
cluant. n c'est'; elle would be the usual subject, but ce, cela, or even ça, is 
also used, though rarely, in speaking familiarly of children or young people; 
ail adjectives hère agrée in the masculine. 12 drôle. 13 de. 14 as soon 
. . . dawns; quand le jour est venu. 15 achever. 16 this verb must 
be preceded by lui. 17 achèvent de dégoûter. 18 arrivé là. 



MORE ADVANCED PROSE COMPOSITION. I IO, 

arriving at the house of the farmer who had hired her as a 
shepherdess, had run 1 a serious danger on the part of this 
brutal man. She had run away 1 frightened, taking little 
Pierre with her, and she meets Germain in time to hâve 
him protect and avenge her. 2 The farmer is punished, and 5 
the three return 3 to their village. 

Germain tries to forget his adventure by burying himself 
in his 4 work, but he becomes so sad and so absent-minded 
that everybody remarks it. He dares not confess to his 
father-in-law that he is in love with Marie, who is too poor 10 
and too young to be his wife. But he thinks always of her ; 
and, at last, he falls into such sadness that his mother-in-law 
questions him and learns his secret. She promises to obtain 
the consent of her husband to this marriage. . But Germain 
does not know if Marie will want to marry a man older than 15 
she. At last, authorized by his father to go to see the young 
girl and speak to her, he betakes himself to the poor cottage 
of "la Mère Guillette." Marie is alone by the fireside, and 
so absorbed in her thoughts 5 that she does not hear Germain 
corne. 6 The scène which passes between them is as natural 20 
and as beautiful as ail the others, and "petit Pierre" reap- 
pears, as in ail the critical situations of the novel. He is 
the mediator, and, as it were, 7 the bond between the first 
wife and the one who will be the second. Germain lifts him 
up in his arms ; and, putting him in those of his betrothed, 25 
he says : " Hère, Marie, you hâve made more than one 
fellow happy by 8 loving me!'' 

1 past indefînite. 2 meets . . . avenge her; retrouve à temps Ger- 
main pour la protéger et la venger. 3 tous les trois s'en retournent. 
4 en se replongeant dans le. 5 so . . . thoughls; si pensive. ti n'entend 
pas venir Germain. 7 as it were; comme. 8 he says . . . happy by; 
tiens, Marie, lui dit-il, tîi as fait plus d y un heureux en. 



120 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

6. THE SILENT ACADEMY: A TALE OF THE ORIENT. 1 

There was at Amadan a celebrated academy, whose first 
statute was couched in 2 thèse terms : "The Academicians 
shall think much, write little, and talk as little as possible." 3 
It was called the Silent Academy, and there was not a real 
5 savant in ail Persia who was not ambitious to 4 be adraitted 
into it. Doctor Zeb, author of an excellent little book, 
learned from his remote 5 province that there was a vacancy 
in 6 the Silent Academy. He départs at once, arrives at 
Amadan; and, presenting himself at the door of the hall 

io where the Academicians are assembled, he begs the porter 
to hand the following note to the président : 7 " Doctor Zeb 
humbly asks to receive the vacancy." 8 The porter at once 
performed his 9 errand, but the doctor and his note arrived 10 
too late; the place was 10 already filled. The président, 

15 charged with the duty of announcing 11 this sad news to the 
doctor, could hardly make up his mind to do it, 12 and did 
not know in what way to do it. 13 After having reflected a 
moment, he had a large bowl filled with water, 14 but so per- 
fectly 15 filled that another drop would hâve made the liquid 

20 overflow; 16 then, he signed to the porter to introduce 17 the 
candidate. He appeared with that simple and modest look 
which almost always accompanies real merit. The président 
arose ; and, without uttering a word, he pointed with a dis- 

1 conte oriental. 2 était conçu en. 3 talk as . . . possible; ne parle- 
ront que le moins qu'il sera possible. 4 there was . . . ambitious to ; il 
n'était point en Perse de vrai savant qui n'eût V ambition de. 5 his re- 
mote; au fond de sa. 6 qu'il vaquait une place dans. 7 turn : ' to hand 
to the président this note.' 8 to receive the vacancy; la place vacante. 
9 s'acquitta . . . de la. 10 imperfect. n with . . . announcing; d'an- 
noncer. 12 could . . . to do it; ne pouvait presque s'y résoudre. 13 in 
what . . . it; comment s'y prendre. u he had . . . water; il fit remplir 
d'eau une grande coupe. 15 bien. 16 would hâve . . . overflow; eût fait 
déborder la liqueur. 17 signed . . . introduce; fit signe qu'on introduisît. 



MORE ADVANCED PROSE COMPOSITION. 121 

appointed look to 1 the symbolical bowl so exactly filled. 
The doctor understood that there was no place left in 2 the 
Academy; but, without losing courage, he endeavored to 
make the Assembly understand 3 that a supernumerary Acad- 
emician could do no harm. 4 Seeing a rose leaf at his feet, 5 
he picked it up 5 and laid it so delicately on the surface of 
the water, that not a single drop escaped from it. 6 At this 
ingenious answer, everybody applauded ; the rules were set 
aside 7 for that day, and the doctor was admitted 8 by accla- 
mation. 10 

7. CHATEAUBRIAND. 

In 1791, Chateaubriand explored North America as a 9 
poet and as an 9 artist, not at ail as a 9 geographer and 9 trav- 
eller. He buried himself in the forests of Upper Canada, 
lived with the Indian tribes, intoxicated with the majesty of 
that magnificent country. 10 He brought back from this 15 
extraordinary voyage admirable sketches, which were soon 
to appear under the titles of u Atala, Les Natchez, René. A 
newspaper happening to fall into 12 his hands, informed him 
of the progress 13 of the Révolution, and 14 tore him away from 
the New World. He embarked in haste, landed in France 20 
about the middle of 1792, and joined 15 the ranks of the 
" Emigrés " of Coblentz. Wounded at the siège of Thion- 
ville, he was left for dead at the edge 16 of a wood. Saved 
almost by miracle, weak, without resources, he succeeded in 

1 pointed . . . look to; lui montra d'un air affligé. 2 there was 
... in; qu'il n'y avait plus de place à. 3 endeavored . . . understand; 
songeait à faire comprendre. i could . . . harm; n'y dérangerait rien. 
5 turn : ' he secs at his feet a rose leaf, he picks it up.' c qu'il n'en échappe 
pas une seule goutte. 7 were set aside ; on laissa dormir les règles. 
8 reçu. 9 as a; en. 10 cette nature grandiose. n which . . . titles 
of ; d'où bientôt devaient se dégage r les créations d' . . . des . . . de. 
12 happening . . . into; tombé entre. 13 en /' instruisant de la ma relie. 
14 omit this word. 16 joined; alla se jeter dans. 16 at the edge; au coin. 



122 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

crossing over to 1 England, where he lived 2 for a few years 
in indigence and solitude. 

Gifted with an incredible power for work, 3 he earned 4 
his bread during the day with translations 5 for publishers, 
5 and spent 4 his 6 nights in 7 writing his Essai sur les Révo- 
lutions. 

In 1801, Chateaubriand brought out 8 his graceful Indian 9 
idyl of Atala, a 10 poetic 9 picture ofthe loves of two young sav- 
ages, a 10 composition full of ravishing 9 descriptions, of inex- 

10 pressible charm, of exquisite sentiment, 11 and of a dazzling 
brilliancy of style. 12 Its 6 success was 2 immense, and the 
name of Chateaubriand, hardly known the day before, 13 was 2 
henceforth popularized in the whole of Europe. In 1826, 
there 10 appeared an édition of his works. It brought him 14 

15 500,000 francs. But neither the enormous 9 sums which he 
received 2 for his works, nor his pensions, nor the gifts 15 of 
Charles X. ever sufficed for 16 his sumptuous 9 tastes and his 
prodigality, and he was 2 constantly tormented by money 
cares. 17 

20 He also gave to the public some essays on English 9 liter- 
ature, and a literal 9 translation, in prose, of Milton's "Para- 
dise Lost." 

Chateaubriand was 2 the loyal 9 friend of the celebrated 
Madame Récamier, who had 4 for him an admiration which 

25 resembled worship. 18 They had met 19 at the deathbed of 
Madame de Staël. In speaking of this friendship, he writes : 

1 in crossing over to; à passer en. 2 past definite. 3 with . . . for 
work; d'une puissance de labeur incroyable. 4 imperfect. 5 des tra- 
vaux de traduction. 6 use definite article. 7 à. 8 fit paraître. 9 place 
after the word modified. 10 omit this word. n turn : ' of a charm 
{grâce, f.) inexpressible, of a sentiment exquisite.' 12 dazzling . . . 
style; d'utz coloris éblouissant. 13 hardly . . . before; la veille encore 
à peine connu. 14 il en obtint. 15 les générosités. 16 ever . . . for; 
ne suffirent jamais à. 17 des nécessités d'argent. 18 ressemblait à un 
culte. 19 faire connaissance. 



MORE ADVANCED PROSE COMPOSITION. 123 

" Agitated by thèse political occupations and disgusted by 
the ingratitude of courts, peace 1 of the heart awaited 2 me 
in the depth of this retreat (/' 'Aôbaye-au-Bois) , as the cool- 
ness 3 of the woods after a 4 burning 5 plain." Until the 
end of his life, he reigned 6 without a 7 rival in this salon of 5 
VAbbaye-au-Bois, the meeting place of most of the 8 con- 
temporary 5 celebrities. 

Chateaubriand died on the fourth of July, 1848, in the 
midst of the storms of a new 5 révolution. According to 9 the 
wish that he had expressed, his remains were placed 10 in a 10 
tomb erected upon 11 an island near Saint-Malo. 

It is there that he rests 12 in a tomb, 13 whose simplicity is 
not without majesty. 14 A stone without a 7 name, a cross ; 
behind, 15 Saint-Malo ; in front, the océan and the sky ; 
yonder, beyond the horizon where one's gaze loses itself. 16 15 
America. Ail around him, 7 the sound of the waves, 17 which 
seems still to feed 18 and to lull " the sadness of his soûl and 
the eternal melancholy of his thought." 

The most salient 5 qualities of Chateaubriand are bril- 
liancy 19 of style, wealth of imagination, sensibility, passion, 20 
éloquence, coloring, descriptive 5 power, 20 and fecundity. 
Although 7 admirably gifted in poetic qualities, 21 he was 
never successful 22 in poetry. 

1 placidité, f. 2 imperfect. 3 le frais. 4 au sortir d 'une. 5 place 
after the noun. 6 trôna. 7 omit this word. 8 the meeting . . . of 
the; où se sont rencontrés la plupart des. 9 suivant. 10 ont été déposés. 
11 in a tomb erected upon; dans une tombe élevée sur. 12 reposer. 
13 sépulture, f. u faste, m. 15 par derrière. 16 where . . . itself; où 
le regard s' enfo7ice. 17 le bruit du flot. 18 still to feed; entretenir encore. 
19 éclat, m.; use definite article before ail thèse nouns. 20 puissance, f. 
21 in poetic qualities ; sous le rapport poétique. 22 turn : ' he has, never- 
theless, never succeeded {réussir) . . ..' 



IDIOMATIC PROSE COMPOSITION. 



1. LITERARY NOTES ON SOME AUTHORS OF THE 
SEVENTEENTH CENTURY. 

a. Corneille. 

Youth of Corneille. — Pierre Corneille, by a rare combi- 
nation of qualities, raised dramatic art to such a height that 
no one has ever excelled him. 1 He was born at Rouen, in 
1606. He studied law to comply to his parents' wishes. 2 
5 A singular chance gave rise to the poetic genius of the 
young lawyer. A friend having taken him to the house of 
a young lady with whom he was in love, to make him a 
judge of his good taste, Corneille was so thoroughly con- 
vinced, 3 that he soon became 4 the rival of his friend. The 

10 adyenture appeared so comical to him, that, without know- 
ing any rules of dramatic composition, 5 he put it in the form 
of a 6 comedy. He called his play Mélite, from the name of 
the young lady, and went to offer it modestly to some poor 
actors in 7 Paris, whose fortune it made. 

15 Corneille and his Brother. — Thomas Corneille, brother 
of the great Corneille, was born in Rouen in 1625. It is 
probable that the successes of his brother early turned his 
attention to 8 the stage; moreover, he possessed genuine 
and natural talent, and a great faculty for work. 9 It is 

1 n'a pu le dépasser. 2 pour ne pas déplaire à ses parents. 3 add 
' of it. ' 4 ne tarda pas à devenir. 5 aucune règle de théâtre. 6 in 
the form of a; en. "'de. 8 vers. 9 turn : ' he had a true talent 
natural and a great faculty for (facilité, f., de) work.' 

124 



IDIOMATIC PROSE COMPOSITION. 125 

interesting to know what close unity existed between his 
brother and himself. 1 As they had inarried two sisters, 
they made but one 2 household ; and it was only after 
twenty-five years of life in common, that the idea occurred 
to them to divide 3 the property, which, it is true, was not 5 
very considérable. 4 

It is related that the two poets mutually aided each other 
in the composition of their works. When one of them had 
trouble in finding a rhyme, he would open a trap door 
made 5 in the floor, and appeal 6 to the other, who was work- 10 
ing below. Thomas Corneille had a prodigious faculty for 7 
versification. His memory was not less astonishing. He 
did not write his tragédies ; he composed them in his mind, 
learned them by heart, then recited them from beginning to 
end. 8 Once accepted, he wrote them to give them to the 15 
actors. The best known of his tragédies is entitled, "The 
Earl of Essex." 

External Appearance of Corneille. — This great man was 
of a simple and even commonplace appearance. 9 His con- 
versation was heavy and lacking in charm 10 and vigor. Mar- 20 
ville states that the first time he saw him, he took him for a 
merchant of Rouen. On this subject, Corneille describes 
himself thus 11 : — 

" J'ai la plume féconde et la bouche stérile, 
Et l'on peut rarement m'écouter sans ennui 25 

Que quand je me produis par la bouche d'autrui." 

But elsewhere, in defending himself from the attacks of the 
Hôtel de Rambouillet, he says : — 

1 lui. 2 ayant épousé les . . . ils formaient le même. 3 que les 
familles eurent Vidée de partager. 4 turn: ' which was (imperfeci) not, 
it is true, considérable.' 5 pratiquée. G la demandait. ' une facilité 
prodigieuse de. 8 d'un bout à l'autre. ° turn : 'had au appearance 
{extérieur, m.) simple and . . ..' 10 lacking in charm; sans agréments. 
11 on this . . . thus; lui-même s'apprécie ainsi sous ce rapport. 



126 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

"Et mes vers en tous lieux, sont mes seuls partisans; 
Par leur seule beauté, ma plume est estimée, 
Je ne dois qu'à moi seul toute ma renommée." 

Thèse same critics, to whom Corneille had read Polyeucte, 

5 at the Hôtel de Rambouillet, feared 1 that a woman {Pau- 
line) who loved at once her husband and her lover, would 
not interest 2 any one; 3 and it was precisely this, which 4 
made 1 the success of the play. Polyeucte is the master- 
piece of Corneille, the play in which he has best succeeded 

io in combining 5 the pathetic with 6 the sublime. 

Corneille as a 7 Writer of Comedy. — Corneille also had 
the honor of producing 8 Le Menteur, the best play which 
had yet appeared 2 upon 9 the stage, and Molière did not 
hesitate 1 to recognize the worth of this pièce. "When Le 

x5 Menteur appeared," he said 10 to Boileau, "I had a great 
désire to write, but I was uncertain of what I would write ; 
my ideas were hazy : this work settled thern. 11 Without Le 
Menteur, I should doubtless hâve written some romantic 
plays, 12 but I should never hâve written Le Misanthrope y 

20 " Embrace me," said Boileau to him, " this confession 
is worth the best of comédies." 13 

Characteristics of Corneille. — The most salient features 
of Corneille's genius are the energy, nobleness, and loftiness 
of his 14 thoughts, power 15 of conception, the incomparable 

25 vigor with which he créâtes 16 and develops his subjects, the 
abundance and variety of his dramatic erïects, the moral 
beauty of his 14 characters, manly éloquence of expression, 

1 past defmite. 2 tell why this verb must be put in the subjunctive. 
3 replace by pas. 4 this, which; ce qui. 5 the play . . . combining; 
où il a su le mieux allier. G et. 7 as a; comme. 8 le mérite de donner. 
9 à. 10 after a direct quotation, the subject should follow the predicate. 
11 vint les fixer. V2 f aurais fait, sans doute, quelques pièces d'intrigues. 
13 voilà un aveu qui vaut la meilleure comédie. 14 des. 15 la puis- 
sance. 16 féconder. 



IDIOMATIC PROSE COMPOSITION. 127 

and that admirable faculty of rising to the sublime, naturally 
and without effort, at one bound, and sometimes by a single 
one of those expressions 1 which wring from the spectator 
cries of enthusiasm, and tears of admiration. 

Commentary of Sainte-Beuve. — "His heroines, his ado- 5 
râbles furies, almost ail 2 resemble one another; their love is 
subtle, complex, and cornes from the head rather 2 than the 
heart. One feels that Corneille did not know women well. 3 
In a word, Corneille, a pure but incomplète genius, with his 
great qualifies 4 and his faults, reminds me of those great 10 
trees whose trunks are bare, rugged, sad,.and uniform, and 
whose summits only, are adorned with branches and sombre 
verdure." 5 

Last Days of Corneille. — The success 6 of Racine sad- 
dened the old âge of Corneille, and pecuniary troubles 7 15 
darkened his last days. It is well known 8 that Corneille 
received 12 a pension of two thousand francs, which ceased 
being paid to him at the death of Colbert. In the last 
months of his life, illness exhausted his resources. Boileau, 
having been informed of his cruel situation, hastened 9 to 20 
Versailles and offered the king the sacrifice of his own pen- 
sion. " I cannot without shame," he said to Madame de 
Montespan, " receive a pension from the king, whilst a man 
like Corneille is deprived of one." 10 Louis XIV. hastened to 
send a hundred louis to the illustrious patient. Two days 25 
later, 11 Corneille expired 12 at the âge of seventy-eight. 



1 mot, m. 2 place immediately after the verb. 3 connaissait peu .... 

4 a pure . . . qualities; génie pur, incomplet avec ses hautes parties. 

5 turn : ' trees, bare, rugged, sad, and uniform by the trunk, and adorned 
with sombre verdure only at their summit.' ° plural. " embarras, m. 
8 on sait. 9 having been . . . hastened; informé de sa position cruelle, 
courut. 10 en serait privé. n après. 1 - imperfect. 



128 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

b. Molière. 

"Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme." — Durin g the présentation 
of the Bourgeois Gentilhomme, played for the first time in 
the Château de Chambord, the inscrutableness of the king 
kept the courtiers from applauding. The poet's enemies 
5 triumphed 1 over this silence, which they interpreted 2 unfa- 
vorably, and Molière vvaited 1 with anxiety for the second 
performance, hoping that the king would finally déclare 
himself. And, 3 sure enough, after having heard the pièce a 
second time, he sent for him and said to him : " I did not 

io speak to you of your play the first day, because I was afraid 4 
of being captivated by the manner in 5 which it had been 
presented ; but truly, Molière, you hâve written nothing yet 6 
which has so greatly entertained me." 7 

Generosity of Molière. — Molière enjoyed 2 an income of 

15 30,000 or 8 40,000 livres, a very great fortune for those 
times. He spent 2 a great part of it in liberalities. 9 It was 10 
he who advised young Racine to write u for the stage ; he 
gave him a hundred louis after he had composed 12 his first 
tragedy. It was 10 also 13 Molière who trained 1 the celebrated 

20 actor, Baron. Molière had noticed him in a troupe of 
children who were playing 14 in Paris. He took 1 him to his 
house and treated x him like a son. 

One day, Baron came to him to say 15 that a poor come- 
dian from the 3 province was asking for a little help 16 to go tô 

1 past definite. 2 imperfect. 3 omit this word. 4 past indefinite. ° de. 
6 vous n'avez oicore rien fait. 7 has ... me; m'ait plus diverti. s à. 
9 singular. 10 présent. n travailler. 12 when no interval of time is sup- 
posed to hâve elapsed between the occurrence of two actions in the past, the 
earlier action is described by the past anterior; the later, by the past definite. 
Ex. : il lui donna cent louis après qu'il eut composé ; note that the past ante- 
rior is almost always introduced by such words as des que, aussitôt que, lors- 
que, quand, après que, etc. 1S encore. 14 add la comédie. 15 annoncer. 
18 un léger secours. 



IDIOMATIC PROSE COMPOSITION. I2Q, 

join his troupe. "How much must I give him?'" asked 
Molière. "Four pistoles will be quite 1 sufficient," replied 
Baron. "Give him four pistoles from 2 me; but hère are 
twenty more 3 that I shall give him from 2 you. I want him 
to know that it is to you that he owes the service I am 5 
doing him." 

The Supper at 4 Auteuil. — The usual society of Molière 
was composed 5 of Boileau, 4 La Fontaine, 4 Racine, 4 the musi- 
cian Lulli, 4 the painter Mignard, and 4 Chapelle. They were 
in the habit of meeting from time to time at Auteuil, at 10 
Boileau's house. 

One evening, Chapelle did the honors of the wine cellar 
so well, that ail the guests became intoxicated. The wine 
had the effect of making them ail extremely low spirited. 6 
One of them happened to quote this maxim of an ancient 15 
poet : 7 " The first happiness of man is not to hâve been 
born at ail ; 8 and the second, is to die." The company, but 
a moment since so gay, immediately formed the resolution to 
hâve an end of 9 life. They rose, 10 embraced one another and 
started. On the way, Molière, who was less intoxicated than n 20 
the others, remarked 12 that such a noble deed should not be 10 
hidden by the darkness 13 of the night, and that it deserved 
to be performed 14 in broad daylight. They stopped, 10 and 
exclaimed as they looked at one another, 15 " He is right ! " 
The following day changed their ideas, and they thought it 25 
was wise to 16 bear a little longer 17 the miseries of life. 

1 bien. 2 pour. 3 en voilà vingt autres. 4 de. 5 reflexive form. 
6 had the . . . spirited; les jeta dans la morale la plus lugubre. 7 omit 
this vvord. 8 happiness . . . at ail; bonheur est de ne point naître. 

9 immediately . . . end of; prend aussitôt le parti d'eu finir avec. 

10 put this and following verbs in the présent. n who was. . . than; 
moins pris que. 12 remarked; leur représente cependant. 13 hidden 
by the darkness; ensevelie dans les ténèbres. u faire. 15 exclaimed . . . 
another; se disent en se regardant. I0 thought it was wise to; jugèrent 
à propos de, 1T a little longer; encore. 



I30 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

Bon Mot of the Prince de Condé. — After a performance 
of Le Misanthrope, Boileau was congratulating Molière on 
this admirable masterpiece. "You will see something much 
finer yet," 1 said his friend to him. He was thinking of 2 
5 Tartufe, which is regarded as one of the most perfect works 
of the great poet. This comedy raised against Molière a 
perfect storm. 3 A vicar in 4 Paris went so far as to say 5 in 
a pamphlet that so dangerous a raan should be burned. 6 
The king was surprised at this indignation ; and, in a con- 

10 versation which he had with the Prince de Condé, he men- 
tioned a certain 7 play in which God was insulted, and which 
had, nevertheless, been tolerated. " Sire," answered the 
prince, " in that play, God only is insulted, 8 whilst Molière 
attacks 9 men." 

15 Molière' s Comments on Corneille. 10 — One day, while Mo- 
lière was dressing, two wits came in and spoke with great 
eulogy of a tragedy of Corneille, played the day before for 
the first time. Molière listened 11 to them without saying a 
word. 12 "Well, gentlemen," he said to them when he was 

20 dressed, " you believe then that Corneille is the author of 
what you heard ? Learn that there is a little sprite that has 
taken a fancy to him. 13 When he sees that Corneille is 
sitting down at his desk to bite his finger-nails, and attempt 
to write 14 a few verses, then the little sprite goes up to him 15 

25 and dictâtes to him four, eight, ten, sometimes even 10 twenty 
verses at a time, which are above everything that a man can 
do. After which, the little sprite goes away 17 a few steps, say- 

1 something much finer yet; bien autre chose. 2 voulait parler du. 
3 raised . . . storm; souleva contre Molière une violente tempête. 4 de. 
5 so far as to say; jusqu'à dire. 6 that . . . burned; qu'il fallait brûler 
un homnie aussi dangereux. 7 mentioned a certain; il lui fit observer telle. 
8 on ri offense que Dieu. 9 s'attaquer à. 10 turn : ' Molière on Corneille.' 

11 imperfect. 12 sans mot dire. 13 qui Pa pris en affection. 14 faire. 
15 goes . . . him; s'approche. 16 quelquefois même jusqu'à. 17 se retirer. 



IDIOMATIC PROSE COMPOSITION. 131 

ing : l Let us see how the poor fellow is going to get on by 
himself ! ' 1 Then, Corneille writes the following ten, twenty, 
thirty verses, 2 vvhich are entirely commonplace, and some- 
times even bad. 3 The next day, the same game begins again 
betvveen the sprite and Corneille. Take care, gentlemen, not 5 
to confound the tvvo authors ; one is a man, the other is more 
than a man." 

c. Boileau. 

Boileau Despréaux was born at Paris in 1636. He 
made himself 4 celebrated by his Satires, his Epîtres, and 
his 5 Art poétique. In his Satires, Boileau had 6 two ob- 10 
jects : to make war upon 7 bad poets and to sanction 
legitimate réputations. He successively attacked ail fash- 
ionable foibles, and covered with ridicule ail the versifiers 
that showed neither taste nor talent. 8 

Boileau had made himself known 9 early at court by his 15 
works. He was forty-seven years old, when he was received 
at the French Academy. The king having asked him one 
day if he made part of that illustrious body, he 10 answered : 10 
"Sire, I do not; 11 I am not worthy of it." "You shall 
be," 12 replied the king; "Iwishit." The Academy having 20 
elected La Fontaine, the king refused to sanction this élec- 
tion. Some time after, the Academy admitted 13 Boileau. 
" It is a good choice," said Louis XIV. ; " everybody will 
approve ; 14 now, you may appoint La Fontaine." 

Louis XIV. alvvays treated 15 him with great 16 considéra- 25 

1 the poor . . . himself; ce vilain va faire tout seul. 2 les dix, 
vingt . . . de suite. 3 où il rûy a rien que de très commun, où même 
il y a souvent du mauvais. 4 se rendre. 5 use derinite article. 6 se 
proposa. 7 à. 8 that showed neither . . . talent; sans goût et sans 
talent. 9 in French construction, when two verbs corne close together 
anc] the first is not an auxiliary, the second is always an infinitive. 10 omit 
this word. n tum : ' I am not of it.' Xl verb must be preceded by en. 
13 recevoir. 14 applaudir. 15 past dehnite. 10 beaucoup de. 



132 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

tion, and he consultée! 1 him as an infallible judge in mat- 

ters of taste. The critic sometimes expressed 1 his way 2 of 

thinking, with a frankness which bordered upon 3 bluntness. 

The king asked 1 him, one day, what authors had best suc- 
5 ceeded in comedy. " I know of 4 only one," he replied, 

" and that is Molière. Ail the others hâve written 5 only 

farces, like those wretched 6 plays of Scarron." 

One day, Louis XIV. asked 7 his opinion about some 

verses which he had amused himself by 8 writing. 5 "Sire," 
10 cleverly replied Boileau, "nothing 9 is impossible to your 

Majesty. You 10 hâve desired to write 5 poor 11 verses, and 

you hâve succeeded admirably." 12 

Boileau, so inflexible in matters of taste and so pitiless 

toward poor 11 works, was 1 kind and gentle in his 13 private 

15 life, and his conversation, as he 14 says himself, " had 1 neither 
nails nor claws." 15 Madame de Sévigné nsed to say that 
he was 1 " tender in prose and cruel in verse." Several inci- 
dents 16 attest the generosity of his heart. Patru, the creator 
of forensic éloquence, having fallen into the greatest need, 

20 saw himself reduced to selling his fine 17 library. Boileau 
learned that he was going to sell 18 it for a rather modest 
sum ; 19 he immediately offered him a third more for it, 20 
paid it, and laid down as a 21 condition that Patru should 
keep his books until his death. 

25 Boileau died at the âge of seventy-five ( 1 7 1 1 ) , and was 
buried in 8 the Sainte-Chapelle. 

1 imperfect. 2 façon, f. 3 bordered upon; tenait de la. 4 omit 
this word. 5 faire. 6 vilaines. 7 verb must be preceded by lui. 
8 à. 9 both négatives précède the verb. 10 elle ; to agrée with 
majesté. n mauvais. 12 you . . . admirably; elle y a parfaitement 
réussi. 13 use definite article. u insert le. 15 reverse the order. 

16 trait, m. 17 riche. 18 donner. 19 une somme assez modique. 20 he 
. . . for it; il lui en offrit aussitôt un tiers de plus. 21 laid down 
as a; mit pour. 



IDIOMATIC PROSE COMPOSITION. 133 

d. La Fontaine. 

Youth of La Fontaine. — Jean de La Fontaine was boni 
in 162 1 at Château-Thierry, where his father was inspector 
of the rivers and forests. 1 His éducation was rather neg- 
lected, and nothing in his youth 2 revealed what he was to 
be one day. At home, he was remarkable only for 3 his 5 
indolence, uselessness, and a keen love of 4 pleasure. 5 His 
father tried to tear him away from his laziness and excesses, 
by 6 giving tip his office to him, and 6 marrying him to 7 a 
young lady of great merit, witty, amiable, and graceful. 
But La Fontaine manifested 8 the same nonchalance in his 10 
new position, 2 and accustomed himself to living as if he had 
neither office nor wife. If he visited his old trees and his 
streams, it was doubtless only to enjoy the pleasure 5 of a 
solitary walk or rêverie. 

La Fontaine and his Son. — La Fontaine gradually 2 sep- 15 
arated himself from 9 his family, and at the end of a few 
years, left 10 his wife and son without divorce suit or 11 scan- 
dai. He even 2 finished, they say, by forgetting that he was 
married. One day, at 12 an entertainment, 2 he met a young 
man whose distinguished manners delighted 13 him from the 20 
first. As he was warmly praising him, some one said to 
him : "Why, he is your son !" 14 "Ah, indeed, I am very 
glad of it," he replied coldly. 

Rabelais was the favorite author of La Fontaine ; he had 
for him a boundless admiration, and when he wished to 25 

1 maître des eaux et forêts. 2 place directly after the verb; this note 
may refer either to adverbs or adverbial phrases, when their place in the 
sentence is not the same in both languages. 3 à la maison paternelle, 
il ne se fit remarquer que par. 4 penchant (m.) pour. ° plural. 6 eu. 
7 avec. 8 apporter. 9 s -1 éloigner de. l0 se séparer de. n replace by sans. 
12 dans. 13 plaire (à). 14 comme il en faisait l'éloge : " C'est votre fils," lui 
dit-on. Observe that in French, words that serve to introduce a quotation, 
instead of preceding it, are often found after it, or Connecting parts of it. 



134 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

express his approbation in the most emphatic manner, 1 he 
would say : " It is as 2 beautiful as Rabelais ! " 

Absence of Mind 3 of La Fontaine. — Boileau and Racine 
tried to reconcile La Fontaine to 4 his wife, and persuaded 
5 him to make a trip to Château-Thierry with 5 this object. 6 
He went off with 5 this laudable intention; but not flnding 7 
his wife, he went to see a friend with whom he spent the 
night joyously, and le,ft the next day, pleased with his jour- 
ney, and not remembering that he had had any other 

io object in coming than that of 8 diverting himself. 

After the publication of the Fables, Louis XIV. once 
more 2 bestowed his favors upon the poet, whose pension 
had been suspended, on account of his attachment to the 
fallen minister, Fouquet. The king even 6 permitted La 

15 Fontaine to offer him his book in person. 6 The poet went 
to Versailles to présent it to the king, recited his speech 
very well, 6 and forgot only one thing, namely, to 9 bring his 
Fables. The king, nevertheless, 6 received him kindly and 
presented him with a purse full of gold. Hardly had he 

20 returned home, 10 than 2 the poet perceived that he had lost 
his purse. It was found 11 under the cushion of the carriage 
that had brought him back. 

Madame de La Sablière often 6 reproved him for his ab- 
sence of mind, 3 which bordered sometimes upon rudeness. 

25 A rich financier had invited him to dinner, in the hope 
that he would amuse his guests. La Fontaine ate and 
kept 12 silence. As the dinner dragged on, he got tired and 
rose from the 2 table, under the 2 pretext of going to the 
Academy. He was made to observe 13 that it was not yet 

1 de la manière la plus expressive. 2 omit; this note may refer either 
to single words or phrases. 3 distractions. 4 avec. 5 dans. 6 see page 
133, footnote 2. 7 tnrn : ' not having met.' 8 any other object in coming 
than that of; un autre but que celui de. 9 namely, to; ce fut de. 10 had 
he . . . home; de retour chez lui. n on la retrouva. 12 insert le. 13 on 
lui fit observer. 



IDIOMATIC PROSE COMPOSITION. 135 

time. " Well," said he, " I will take the longest way ; " and 
he went out. One is not surprised that Madame de La 
Sablière often said to him : " Truly, my dear La Fontaine, 
you would be very stupid, if you were not so clever." 1 

La Fontaine's Friends. — Among the friends and pro- 5 
tectors of La Fontaine, we must include Turenne, Condé, 
the Prince de Conti, and the Prince de Vendôme, with 
whom he lived upon terms of 2 an amiable familiarity. 
Some ladies of the court treated him with extrême kind- 
ness; 3 for instance, 4 the Duchesse de Bouillon, Madame de 
Se vigne, Madame de La Fayette, Madame de La Sablière, 
and Madame d'Hervart. 

Madame de La Sablière gave 10 him for more than tvventy 
years his board and lodging, 5 and provided 10 for 6 ail his 
needs. A remark of this lady's 7 shows upon what a 15 
familiar footing La Fontaine lived in her house. One 
day that she had dismissed ail her servants, she said : 8 
"I hâve sent away ail my household; 9 I hâve kept only 
my dog, my cat, and La Fontaine." 

Anecdote about Baruch. — The private life of La Fon- 20 
taine was 10 scandalous, and Racine tried 10 in vain to exert 
over him a salutary influence. One day, when 11 he had 
taken him to church, he gave 10 him the Bible to entertain 
him. La Fontaine fell 10 upon the book of the prophet Ba- 
ruch, and he was filled with admiration for him. 12 " This 25 
Baruch was a great genius; 13 who was he?" he asked his 
friend. The next day, he went about repeating 14 in the 

x n'aviez pas tant d'esprit. ' 2 upon terms of; dans. 8 l'accueillirent 

avec une extrême bienveillance. 4 omit ' for instance. ' 6 le vivre et le 
couvert. 6 à. ~ un mot de cette dame. 8 see page 133, footnote 14. 
9 tout mon monde. 10 past definite. 11 que. 12 he was . . . him; en 
fut ravi d'admiration. 13 détail un beau génie que Baruch; note this 
inverted form of expression, which is more emphatk than the logical order 
would be. 14 allait répétant. 



I36 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

street to every person of his acquaintance whom 1 he 1 met i 1 
" Hâve you read Baruch? He was a great genius." 

It was during his sojourn at the house of Madame de 
La Sablière that La Fontaine composed the greater part 
5 of his Fables. He was in the habit of reading ail his 
verses to her before publishing the m, or showing them 
even to his friends. One day, he sent a pièce of verse to 
Racine and wrote to him : 2 " Above ail, 2 do not show 
them to any one, for Madame de La Sablière has not yet 

10 seen them." 

The Duchesse de Bouillon, in calling La Fontaine her 
"fablier," seemed to imply that he had produced fables 
as a tree produces fruit. 3 Madame de Sévigné used to 
say of La Fontaine's volume 1 of * fables : " It is a basket of 

15 cherries ; one wishes to pick out the finest, and the basket 
is emptied. 4 

Fouquet, Protector of La Fontaine. — Fouquet, who had 
declared himself the protector of artists and men of letters, 
conceived a friendship for La Fontaine, attached him to his 

20 person, and gave him 5 a pension of a^housand livres, on 
condition that he would acknowledge the receipt of it, 6 
every quarter, by a pièce of verse, a l ballad or madrigal. 

From that time, the poet took up his résidence in Paris, 
where he became intimate 7 with Boileau, Racine, and Mo- 

25 lière. Racine, especially, though eighteen years younger 
than he, 8 loved him and was loved by him. The absence of 
mind 9 and the naïveté of La Fontaine enlivened the meet- 
ings at 10 Auteuil. They 11 called him "le bonhomme" and 
laughed sometimes at his expense. 12 " Let us not make fun 

1 omit this word. 2 surtout, lui écrivait-il. 3 names of fruit trees 
generally end in ier. 4 reste vide. 5 conceived . . . gave him; prit 
La Fontaine en amitié, se V attacha et lui fit. 6 that he . . . of it; 
qu'il en acquitterait. "' se lia intimement. 8 quoique moins âgé que 
lui de . . . . 9 plural. 10 de. n on. 12 à ses dépens. 



IDIOMATIC PROSE COMPOSITION. 137 

of the 'bonhomme,' he will live longer than we, perhaps," 1 
said Molière, vvho ahvays 1 took his part. 2 

Epitaph, — composed by La Fontaine himself during 3 
the time of his worldly life : — 

" Jean s'en alla comme il était venu, 5 

Mangeant son fonds avec son revenu, 
Croyant trésor chose peu nécessaire. 
Quant à son temps, bien sut le dispenser : 
Deux parts en fit, dont il voulait passer 
L'une à dormir et l'autre à ne rien faire." 10 

e. Racine. 

Voltaire's Opinion of Racine. 4 — Jean Racine is the most 
accomplished poet of the French language as regards 5 the 
harmony, purity, and charm of his verse. 6 When some one 
asked Voltaire to write a commentary of 7 Racine, as he had 
done for 8 Corneille, he ansvvered : "I hâve none to make ; 15 
what I should hâve to do, would be to put 9 at the bottom 
of every page : beautiful, harmonious, admirable, pathetic, 
sublime ! " Upon rereading Mithridates, Voltaire said of 
Racine : " This is 10 the poet of the universe who has best 
understood 11 the human heart. The 1 ' 2 more one reads Ra- 20 
cine, the 12 more one discovers in him 13 a unique talent, set 
off by ail the delicacies of art. If there is anything on 
earth that approaches 14 perfection, it is he." On 15 the 
subject of the admirable tragedy of Athalie, Voltaire ex- 
claimed: 16 "What style! What poetry ! What a man 25 
was 17 this Jean Racine ! How he goes straight to the 

1 see page 133, footnote 2. 2 parti, m. 8 dans. 4 Racine com- 
menté par Voltaire. 5 as regards; pour. 6 plural. " sur. 8 tum : 
'as he of them had made one on.' 9 to do . . . put; à dire, ce serait 
de //lettre. 10 voilà. n connaître. 12 omit this word. 13 translate ' in 
him ' by lui and place before the verb. u sur terre quelque chose qui ap- 
proche de la. 15 à. 16 imperfect. 17 replace by que. 



I38 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

heart ! I am tempted to throw everything I hâve written 
into the fire, when I reread his works." 1 

Racine's Answer to the Prince de Condé. — The attrac- 
tions of the court, which he had not ceased frequenting, 
5 although he had retired 2 from the world, did not equal 
the joy that he felt 3 at being in the bosom of his family. 4 
As he was returning from Versailles one day, 5 a son of the 
great Condé came up 6 to him to say that they were expect- 
ing him at dinner. " I shall not hâve the honor of going 

10 there," he answered ; "it is more than a week since 7 I 
hâve seen my wife and children, who are looking forward 
to eating 8 with me to-day 5 a very fine carp. I cannot 
excuse myself from dining with them." 

Phèdre. — This tragedy was written after a sort of chal- 

15 lenge. One day, in a drawing-room, 5 Racine insisted that 
the suffering 9 of a guilty person could, 10 if 6 treated with 
talent, excite a deeper compassion than that of a virtuous 
person. In this tragedy, he tried to interest the spectators 
in 11 the fate of Phèdre, victim of a guilty and unconquer- 

20 able passion. 

After having produced Phèdre, Racine, though 6 still 
young and in the zénith of 12 his literary glory, suddenly 13 
gave up the stage and ceased, not only writing for the 
stage, 14 but even attending the performance of his trage- 

25 dies. 

Racine's Family. — Racine married Mademoiselle de 
Romanet, daughter of a Comptroller of the Finances. 
She was a pious and sensible woman, 15 but without any 

1 everything . . . works; au feu tout ce que j'ai fait quand je le relis. 
2 quoiqu'il se fût retiré. 3 éprouvait. 4 at being . . . family; d'être au 
milieu des siens. 5 see page 133, footnote 2. 6 omit this word. 7 il y a 
plus de huit jours que. 8 who are . . . eating; qui se font une fête de 
manger. 9 malheur, m. 10 imperfect. n à. 12 in the zénith of; dans 
toute. 13 brusquement, 14 scène, i. 15 personne, f. 



IDIOMATIC PROSE COMPOSITION. I39 

appréciation 1 of literature. She had never set foot in 
a théâtre, and knew the plays of her husband only by 2 
name. Racine had seven children; his one fear was to 3 
hâve a poet among them. 4 He used to tell his eldest son 
that success 5 does not make a 6 poet happy, and he con- 5 
fessed that the least criticism had pained him more than 
the greatest praises had given him 7 pleasure. " Do not 
believe," he used to say, "that it is 8 my verses which 
procure me the attention 9 of the great. 5 Corneille writes 
verses a hundred times more beautiful than mine, and yet 10 
nobody looks at him. Instead of wearying the people of 
society with conversations about my works, I converse with 
them 10 of things which please them. My idea 11 with them is 
not to make them feel 12 that I hâve wit, but to 2 inform 13 
them that they hâve. Thus, when you see Monsieur le duc 15 
de Bourbon spending whole hours with me, you would be 
surprised, if you were présent, to notice that he often goes 
out without my having said four words. 14 But little by little, 
I set him to talking, 15 and he leaves my house, 16 still more 
satisfied with himself 17 than with me." 20 

/. Madame de Sévigné. 

Early 18 Education of Madame de Sévigné. — Marie de 
Rabutin-Chantal, marquise de Sévigné, was born in Paris 
in 1626, of one of the most ancient families of Burgundy. 
She was only five years old when she lost her father, that 
famous duellist, who, on Easter day 1624, left 19 the church 25 

1 notion, f. 2 de. 3 his one . . . to; toute sa crainte était d\ 4 a poet 
among them; un fils poète. 5 plural. • 6 le. " ne lui avaient fait de. 
8 que ce soient. 9 nî 1 attirent les caresses. 10 with conversations . . . with 
them; du récit de mes ouvrages, je les entretiens. n talent, m. 12 de 
leur faire sentir. 13 apprendre {a). 14 de voir que souvent il en sort 
sans que f aie dit quatre paroles. 15 le mets en humeur de causer. 16 sort 
de chez moi. 17 lui. 18 première. l9 sortit de. 



140 EXERCISES JN COMPOSITION. 

right in the middle of 1 Mass, saying aloud that he was going 
to serve as a 2 second to the no 3 less famous duellist, de 
Bouteville. He was killed while 4 defending the island of 
Ré against the English. His wife survived him but a short 
5 time. An 12 orphan at the âge of six, Marie de Rabutin re- 
ceived a brilliant 5 éducation. She had for teachers Ménage 
and Chapelain, poor 6 poets, but fine scholars, 7 who taught her 
besides French, — Latin, Spanish, and Italian. The court 
of Anne of Austria still further polished 8 her mind. 
10 Marriage of Madame de Sévigné. — Presented very early 9 
at court, Marie de Rabutin was sought after for her wit, her 
great fortune, and the charm of a physiognomy which was 
gracious rather than beautiful. 10 Numerous suitors 11 pre- 
sented themselves. She married Henri de Sévigné, who, 

15 killed in a 12 duel, left her a 12 widow with two children, after 
seven years of marriage. This union had not been happy. 
Conrart used to say that there was this différence between 
Madame de Sévigné and her husband : 13 the latter esteemed 
his wife without being able to love her, whilst she loved him 

20 without being able to esteem him. It appears that the mar- 
quis used to say very frankly 14 to the marquise: "I think 
you would be very attractive to 15 another man, 12 but as 12 for 
me, I cannot love you." 1G 

After the death of her husband, she devoted herself to 

25 the éducation of her children. Many opportunities for a 
second marriage presented themselves, 17 and quite as large 
a number of admirers: 18 Turenne, the Prince de Conti, 
Fouquet, the Chevalier de Méré, down to her former pro- 

1 right in the middle of; au. beau milieu de la. 2 as a; & 3 non. 
4 se fit tuer en. 5 solide ; after the noun. 6 mauvais. 7 littérateurs 
érudits. 8 acheva de polir. 9 très jeune. 10 turn : ' charm {éclat, m.) 
of a physiognomy rather gracious than beautiful.' n parti, m. 12 omit. 
13 change colon to comma, and add que. 14 tout crû?nent. 15 pour. 

16 vous ne sauriez me plaire. 17 de se remarier s'' offrirent à elle, 
non moins grand nombre de soupirants. 



18 



nu 



IDIOMATIC PROSE COMPOSITION. I41 

fessor, Ménage ; none had any success. 1 The one of her 
lovers who had the most chance 2 of being well treated, was 
Bussy, her own cousin. He used to praise the tact with 
which she managed to discourage her lovers without making 
them angry. "You are the only woman in 3 the kingdom," 5 
he wrote to her, "who can 4 induce a lover to content him- 
self with friendship." 

Madame de Sévigné at Court. — After the departure of 
her daughter, Madame de Sévigné continued to live at the 
court, going from time to time to pass 5 a season at her 10 
estate, Les Rochers* in Brittany. She enjoyed herself 7 at 
Versailles, and the smallest attention from the v king over- 
whelmed her with satisfaction. 8 One evening, he danced 
with her ; she was so dazzled that, returning to her place, 
she said to her cousin : " It must be confessed 9 that we 15 
hâve a great king." " I should think so, 10 after what he has 
just 11 done," replied Bussy mischievously. 12 

The most intimate friends of Madame de Sévigné were 
Fouquet, Cardinal de Retz, and Monsieur and Madame de 
Pomponne. Many of her letters are written to her excellent 20 
uncle, the Abbé de Coulanges, who had brought her up and 
who left her his whole fortune. She calls him in her letters 
" le Bien-bon." 

Madame de Sévigné at Saint-Cyr. — On another occa- 
sion, she showed the intense 13 satisfaction which she felt at 14 25 
the least évidence of favor. She had corne to attend the 



1 ne réussit. 2 eut le plus de chance. 3 il n" 1 }' a que vous dans. 
4 explain the use of the subjunctive hère. 5 place immediately after 
allant. 6 dans sa terre des "Rochers." 7 se plaisait. 8 aise, f. 9 7/ 
faut avouer. 10 je le crois bien. n ' to hâve just,' followed by a past 
participle, and used to speak of an action that has just occurred, is 
rendered into French by venir de, followed by an infïnitive présent. 
12 turn : 'the mischievous Bussy.' 18 une autre fois encore, elle laissa 
percer toute la folle. 14 que lui causait. 



142 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

first performance of Esther at Saint-Cyr. "The king," she 
writes, " came toward our seats, and turning, 1 he addressed 
himself to me, and said : ' Madame, I am sure that you 
hâve been entertained.' Without surprise, I 2 answered : 

5 ' Sire, I am charmed ; what I feel is beyond words.' The 
king said to me: 'Racine has a great deal of talent.' 3 
'Sire, he has indeed; 4 but, in truth, thèse young ladies 
hâve a great deal too : they enter into the subject as if they 
had never done anything else.' 5 He said to me : ' Ah, as 

10 to that, you are certainly right.' 6 And then his Majesty 
went away, leaving 7 me the object of envy." 

Opinion of Sainte-Beuve. — "The 8 more one thinks of 
it," says Sainte-Beuve, "the 8 more easily can one explain 9 
her maternai affection, this love which for her represented 

15 ail others. This rich, strong nature had never had any pas- 
sion properly so-called. 10 An 8 orphan at the âge of six, she 
had never known 11 filial tenderness; she never speaks of 
her mother. Conjugal love had been 7 bitter to her. She 
rather fancied 12 her cousin Bussy, but she did not love 7 him 

20 with passion. Her daughter inherited 7 ail the savings of this 
heart so rich and so sensitive — a heart that 13 had said until 
that day : 'I am waiting.' Madame de Grignan was 7 the 
one 14 passion of her mother. It is to her correspondence 
with her daughter, after her departure for Provence — a cor- 

25 respondence which lasted twenty-seven years — that she owes 
her glory." 

" If I could only live two hundred years," Madame de 
Sévigné used to say, " it seems to me that I should be a 
very admirable person." This wish for a long life, 15 which 

1 après avoir tourné. 2 moi, sans ?ri 'étonner, je. 3 bien de V esprit. 
4 turn : ' he of it has much.' 5 anything else; autre chose. G pour 
cela, il en est vrai. 7 past definite. 8 omit this word. 9 mieux on 
s'explique. 10 so-called; dite. n ne sentit point. 12 agréa un peu. 
13 a heart that; et qui. u unique. 15 ce souhait de longue durée. 



IDIOMATIC PROSE COMPOSITION. I43 

she formed with a view to the moral perfection which she 
desired to attain, finds itself realized for her raemory. The 
correspondence of Madame de Sévigné, like 1 Les Provin- 
ciales, Les Fables and Les Femmes Savantes, is 2 perfection 
in a given style. Her 3 charming mind could 4 put a pro- 5 
digious variety in the expression of a sentiment ever the 
same, and make the court, the city, the province, the entire 
world revolve 5 around her daughter. 

2. THE GENIUS OF BALZAC COMPARED WITH THAT 
OF GEORGE S AND. 

Balzac said one day to George Sand : " You paint man 
such as he ought to be ; I 6 take him such as he is. But 10 
believe me, we are both right. 7 Thèse two roads lead to 
the same goal. I too 7 love exceptional beings ; I am one 
of them. I need them' to bring out my commonplace 
characters. 9 and I never 7 sacrifice them without necessity. 
But thèse vulgar beings interest me more than they 10 interest 15 
you ; I enlarge them, I idealize them in the opposite sensé, 11 
in their ugliness or their stupidity. I give to their deform- 
ities frightful or grotesque proportions. You cannot do so. 12 
You do well not to 1 ' 3 wish to look at beings and things which 
would give you the nightmare. Idealize 14 the pretty and the 20 
beautiful : that is a woman's work." 15 

Balzac idealizes, but his point of departure is reality. 
He observes seven or eight misers, adds them up as it were, 
and créâtes 10 his Grandet. He concentrâtes in a single 

1 replace by est de même titre que. - replace by et ce titre, c'est la. 
3 ce. 4 a su. 5 make the court . . . revolve; faire pivoter la cour .... 
6 moi, je. ' place after the verb. 8 il m'en faut. 9 être, m. 10 when the 
comparison is one of inequality, as hère, ne must précède the second verb, 
if the first verb is affirmative.* n en sens inverse. u vous, vous ne sauriez 
pas. 13 de ne pas. 14 insert dans. 15 c'est un ouvrage de femme. w faire. 
* The récent decree allows the use or omission of ne in this case. 



144 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

being the characteristics 1 of several, and créâtes a type. 
Grandet is more complète, more consistent, more terrible, 
than any real 2 miser. This is true 3 of ail his principal 
characters. One cannot deny that it is fine, strong, pow- 

5 erful art. 4 Beings 5 thus created hâve life ; they move under 
our eyes ; one sees them, one cannot forget them. Balzac 
lived in their society, he saw them ; he was like a lion- 
tamer surrounded by wild beasts. 6 

The miser Grandet cannot say a word, make a gesture, 

io eat, go to bed, deal with his wife, his daughter, his servants, 
or 7 strangers, without showing what he is. Instead of saying 
vaguely : " This horrible passion had stifled within him ail the 
sentiments of nature," Balzac shows him at work, the 8 torturer 
of his wife, of his daughter. We behold the agony of thèse 

15 beings whom the miser tramples upon. 9 Not one fact is unim- 
portant ; every blow carries. One feels pity, terror, horror, 10 
an interest mingled with affright ; one feels that this dreadful 
machine will seize, absorb in its wheels and tear into shreds 
everything that approaches it. Molière's Harpagon is odious? 

20 but he is grotesque also, and he is vanquished. Grandet is 
awful, he makes one shudder, 11 and he dies buried in his gold. 
After him, there 8 is 8 gold, nothing but gold for his daughter ; 
the springs of the life of the heart are dried up in Eugénie 
Grandet ; the miser has killed her morally. He is like 12 those 

25 trees in whose shade 13 everything languishes and dies. 14 

Hère, Balzac is in his élément. He paints force, a unique 
force which is the whole of the man, 15 which one finds 16 

1 caractère, m. 2 réel, irr.; after the noun. 3 this is true; ainsi. 
4 turn : ' that this {cela) is fine, that this is strong, that this is of an art 
powerful {puissant)? 5 must be preceded by ces. 6 ses fauves. ' re- 
place by les. 8 omit this word. 9 we . . . tramples upon; on assiste à 
P agonie de ces êtres que piétine Pavare. 10 insert c'est. n donne h 
frisson. 12 he is like; tels. 13 à P ombre desquels. u repeat the sub- 
ject. 15 the . . . man; tout P homme. ^retrouver. 



IDIOMATIC PROSE COMPOSITION. I45 

everywhere in him. It is in 1 paintings of this kind — in 
the development of a single 2 passion — that Balzac is really 
great. 

At the end of his study on Balzac, Taine says : " With 
Shakespeare and Saint-Simon, Balzac is-the largest collection 5 
of documents that we hâve 3 upon human nature." One 
may add that Balzac has shown ail that the strongest nature 
can do, 4 when it is totally devoid of an 5 idéal ; and art, 
under .whatever form, cannot 6 do without it. 

Quite différent 7 is the method of George Sand. She 10 
does not seek to reproduce the real by completing it, nor 5 
to create 8 characters and 5 types. She is not of the family 
of 9 Shakespeare, of 9 Molière ; she belongs to ]0 that of 9 Rous- 
seau, of dreamers, of contemplators, and not 11 of observers ; 
to that of poets, and not 11 of psychologists, and still less of 15 
physiologists. Hardly does she describe the appearance 12 
of her characters. She has an idea, or she is possessed by a 
sentiment. She wishes to express, under an artistic form, 
this idea or this sentiment, its various aspects, the succes- 
sive phases of its development; and to do this 13 she créâtes 20 
personages, embodies in individuals 14 pure opérations of the 
mind. She has said : " One must create the characters for 
the sentiment that one wishes to describe, and not 11 the 
sentiment for the characters." Thèse are her System and 
her method; 15 they hâve their inconveniences and their ad- 25 
vantages. Are beings thus created, very real? 16 very life- 
like ? A human being, a man, a woman, of the nineteenth 

1 insert les. 2 unique; after the noun. 3 explain the use of the sub- 
junctive hère. 4 tout ce que peut la nature la plus forte. 5 omit this word. 
6 under . . . cannot; sous quelque forme que ce soit, ne saurait. ' tout 
autre. 8 faire. 9 des, although the proper noun retains its singular form. 
10 elle est de. n non. 1J cest à peine si elle indique l'extérieur. 13 to 
do this; pour cela. 14 en des êtres de. 15 voilà la méthode et le p>\\ 
16 turn : • thèse beings thus created, are they very real (bien réels)." 



I46 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 

century, are thèse 1 pure abstractions? Can they be reduced 
to express only 2 an idea, often even a mère aspiration? 
Thèse characters are often pure, floating, luminous shadows, 3 
which glide beneath 4 our eyes. 

5 Balzac makes a portrait, and wants to make it life-like. 5 
No détail is useless. The body, the face, the eyes, the nose, 
the costume, the locality, etc., everything must contribute 
to the truth, or rather to reality. George Sand does not see 
a model, but her idea, her aspiration, 6 despair, 6 doubt ; the 

10 character is accessory. It is she that makes him act and 
speak, or rather it is the idea that she wishes to express. 

Hère is another 7 characteristic détail. Balzac never for- 
ge ts his characters. He carries them everywhere with him, 
even in real 8 life, for 9 he has created them so laboriously ! 

15 George Sand forgets almost immediately ail that has corne 10 
from her pen. It often happens to her to reread her 
books without recognizing them. 11 The reason is, that 12 
events and characters, everything in her work, belongs to 
an 13 idéal, abstract world. Imagination, a flash of 13 sensi- 

20 bility, a 13 revery, hâve created 14 the work. But the state of 
the soûl changes ; new émotions, other ideas, other aspira- 
tions fill it. Immediately thèse light, aerial beings, which 
hover between earth and sky, vanish in a kind of fantastic 
mist. 15 One would like to retain them a moment, to keep 

25 them, 16 to recall them. But alas ! 17 the poet 18 who has cre- 
ated 14 them does not recognize them ! 

1 sont-ils de. 2 peut- on les réduire à n 'exprimer que. 3 turn : ' some 
shadows {ombres, f.) pure, floating, and luminous.' 4 à. 5 atteindre la res- 
semblance. 6 repeat son. . 7 hère is another; autre. 8 réel; after the 
noun. 9 omit this word. 10 sortir. n de se relire sans se reconnaître. 
12 c'est que. 13 use definite article. 14 donner naissance à. 15 turn : 
1 immediately vanish in a kind of mist fantastic, thèse beings light, aerial, 
which hover between sky and earth. 16 retain . . . keep them; les arrê- 
ter un instant, les fixer au passage. 17 quoi ! 18 add lui-même. 



VOCABULARY. 



Note. — This vocabulary is intended to contain ail the words that occur in 
the exercises on grammar and syntax, and in the sélections for translation, except 
the following classes : ist, personal (including refiexive) pronouns ; 2d, proper 
names (whose gender is not needed) that are exactly alike in the two languages ; 
3d, words that are translated in the footnotes. 

In many vocabularies, certain phrases or combinations reappear under dif- 
férent headings ; thus, the pupil finds the French for as much as or as soon as 
under as, and again under much or under soon. Also, in English compound 
verbs, like go up, corne in, begm again, etc., the French équivalents are given 
under go, corne, begin, and repeated under up, in, again. This plan has not 
been adopted in the following vocabulary, in which a large number of such 
combinations occur. Therefore, in ail phrases having a common introductory 
word, the student must look for the French meaning under the distinctive word 
in the group ; as, for instance, under much or soon in the examples given above. 

In combinations of verbs and prépositions, the French will be found under 
the verb only ; in compound nouns or other cases, préférence was given to the 
word that seemed the most important for grammatical or other reasons. 

After French verbs and adjectives that can be used with a dépendent infini- 
tive, will be found, in brackets, the préposition that serves as a connective, as 
"invite, inviter [à]," " happy, heureux [de] "; it should be remembered that 
thèse prépositions are to be used before an inft7iitive. If the verb takes an 
indirect object, the préposition à immediately follows it ; thus, " advise, con- 
seiller à [de]." In other cases of the use of prépositions after verbs and adjec- 
tives, the French préposition will be found enclosed in the ordinary marks of 
parenthesis, as, " congratuiate, féliciter (de) ," " astoimded, émerveillé (de) ." This 
is done only when the prépositions to be used differ in the two languages, or 
when they are required in French and not in English. 

Irregular French nouns, adjectives, and verbs are marked. French verbs 
whose auxiliary is être are preceded by a star, as, " arrive, * arriver " ; but refiex- 
ive verbs, which are always conjugated with être, are not marked. " Aspirate 
h " is indicated by a dagger before the letter, as, " hero, f héros." 

The following abbreviations are used : — 



adj. = adjective. 


irr. 


— irregular. 


adv. — adverb. 


m. 


= masculine. 


art. = article. 


n. 


= noun. 


conj. = conjunction. 


pi. 


= plural. 


de/. = definite. 


prep. 


= préposition 


dem. = démonstrative. 


pron. 


= pronoun. 


f. = féminine. 


rel. 


= relative. 


indef. = indefinite. 


sing. 


= singular. 


int. — interrogative. 


vb. 


= verb. 



148 



VOCABULARY. 



a, un, une. 

abandon, abandonner. 

able : be able, pouvoir \no prep.~\, 
irr. 

about (pi'ep.), vers ; sur (concern- 
ing). 

above (prep.), au-dessus de ; above 
ail, surtout. 

absence of mind, distraction, / 

absent, absent ; absent-minded, dis- 
trait. 

absorb, absorber. 

abstain, s'abstenir, irr. 

abstract, abstrait. 

abstraction, abstraction, /. 

absurd, absurde. 

abundance, abondance, / 

abuse (vu.), abuser (de). 

abuse (n.), abus, m. 

Academician, Académicien, m. 

Academy, Académie, / 

accept, accepter. 

accepted (adj.), approuvé. 

accession, avènement, m. 

accessory, accessoire. 

acclamation, acclamation, / 

accompany, accompagner. 

accomplished (adj.), accompli. 

according to, selon. 

account: on account of, à cause 
de. 

accuse, accuser. 



accustom, accoutumer ; to accustom 

one's self, s'accoutumer, 
accustomed (adj.), accoutumé [à]. 
acquaintance, connaissance, f. 
acquire, acquérir, irr. 
act, agir. 
action, action, /. 
actor, acteur, m., irr. 
add, ajouter ; to add up, additionner. 
address one's self, s'adresser. 
address (n.), adresse, / 
admirable, admirable. 
admirably, admirablement. 
admiration, admiration, / 
admire, admirer. 
admirer, admirateur, m., irr. 
admit, admettre, irr. 
adopt, adopter. 
adore, adorer. 
adorn, garnir (de). 
advance, avance, / 
advantage, bien, m.; avantage, ;;/. 
adventure, aventure, / 
adversary, adversaire, ;;/. 
adversity, adversité, / 
advice, avis, ;;/. ,• conseil, m. 
advise, conseiller à [de] ; engager 

[à]. 
aerial, aérien, irr. 
affair, affaire,/ 
affection, affection, / ,• maternai 

affection, amour de mère, m. 



149 



150 



VOCABULARY. 



affectionate, affectueux, irr. 

affirm, affirmer. 

affright, épouvante, / 

afraid: to be afraid, avoir peur, 

irr.; craindre, irr. 
Africa, Afrique, / 
after, après. 

afternoon, après-midi, m. or/ 
again, encore. 
against, contre. 

âge, âge, m.; old âge, vieillesse,/ 
agitate, agiter. 
agony, agonie,/ 
agreeable, agréable. 
agriculture, agriculture,/ 
ah, ah. 
aid, aider, 
air, air, m. 
alas, hélas. 

Alexander, Alexandre, 
ail (adj.*), tout, irr. 
ail (pron.), tout, tous, toute, toutes; 

ail = everything, tout. 
ail (adv.), tout, toute, toutes; not 

at ail, nullement. 
allow, permettre à [de], irr. 
ally, allié, m. 
almost, presque. 
alone, seul, 
aloud, tout f haut. 
already, déjà. 
also, aussi. 
although, bien que, subjunctive ; 

quoique, subjunctive. 
always, toujours. 

ambassador, ambassadeur, m., irr. 
ambiguous, ambigu, irr. 
ambition, ambition,/ 
America, Amérique, // North 

America, Amérique du nord ; 

South America, Amérique du 

sud. 
amiable, aimable. 



among, parmi. 

amuse, amuser ; to amuse one's 
self, s'amuser. 

an, un, une. 

ancestor, aïeul, ni., irr. ; ancêtre, m. 

ancient, ancien, irr.; the ancients, 
les anciens, m. pi. 

and, et. 

anecdote, anecdote,/ 

angel, ange, m. 

angry: to be or get angry, se 
fâcher; to make angry, fâcher. 

animal, animal, m., irr. 

annihilate, anéantir. 

another, un autre, une autre ; one 
another, se ; another = one more, 
de plus {after the noun). 

answer (vb.), répondre (à). 

answer (n.), réponse,/ 

antiquity, antiquité,/ 

anxiety, anxiété,/ 

any (adj.), de -f definite article; 
quelque (emphatic) ; with néga- 
tion, ne . . . pas de; aucun (em- 
phatic) ; any = every, ail, tout, 
toute; any = any kind of, quel- 
conque (after the noun). 

any (pron.), aucun, aucune (with 
négation); en (with négation). 

anybody, quelqu'un, m. ; with néga- 
tion, personne, m. ; not anybody, 
ne . . . personne. 

any one, quelqu'un, m.; zvith néga- 
tion, personne, m. 

anything, quelque chose, m. ; with 
négation, rien, m. ; not anything, 
ne . . . rien. 

apartment, appartement, m. 

apology, excuse,/ 

apostrophe, apostrophe,/ 

appear, paraître, irr. 

appearance, apparition,// external 
appearance, extérieur, m. 



VOCABULARY. 



151 



appetite, appétit, m. 
applaud, battre des mains, irr. ; ap- 
plaudir. 
apply, s'adresser; to apply one's 

self, s'appliquer, 
appoint, nommer. 
appreciate, apprécier, 
approach, approcher, 
approbation, approbation,/ 
April, avril. 
Arab, Arabe, m. 
architect, architecte, m. 
ardor, ardeur,/ 
arithmetic, arithmétique, / 
arm, bras, m. 
arrny, armée,/ 
around {prep.), autour de. 
arraign, traduire, irr. 
arrange, arranger. 
arrangement, arrangement, m. 
arrivai, arrivée,/ 
arrive, *arriver \_no prep.~\. 
art, art, m. 
artillery, artillerie,/ 
artisan, artisan, m. 
artist, artiste, m. 
artistic, artistique. 
as, comme ; as ... as, aussi . . . 

que; as it were, pour ainsi dire; 

as to or for, quant à; as well as, 

aussi bien que. 
ashamed (adj.), f honteux, irr.; to 

be ashamed, avoir f honte, irr, 
ashes, cendre,/ sing. 
Asia, Asie,/ 
ask, demander à [de], 
asleep : to fall asleep, s'endormir, 

irr. 
aspect, aspect, m. 
aspiration, aspiration,/ 
aspire, aspirer. 

assassin, assassin, m. ; massacreur, m. 
assembled, assemblé. 



assembly, assemblée,/ 

assist, assister. 

assure, assurer. 

assuredly, assurément. 

astonishing, étonnant. 

astounded, émerveillé (de). 

astrologer, astrologue, m. 

astronomy, astronomie,/ 

at, à. 

attached (ad/.), attaché. 

attachaient, attachement, m. 

attack (vb.), attaquer. 

attack (».), attaque,/ 

attain, atteindre (à), irr. 

attempt, tâcher [de]. 

attend, suivre, irr. Ça course) ; as- 
sister (à). 

attention, attention,/ 

attentive, attentif, irr. 

attest, attester. 

attitude, attitude,/ 

attract, attirer. 

attraction, agrément, m. 

attractive, agréable. 

audacity, audace,/ 

audience, auditeurs, m. pi. 

August, août. 

aunt, tante,/ 

Austria, Autriche,/ 

Austrian, autrichien, irr. 

author, auteur, m. 

authorize, autoriser [à]. 

avarice, avarice,/ 

avenge, venger ; to avenge one's 
self, se venger. 

avoid, fuir, irr. 

await, attendre. 

awake, éveiller {transitive) ; to 
awake, se réveiller ; s'éveiller 
(intransitive). 

awakened, réveillé. 

awakening (;/.), réveil, m. 

awful, sinistre. 



152 



VOCABULARY. 



bad, mauvais ; méchant ; it is too 
bad, c'est dommage, subjunctive. 

badly, mal. 

bag, sac, m. 

bail, bal, m.; balle,/ (sphère). 

ballad, ballade,/. 

band, bande,/ 

banter, railler. 

barbarian, barbare, m. 

bare, nu. 

basket, panier, m. 

battle, bataille,/ 

be, être, irr. ; to be to, devoir [no 
prep.'\, irr.; to be better, valoir 
mieux \_7to prep.~], irr., impersonal ; 
to be damp, faire humide \_no 
prep.~\, irr., impersonal ; to be 
proper, convenir, irr., impersonal ; 
it may be, il se peut, subjunctive. 

bear, porter ; to bear or bear with, 
supporter (endure'). 

bearing, démarche,/ 

beast, bête,/ 

beat, battre, irr. 

beautiful (adj.), beau [de], irr 

beautiful (n.), beau, m. 

beauty, beauté,/ 

because, parce que. 

become, * devenir, irr.; become 
again, * redevenir, irr. 

bed, lit, m. 

before (prep.), devant, denoting 
place ; avant, denoting tinte; be- 
fore infinitive, avant de. 

before (conj.), avant que. 

beg, prier [de]. 

beget, enfanter. 

begin, commencer [à] ; begin again, 
recommencer [à]. 

behave, se conduire, irr. 

behind, derrière. 

behold, assister (à). 

being (n.), être, m. 



believe, croire, irr. 

belong, appartenir, irr. 

beloved, bien-aimé. 

below, au-dessous ; hère below, ici- 
bas. 

beneath, au-dessous de. 

benumbed, engourdi (par). 

bequeath, léguer. 

besides, outre. 

besiege, assiéger. 

best (adj.), meilleur. 

best (adv.), le mieux. 

bestow upon, rendre (à). 

betake one's self, se rendre. 

bethink one's self, s'aviser. 

betray, trahir. 

betrothed, fiancé, m. 

better (adj.), meilleur. 

better (adv.), mieux. 

between, entre. 

beyond, au delà de; beyond words, 
au-dessus des paroles. 

Bible, Bible,/ 

big, gros, irr. 

bill, compte, m. 

bind, lier. 

bird, oiseau, m., irr. 

birth, naissance,/ 

bishop, évêque, m. 

bishopric, évêché, m. 

bite one's nails, se ronger les ongles. 

bitter, amer, irr. 

bitterly, amèrement. 

bitterness, amertume,/ 

blade, lame,/ 

bless, bénir. 

blessing (n.), bien, m. 

blind, aveugler. 

block, bloc, m. 

bloody, sanglant. 

blow, coup, m. 

blue (adj.), bleu. 

blue (n.), bleu, m. 



VOCABULARY. 



153 



bluntness, brusquerie, / 

boast, se vanter. 

boat, bateau, m., irr. ; canot, m. 

body, corps, m. 

bold, hardi. 

boit, verrou, m. 

bond, lien, m. 

book, livre, m. 

border upon, toucher (à). 

bore, ennuyer. 

born : to be born, * naître, irr. 

born, né. 

borrow, emprunter. 

both, l'un et l'autre ; tous deux, 
toutes deux. 

bottom : at the bottom, au bas. 

bound : at a bound, d'un élan. 

boundless, démesuré ; fou, irr. 

bouquet, bouquet, m. 

bourgeois, bourgeois, m. 

bowl, coupe,/ 

box, boîte, / 

boy, garçon, m.; errand boy, com- 
missionaire, m. 

branch, branche,/ 

brave, brave. 

bread, pain, m. ; loaf of bread, pain, 
m. 

break, casser. 

breathe, respirer. 

brevity, brièveté,/ 

brief, bref, irr. 

brigand, brigand, m. 

bright, spirituel, irr. 

brilliant, brillant. 

bring, apporter (a thing) ; bring, 
amener (a perso n) ; bring back, 
rapporter (a thing) ; bring back, 
ramener Ça person) ; bring out, 
faire ressortir, irr. ; bring up, 
élever. 

Brittany, Bretagne,/ 

broad, large. 



brother, frère, ;;/. 

brother-in-law, beau-frère, m. 

brusque, brusque. 

brutal, brutal, irr. 

budding, en bouton. 

build, bâtir ; construire, irr. 

bunch, botte, / 

burgher, bourgeois, m. 

Burgundy, Bourgogne,/ 

buried, plongé {figuratively). 

burn, brûler. 

burning (aa)'.), brûlant. 

bury, enterrer; to bury one's self, 

s'enfoncer. 
bush, buisson, m. 
but Çconj.), mais. 
but Çadv.), ne . . . que. 
buy, acheter. 
by, par; de Cafter expressions of 

émotions). 

cabbage, chou, m., irr. 

cake, gâteau, m., irr. 

call, appeler. 

calm, calme, m. 

camp, bivouaquer. 

campaign, campagne,/ 

can (= beable), pouvoir \_no prep.~\, 
irr. 

Canada : Upper Canada, fhaut Ca- 
nada, m. 

canal, canal, ///., irr. 

canary, serin, m. 

candidate, candidat, m. 

capable, capable. 

capital, capitale,/ 

caprice, caprice, m. 

capricious, capricieux, irr. 

captain, capitaine, m. 

captivate, captiver. 

captivated (adj.) t séduit. 

captivity, captivité, y: 

card, carte,/ 



154 



VOCABULARY. 



Cardinal, cardinal, m., irr. 

care, soin, m. 

carnival, carnaval, m. 

carp, carpe,/ 

carriage, voiture,/ 

carry, porter; carry off, remporter 

(pf a victor y). 
case: in case, en cas que, subjunc- 

tive ; au cas que, subjunctive. 
Castile, Castille, / 
castle, château, m. 
cat, chat, m. 
catch, prendre, irr. 
cathedral, cathédrale,/ 
Catholic, catholique; to become 

a Catholic, se faire catholique, 

irr. 
cause (vb.), causer. 
cause (n.), cause,/ 
cavalier, cavalier, m. 
cease, cesser [de]. 
ceasing: without ceasing, sans 

cesse. 
celebrated (adj.), célèbre. 
celebrity, célébrité,/ 
censor, censeur, m. 
cent, sou, m. 
centre (vb.), se passer, 
century, siècle, m. 
ceremony, cérémonie,/ 
certain, certain. 

certainly, sûrement; certainement. 
chain, chaîne,/ 
chair, chaire,/ (in a collège). 
challenge, défi, m. 
chance, f hasard, m. 
change, changer. 
chaos, chaos, m. 
chapter, chapitre, m. 
character, caractère, m. ; character, 

personnage, m. (in fiction) . 
characteristic (n.), caractéristique, 



characteristic (adj.), caractéris- 
tique. 

Charge, charger [de]. 

charity, charité,/ 

Charles the Bad, Charles le Mauvais. 

charm (vb.), charmer. 

charm («.)» charme, m. 

charmed (adj.), charmé (de). 

charming (adj.), charmant. 

chat, deviser. 

cheap, à bon marché. 

cheek, joue,/ 

cheerful, gai. 

cherry, cerise,/ 

chicken, poulet, m. 

chief, chef, m. 

child, enfant, m. or/ 

childhood, enfance,/ 

chimney, cheminée,/ 

choice, choix, m. 

choose, choisir. 

Christian, chrétien, irr. 

church, église,/ ■ 

churchmen, gens d'église, m. pi. 

Cicero, Cicéron. 

circumstance, circonstance,/ 

city, ville,/ 

civil, civil. 

civilized (adj.), civilisé. 

clad, vêtu (de). 

claim, réclamer. 

classic, antique. 

Claw, griffe,/ 

clean, nettoyer. 

clear, clair. 

clearness, clareté,/ 

clever, habile. 

cleverly, ingénieusement. 

climate, température,/ 

climb, grimper (à). 

clock : three o'clock, trois heures. 

close (vb.), fermer, transitive ; se 
fermer, intransitive. 



VÔCABULARY. 



155 



Close (adj.), intime ; close to, tout 
près de. 

cloth, drap, m. 

clothes, habits, m. pi. 

cloud, nuage, m. 

coal, charbon, m. 

coarse, grossier, irr. 

coat, habit, m. 

coax, câliner. 

coffee, café, ni. 

COld (adj.), froid. 

cold (n.), froid, m. 

COldly, froidement. 

collection, magasin, m. 

collège, collège, ni. 

colonel, colonel, m. 

COlor, couleur,/. 

coloring (n.), coloris, m^ 

combat, combat, m. 

combination, assemblage, m. 

COme, * venir [no prep.~\, irr. ; corne 
back, * revenir \no prep.~\, irr.; 
corne down, * descendre; corne 
home, * rentrer; corne in, * entrer 
chez; COme out, * sortir \jio 
prep.~\, irr.; come up, * survenir, 
irr. ; corne after or corne to get, 
* venir chercher, irr. 

comedian, comédien, m., irr. 

comedy, comédie,/ 

cornet, comète,/ 

comfort, consoler (de). 

comfortably, à l'aise. 

comical, plaisant. 

command (vu.), commander à [de]. 

command (u.), commandement, m. 

commander, commandant, ///. 

commentary, commentaire, m. 

commerce, commerce, m. 

common : in common, en commun. 

COmmonplace, commun; vulgaire. 

companion, compagnon, m. ; com- 
pagne,/ 



company, compagnie,/ 

comparable, comparable. 

comparé, comparer. 

compassion, compassion, / 

compassionate, compatissant. 

COmplain, se plaindre, irr. 

complète (»3.), compléter. 

complète (adj,'), complet, irr, 

completely, complètement. 

COmplex, combiné. 

compliment, compliment, m. 

compose, composer. 

composer, compositeur, m. 

composition, composition,/ 

comptroller, contrôleur, m. 

conceive, concevoir, irr. 

concentrate, réunir (en). 

conception, conception,/ 

concert, concert, m. 

conciliatory, conciliateur, irr. 

conclude, terminer. 

condemn, condamner. 

condemnation, condamnation, / 

condition, condition, / ,■ on condi- 
tion that, à condition que, sub- 
junctive. 

COnduct (vb.), conduire, irr.; to con- 
duct one's self, se conduire, irr. 

COnduct (n.), conduite,/ 

confess, avouer. 

confession, aveu, m. 

confidence, confiance,/ 

confound, confondre. 

confounded (adj.), confondu. 

confused, troublé ; to become con- 
fused, s'embrouiller. 

congratulate, féliciter (de). 

conjugal, conjugal, irr. 

conquer, subjuguer. 

conscience, conscience,/ 

consciousness, connaissance, / ,• to 
lose consciousness, perdre con- 
naissance. 



i 5 6 



VOCABULARY. 



consecrate, consacrer. 
consecrated (adj.), sacré (ofkings). 
consent. (vb.), consentir, irr. 
consent (n.), consentement, m. 
conséquence, conséquence,/ 
consider, considérer. 
considérable, considérable. 
considération, considération, / 
consist, se composer. 
consistent, logique. 
constable, connétable, m. 
constantly, constamment. 
consult, consulter. 
contain, renfermer. 
contemplate, contempler. 
contemplator, contemplateur, m. 
contemporary, contemporain. 
contempt, mépris, m. 
content one's self, se contenter 

(de), 
content (adj.), content. 
contents, contenu, m. sing. 
continue, continuer [de]. 
contrary, contraire. 
COntribute, concourir, irr. 
Convention, Convention,/. 
conversation, conversation,/ 
converse with, entretenir, irr, 
convince, convaincre, irr. 
coolness, fraîcheur,/ 
COpy, copier. 
coquetry, coquetterie, / 
coquette, coquette,/ 
coquettish, coquet, irr. 
coral, corail, m., irr. 
cordial, cordial, m. 
correct, corriger; to correct one's 

self, se corriger. 
correspondence, correspondance,/ 
corrupt, corrompre. 
Corsican, corse. 
cost, coûter. 
costume, costume, m. 



cottage, chaumière,/ 

cotton, coton, m. 

counsel, conseil, m. 

count (va.), compter. 

count (n.), comte, m. 

countess, comtesse,/ 

COuntry, patrie, / {native /and) ; 
campagne, / (ppposed to city) ; 
pays, m. 

courage, courage, m. 

course, cours, m. 

court, cour,/; the courts, les tribu- 
naux, m. pi.; court bow, révé- 
rence,/ 

courtier, courtisan, m. 

cousin, cousin, m. 

cover, couvrir (de), irr. 

covered (ad/.), couvert (de). 

COW, vache,/ 

cradle, berceau, m., irr. 

create, créer. 

Creator, créateur, m., irr. 

créature, créature,/ 

creep, ramper. 

crime, crime, m. 

critic, critique, m. 

critical, décisif, irr. 

criticism, critique,/ 

cross (vb.), franchir. 

cross (n.), croix,/ 

crown (vb.), couronner. 

crown (n.), couronne,/ 

cruel, cruel, irr. 

cry (vb.), s'écrier (exclaim). 

cry (n.), cri, m. 

cultivate, cultiver. 

cultivation, culture,/ 

cup, coupe,/ 

cure, guérir. 

curiously, curieusement. 

cushion, coussin, ?n. 

custom, usage, m. 

eut, coupure,/ 



VOCABULARY. 



157 



damage, dommage, m. 

damp, humide. 

dance, danser. 

danger, danger, m. 

dangerous, périlleux, irr.; dange- 
reux, irr. 

dare, oser [no prep.~\. 

darken, assombrir. 

daughter, fille,/ 

dauphin, dauphin, m. 

day, jour, r,i. (considered as a unit) ; 
journée, / jconsidered in ail ils 
parts) ; the day bef ore, la veille ; 
the next day, le lendemain ; 
one day after a, le lendemain 
d'un ; Easter Day, le jour de 
Pâques. 

daylight: in broad daylight, en 
plein jour. 

dazzle, éblouir. 

dead, mort. 

deal (vb.), entrer en rapports. 

deal : a good or a great deal, beau- 
coup (de). 

dear, cher, irr. 

death, mort,/. 

death-bed, lit de mort, m. 

deceased («.), défunt, m. 

deceitful, trompeur, irr. 

deceive, tromper. 

décide, décider. 

décision, décision,/ 

déclare, déclarer ; affirmer ; to dé- 
clare one's self, se déclarer. 

deed, action,/ 

deep, vif, irr. 

defeat {vb.), battre, irr. 

defeat (».), défaite,/ 

défend, défendre ; to défend one's 
self, se défendre. 

deformity, difformité,/ 

degenerate, dégénérer. 

dégrade, dégrader. 



delicacies, finesses, / pi. 
delicacy, finesse,/ 
délicate, délicat. 
delicately, délicatement. 
delicious, délicieux, irr. 
delighted (ad/.), enchanté (de). 
deliver, délivrer. 
delude : delude one's self about, se 

faire des illusions sur, irr. 
Demosthenes, Demosthènes. 
dense, épais, irr. 

deny, nier ; disconvenir (de), irr. 
départ, * partir, irr. 
departure, départ, m. 
dépend, dépendre (de) ; compter 

(sur). 
dépendent, dépendant. 
depress, attrister. 
depth, profondeur,/; in the depth 

of, au fond de. 
descend, * descendre. 
describe, décrire, irr. 
description, description,/ 
descriptive, descriptif, irr. 
deserve, mériter [de]. 
désire (vb.), désirer; to hâve a 

great désire, avoir envie de, irr. 
désire (».), désir, m. 
desk, bureau, m., irr. 
despair, désespoir, m. 
despise, mépriser. 
destined, destiné. 
destiny, destin, m.; destinée,/ 
destroy, détruire, irr. 
detach, détacher. 
détail, détail, m. 
develop, développer. 
development, développement, m. 
Devil's Pool, Mare-au-Diable,/ 
devoid, dépourvu. 
dévote, consacrer ; to dévote one's 

self, se livrer ; se consacrer. 
devour, dévorer. 



i 5 8 



VOCABULARY. 



devout : devout people, des dévots, 

m. pi. 
diamond, diamant, m. 
dictate, dicter. 
dictionary, dictionnaire, ni. 
die, * mourir, irr. 
différence, différence,/ 
différent, différent. 
difficult, difficile [à]. 
difficulty, difficulté,/ 
dignity, dignité,/ 
dine, dîner. 

dining room, salle à manger, / 
dinner, dîner, m. 
dint : by dint of, à force de. 
directly, tout à l'heure. 
disappear, disparaître, irr. 
discipline, discipliner. 
discontented : to be discontented, 

s'ennuyer. 
discourage, décourager. 
discourse, discours, m. 
discover, découvrir, irr. 
discreet, avisé. 
disdain, dédaigner [de]. 
disease, maladie,/ 
disguise (vb.), déguiser. 
disguise (n.), déguisement, m. 
disgust, dégoûter (de), 
dismiss, congédier, 
disposition, disposition,// an even 

disposition, l'humeur égale. 
dissipated (adj.), dissipé. 
distaff full, quenouillée, / 
distance, distance,/ 
distinguish, distinguer. 
distinguished (adj.), distingué. 
disturb, déranger. 
ditch, fossé, m. 
divert, divertir ; to divert one's 

self, se divertir. 
divide, diviser. 
divine, divin. 



Divinity, Divinité,/ 

divorce, divorce, m.; divorce suit, 

procès, m. 
do, faire, irr.; do, used as auxiliary, 

is not to be trajislated ; to do with- 

out, se passer de. 
docile, docile. 

doctor, médecin, m. ; docteur, m. 
document, document, m. 
dog, chien, m. 
door, porte,/ 
doorway, enfoncement, m. 
dotted, émaillé (de). 
doubt (vb.), douter. 
doubt (n.~), doute, m.; beyond 

doubt, hors de doute, 
doubtless, sans doute, 
down to, jusqu'à. 
dozen, douzaine,/ 
drag on, se prolonger. 
dramatic, dramatique. 
draw, tirer. 

drawing-room, salon, m. 
dread, redouter. 
dreadful, redoutable. 
dream (vb.), rêver. 
dream (n.), songe, m. 
dreamer, rêveur, m. 
dress one's self, s'habiller, 
dress (n.), robe,/ 
dressed (adj.), habillé. 
drink, boire, irr. 
drive, conduire, irr.; drive away 

from, chasser de. 
drop (vb.), * tomber. 
drop (n.), goutte,/ 
drown, étouffer. 
drum, tambour, m. 
dry (adj.), sec, irr. 
dry one's self, se sécher ; to dry 

up, tarir. 
Duchess, duchesse,/ 
due, dû. 



VOCABULARY. 



159 



duel, duel, m. 

duellist, duelliste, m. 

duke, duc, m. 

Duke of Savoy, duc de Savoie. 

during, pendant. 

duty, devoir, m. 

each, chaque ; each one, chacun, 
chacune ; each other, l'un, l'autre, 
l'une, l'autre ; se. 

ear, oreille,/ 

Earl, comte, m. 

early, de bonne heure ; so early, de 
si bonne heure. 

earn, gagner. 

earth, terre,/ 

easily, aisément. 

easy, facile [à] ; aisé [de]. 

eat, manger. 

édition, édition,/ 

educated : well educated, instruit. 

éducation, éducation,/ 

efface, effacer. 

effect, effet, m. 

effort, effort, m. 

Egypt, Egypte,/ 

Egyptian, Egyptien, irr. 

eight, fhuit. 

eighteen, dix-huit. 

eldest, aine. 

elect, élire, irr. 

élection, élection,/ 

élégance, élégance,/ 

élégant, élégant. 

élément, élément, ;;:. 

éléphant, éléphant, m. 

eleven, onze. 

Elizabeth, Elisabeth. 

éloquence, éloquence, / ,• forensic 
éloquence, éloquence du barreau. 

éloquent, éloquent. 

elsewhere), autre part. 

embark, s^embarquer. 



embody, incarner. 

embrace, embrasser. 

eminently, éminemment. 

émotion, émotion,/ 

emperor, empereur, m. 

emphatic, expressif, irr. 

employ, employer. 

empress, impératrice, / 

enamel, émail, m., irr. 

encamped (ad;.), campé. 

enchant, enchanter. 

encounter, rencontre,/ 

encourage, encourager. 

end (vb.), finir; terminer. 

end («.), bout, m. (extremity) ; fin, 
/ (termination) ; at the end, au 
bout. 

ended (adj.), terminé. 

endow, douer ; doter (an institu- 
tion}. 

endowed (adj.), doué (de) 

endure, supporter. 

enemy, ennemi, m. 

energy, énergie,/ 

engagement, engagement, m. 

England, Angleterre,/ 

English («.), Anglais, m. 

English (adj.), anglais. 

Englishman, Anglais, m. 

enjoy, jouir (de); to enjoy one's 
self, s'amuser. 

enlarge, grandir. 

enlighten, éclairer. 

enliven, égayer. 

enormous, énorme. 

enough, assez (de); assez (adv. of 
degree) ; sure enough, en effet. 

enrich one's self, s'enrichir. 

enter, * entrer (dans). 

entertain, distraire, irr. 

entertained (adj.), content. 

entertainment, compagnie,/ 

enthusiasm, enthousiasme, ///. 



i6o 



VOCABULARY. 



enticed, mené. 

entire, entier, irr. 

entirely, entièrement ; complète- 
ment. 

entitled, intitulé. 

entreat, supplier. 

entrust, confier. 

envious, envieux, irr. 

envy (vb.), envier. 

envy (n.), envie,/ 

epitaph, épitaphe,/. 

equal (vb.), égaler. 

equal (adj.), égal, irr. 

equipped, équipé. 

errand, commission,/ 

error, erreur,/ 

escapade, escapade,/ 

escape (vb.), échapper (à), transi- 
tive ; s'échapper, intransitive ; 
escape — to run away, se sauver. 

especially, surtout. 

essay, essai, m. 

establishment, établissement, m. 

esteem, estimer. 

eternal, éternel, irr. 

eulogy, éloges, m. pi. 

euphonious, sonore. 

Europe, Europe,/ 

European, Européen, irr. 

evasive, évasif, irr. 

even (adj.), même. 

even (adv.), même. 

evening, soir, m. 

event, événement, m. 

ever, jamais ; fore ver, à jamais ; 
without verb, toujours. 

every, chaque ; every = ail, tout, 
tous, toute, toutes; every even- 
ing, tous les soirs. 

everybody, tout le monde. 

every one, chacun. 

everything, tout, m. 

everywhere, partout. 



évidence, apparence,/ 

évident, évident. 

evil (n.), mal, irr. 

evil (adj.), mauvais. 

exactly, justement ; exactement. 

examine, examiner. 

excel, dépasser. 

excellent, excellent. 

excepted (adj.), excepté. 

exceptional, exceptionnel, irr. 

excesses, désordres, m. pi. 

excite, exciter. 

exclaim, s'écrier. 

excuse one's self, s'excuser [de]: 

se dispenser [de]. 
excuse (n.), excuse,/ 
exécution, exécution,/ 
executioner, bourreau, m., irr. 
exempt, exempt (de). 
exercise (vb.), exercer. 
exercise (n.), devoir, m. 
exert, exercer (sur). 
exhale, exhaler. 
exhaust, épuiser, 
exist, exister. 
existence, existence,/ 
expect, attendre. 
expédition, expédition,/ 
expense, dépense,/ 
expensive, coûteux, irr. 
expérience, éprouver. 
expire, expirer. 
explain, expliquer. 
exploit, exploit, m. 
explore, explorer. 
express, exprimer ; to express one'î 

self, s'exprimer. 
expression, expression,/ 
expressive, expressif, irr. 
exquisite, délicieux, irr. ; exquis. 
extraordinary, extraordinaire. 
extravagance, extravagance,/ 
extrême, extrême. 



VOCABULARY. 



161 



eye, œil, m., irr. 
eyebrow, sourcil, m. 

fable, fable,/. 

face, figure,// visage, m. 

facility, facilité,/ 

fact, fait, m. 

faculty, faculté,/ 

fade, se faner ; se flétrir. 

faded (adj.), fané. 

fail, manquer [de]. 

faith, foi,/ 

faithful, fidèle. 

fall, * tomber. 

fallen (ad/.), tombé. 

familiar, familier, irr.; familiar 

footing, pied de familiarité, m. 
familiarity, familiarité, / 
f amily, famille, / ; of good f amily, 

de bonne maison. 
famished (adj.), affamé. 
famous, fameux, irr. 
fanaticism, fanatisme, m. 
fantastic, fantastique. 
far, loin. 
far from (conj.), loin que, subjnnc- 

tive. 
farce, farce,/ 
farm, ferme,/ 
f armer, fermier, m. 
fascinating, entraînant. 
fashion, mode,/ 
fashionable, à la mode, 
fast, vite. 
fate, sort, m. 
father, père, m. 
father-in-law, beau-père, m. 
fatigue, fatigue,/ 
fault, défaut, m. (of character) ; 

faute, / (of conducf) . 
favor, faveur, / 

favorite, préféré, m. ; favori, m. 
fear (va.), craindre [de], irr. 



fear (n.), crainte,/ 

fear: for fear that, de peur que, 
subjnnctive. 

feast, festin, m. 

f eather, plume, / 

feature, trait, m. 

February, février. 

fecundity, fécondité,/ 

feel, sentir \_no prep.~\,irr.; se sentir, 
irr., intransitive ; ressentir, irr. 
(of émotions) ; éprouver (of émo- 
tions) . 

feign, feindre, irr. 

fellow-student, condisciple, m. 

fertile, fertile. 

fertilize, féconder. 

few, peu (de) ; a few, quelques. 

fickle, inconstant. 

field, champ, m. 

fifteen, quinze. 

fifty, cinquante. 

fight (vb.), se battre, irr.; com- 
battre, irr. ; livrer (a battle). 

fight (n.), bataille,/ 

figure, image,/ 

filial, filial, irr. 

fill, remplir (de). 

filled (adj.),. rempli (de). 

final, suprême. 

finally, enfin. 

finance, finance,/ 

financier, financier, m. 

find, trouver. 

fine, beau, irr. 

finish, finir. 

fire, feu, m., irr. 

firmness, fermeté,/ 

first (adj.), premier, irr. 

first (adv.), d'abord; at first, 
d'abord ; from the first, dès 
l'abord. 

fish, poisson, m. 

five, cinq. - 



IÔ2 



VOCABULARY. 



fix, fixer. 

flash, transport, m. 

flat, plat. 

flatter, flatter. 

flatterer, flatteur, m., irr. 

flattcry, flatterie,/ 

flexible, flexible. 

floating (adj.), flottant. 

floor, plancher, m. 

Florentine, Florentin, m. 

flower, fleur,/ 

fog, brouillard, m. 

foible, défaut, m. 

follow, suivre, irr. 

following, suivant. 

fond : to be fond of , aimer. 

food, mets, m. pi. 

fool, sot, m., irr. 

foolish, sot, irr. 

foot, pied, m. ; on foot, à pied. 

for (conj.), car. 

for (prep.), pour ; for = during, 

pendant. 
forbid, défendre à [de]. 
force (vb.), forcer. 
force (n.), force,/ 
forebode, présager. 
foresee, prévoir, irr. 
forest, forêt,/; in the heart of the 

forest, en pleine forêt. 
fore ver, à jamais. 
forget, oublier [de]. 
forget-me-not, myosotis, ni. 
forgive, pardonner (à). 
form (vb.), former. 
form (n.), forme,/ 
former, celui-là, celle-là, ceux-là, 

celles-là; former = old, ancien, 

irr. 
formerly, autrefois, 
fortune, fortune, // fortune = 

property, bien, m. 
forty, quarante. 



found, fonder, 
four, quatre. 

fourteenth, quatorzième. 
fourth, quatrième. 
fragile, fragile. 
fragrance, odeur,/ 
franc, franc, m. 
France, France,/ 
Francis I., François I er 
frankly, franchement, 
frankness, franchise,/ 
free, libre. 

French («.), Français, m. 
French (adj.), français. 
Frenchman, Français, m. 
fréquent (vb.), fréquenter. 
fresh, frais, irr. 
friend, ami, m. 
friendship, amitié,/ 
frightened (adj.), effrayé. 
frightful, effrayant. 
f rom, de ; f rom ( = a point of de- 
parture in time), à partir de ; dès. 
front : in front, devant, 
frost, frimas, m. 
frozen, glacé. 
fruit, fruit, m. 
fugitive, fugitif, irr. 
full, plein. 
fur, fourrure,/ 
fury, fureur, / 
future («.), avenir, m. 
future (adj.), futur. 

gallantry, galanterie,/ 

galop, galop, m. 

game, jeu, m., irr.; gibier, ?n. (hunt- 

ing terni). 
garden, jardin, m. 
garment, habit, m. 
gâte, porte, / 
gather, amasser. 
gay, joyeux, irr. 



VOCABULARY. 



163 



gayly, gaiement. 

gênerai, général, m., irr. 

generosity, générosité,/ 

genius, génie, m. 

gentle, doux, irr. 

gentleman, monsieur, m., irr. 

gentleness, douceur,/ 

geographer, géographe, m. 

German («.), Allemand, m. 

gesture, geste, ??i. 

get up, se lever ; to get away from, 
s'éloigner (de) ; to get tired, s'en- 
nuyer. 

gift, don, m. 

gifted (adj.), doué (de). 

girl, fille, / 

give, donner ; give = hand to, re- 
mettre (à), irr.; to give back, 
rendre ; to give rise to, faire 
naître, irr. ; give up, renoncer 
(à) ; to give up to, céder. 

glad, content (de) ; very glad, bien 
aise [de]. 

gladly, volontiers. 

glass, verre, m. 

glide, glisser. 

glitter, reluire, irr. 

globe, globe, m. 

glorious, glorieux [de], irr. 

glory, gloire,/ 

glove, gant, m. 

gO,*aller \_jio prep.~], irr.; se rendre; 
to gO = to go away, * partir [no 
prep.~], irr., *s'en aller, irr.; to 
gO OUt, *sortir \_no prep.~\, irr. ; 
to gO Off, * partir \jio prep.\ irr.; 
to go away, *s'en aller, irr.; to 
go down,* descendre; togodown 
on one's knees, se mettre à genoux, 
irr. ; to go away from, s'éloigner 
(de) ; to gO up to, s'approcher 
(de); to go get, * aller chercher, 
irr.; to gO home, * rentrer; to 



go to bed, se coucher ; to go to 
sleep, s'endormir, irr. ; to gO 
ahead, prendre les devants, irr. 

goal, but, m. 

God, Dieu, m. 

gods, dieux, m. pi. 

gold, or, m. 

golden, doré. 

gOOd {adj.), bon, irr. ; sage (of con- 
duct). 

gOOd («.), bien, m. 

good-by, adieu. 

goodness, bonté,/ 

Gospels, Évangiles, m. pi. 

Gothic, gothique. 

govern, gouverner. 

government, gouvernement, m. 

gown, robe,/ 

grâce, grâce,/ 

graceful, gracieux, irr. 

gracious, gracieux, irr. 

gradually, peu à peu. 

grand, grand. 

grandfather, grand-père, m. 

grandmother, grand'mère,/ 

granité, granit, m. 

grate, grille,/ 

grateful, reconnaissant (de). 

gratitude, reconnaissance,// grati- 
tude,/ 

grave, grave. 

gravely, sérieusement. 

gray, gris. 

great, grand. 

greatness, grandeur,/ 

Greece, Grèce,/ 

Greek («.), Grec, m. 

Greek (ad].), grec, irr. 

green, vert. 

groan, plainte, / / gémissement, m. 

grotesque, grotesque. 

group, groupe, m. 

gruff, bourru. 



164 



VOCABULARY. 



guest, convive, m. 
guidance, conduite,/. 
guide (vb.), guider. 
guide (».), guide, m. 
guilty, coupable. 

haberdasher, mercier, m. 

habit : to be in the habit, avoir 

l'habitude, irr. 
habituai, habituel, irr. 
hair, cheveux, m. pi., irr. 
half (ad/.), demi, 
half (n.), moitié,/ 
hall, salle,/ 

hand (vb.), remettre (à), irr. 
hand (n.), main,/ 
handsome, beau, irr. 
hang, pendre. 
happen, * arriver ; happen, imper- 

sonal, * arriver; to happen to, 

* venir à, irr. 
happily, heureusement. 
happiness, bonheur, m. 
happy, heureux, irr. 
hard ( = unfeeling), insensible; hard 

(= difficult), difficile [de]; dur 

(of a substance) ; rude (of afighi). 
hardly, à peine. 
harmless, inoffensif, irr. 
harmonious, harmonieux, irr. 
harmony, harmonie,/ 
harshly, durement; rudement. 
harvest, récolte, / / moisson, / 
haste : in haste, à la fhâte. 
hasten, se f hâter [de] ; s'empresser 

[de]. 
hat, chapeau, m., irr. 
hâte, détester ; f haïr, irr. 
hatred, f haine,/ 
hâve, avoir, irr. ; to hâve to = to be 

obligea to, devoir \_no prep.~], irr.; 

falloir \_noprep.~\, irr., impersonal; 

to have just, venir de, irr. 



hazy, confus. 

head, tête,/ 

health, santé,/ 

hear, entendre ; to hear from, avoir 

des nouvelles de, irr. 
heart, cœur, m. 
heart-rending, déchirant. 
heat, chaleur,/ 
heaven, ciel, m. ; cieux, m. pi. 
heavenly, céleste. 
heavy, pesant. 
height, f hauteur,/ 
heir, héritier, m., ii'r. 
help (z/£.), aider ; help = to prevenl, 

s'empêcher [de]. 
help (n.), aide,/ 
helpful, secourable. 
hem, bord, m. 
henceforth, désormais. 
Henry, Henri. 
her, son, irr. 

hère, ici ; hère is or hère are, voici, 
hermit, ermite, m. 
hero, f héros, m. 
heroine, héroïne,/ 
hers, le sien, la sienne, les siens, les 

siennes, 
hesitate, hésiter [à], 
hide, cacher ; to hide one's self, se 

cacher. 
high, fhaut. 
hire, louer. 
his (ad/.), son, irr. 
his (pron.), le sien, la sienne, les 

siens, les siennes. 
hold, tenir, irr. 
hole, trou, m. 
holiday, congé, m. 
Holland, t Hollande,/: 
home, foyer, m. ; at home, à la 

maison ; chez .... 
honest, honnête. 
honor (vb.), honorer. 



VOCABULARY. 



165 



honor (n.), honneur, m. 

honorable, honorable. 

hook, hameçon, m. 

hope (vb.), espérer. 

hope (n.), espérance,/ 

horizon, horizon, m. 

horrible, horrible. 

horror, horreur,/ 

horse, cheval, m., irr. ; on horse- 

back, à cheval, 
horseman, cavalier, m. 
hospital, hôpital, m., irr. 
hostess, hôtesse,/ 
hour, heure,/ 
house, maison, / / at the house of , 

chez. 
household, ménage, m. 
hover, flotter. 
how, comment. 

however, pourtant ; cependant. 
however (adv.), quelque. 
human, humain ; human beings, 

les humains, m. pi. 
humble, humble, 
humbly, humblement. 
humor, humeur,/ 
hundred, cent. 
hunger, faim,/ 
hungry : to be hungry, avoir faim, 

irr. 
hurry, se dépêcher [de]. 
husband, mari, m. 
hut, chaumière,/ 
hypocrite, hypocrite, m. 
hypocritical, hypocrite. 

idea, idée,/ 
idéal («.), idéal, ni. 
idéal (adj.), idéale. 
idealize, idéaliser, 
idleness, oisiveté,/ 
idol, idole,/ 
idyl, idylle,/ 



if, si. 

ignorant, ignorant. 

ill (ad/.), malade. 

ill (adv.), mal. 

illness, maladie,/ 

ills, maux, m. pi. 

ill-treated, malmené. 

illusion, illusion,/ 

illustrious, illustre. 

imagination, imagination, / 

imagine, imaginer, transitive; se 
figurer ; s'imaginer. 

imitate, imiter. 

immediately, immédiatement ; aus- 
sitôt. 

immense, immense. 

immortal, immortel, irr. 

impatient, impatient. 

imperfection, imperfection,/ 

implore, supplier [de]. 

imply, dire, irr. 

importance, importance,/ 

important, important ; to be impor- 
tant, importer, impersonal ; sub- 
junctive. 

impossible, impossible. 

impression, impression,/ 

improvised (ad/.), improvisé. 

imprudent, imprudent. 

in, dans ; en ; in before dates, en. 

incident, incident, m. 

include, compter. 

income, rente,/ 

incomparable, incomparable. 

incontestable, incontestable. 

inconvenience, inconvénient, ;;/. 

increase, augmenter. 

indeed, vraiment. 

indemnity, indemnité,/ 

Indian (adj.), indien, irr. 

indigence, dénûment, m. 

indignation, soulèvement, ;;/. 

indiscreetly, indiscrètement. 



66 



VOCABULARY. 



indolence, indolence, / 

induce, réduire [à], irr. 

indulgent, indulgent. 

industrious, industrieux, irr. ; labo- 
rieux, irr. 

industry, industrie,/ 

ineffaceable, ineffaçable. 

inexhaustible, inépuisable. 

inexpressible, inexprimable. 

infallible, infaillible. 

inflexible, inflexible. 

influence, influence,/. 

inform, prévenir, irr. 

informed (adj.), informé. 

ingenious, ingénieux, irr. 

ingratitude, ingratitude, / 

inhabitant, habitant, m. 

inherit, hériter (de). 

injustice, injustice,/ 

ink, encre,/ 

innkeeper, hôtelier, m. 

innocence, innocence,/ 

innocent, innocent. 

inquiry, recherche, // many in- 
quiries, maintes recherches. 

inquisitor, inquisiteur, m. 

inscrutableness, impénétrabilité, / 

insect, insecte, m. 

insignificant, frivole. 

insipid, insipide. [sister, intrans. 

insist, soutenir, irr., transitive ; in- 

instead of, au lieu de. 

institute, instituer. 

instruction, instruction, / 

intelligence, intelligence,/ 

intempérance, intempérance,/ 

intended (??.), futur, m. 

intention, intention, / 

interest (».), intérêt, m. 

interest (vb.), intéresser. 

interesting, intéressant. 

interpret, interpréter. 

interrupt, interrompre. 



interval, intervalle, m. 

interview, entrevue, / 

intimate, intime. 

into, dans ; en. 

intoxicated (ad/.), enivré (de) ; to 

become intoxicated, s'enivrer. 
intoxication, ivresse,/ 
introduce, introduire, irr. 
intruder, importun, m. 
invade, envahir, 
invent, inventer, 
invention, invention,/ 
invitation, invitation, / 
invite, inviter. 
iron, fer, m. 

irresistibly, irrésistiblement, 
irritate, fâcher. 
island, île,/ 
isle, île, / 
it, ce (indef. pron. used as an expie- 

tive); il (pers. pron.). 
Italian (n.), Italien, m., irr. 
Italian (adj.), italien, irr. 
Italy, Italie,/ 
its, son, irr. 

January, janvier. 
jealous, jaloux, irr. 
jester, bouffon, m. 
Jew, juif, 77i., irr. 
jewel, bijou, 77i., irr. 
Joan of Arc, Jeanne d'Arc. 
join, rejoindre, irr. 
joke, plaisanterie,/ 
Joséphine, Joséphine. 
journey, voyage, m. 
joy,joie,/ 

joyously, joyeusement. 
judge (vb.), juger. 
judge (n.), juge, m. 
judgment, jugement, m. 
July, juillet. 
just, juste. 



VOCABULARY. 



:6 7 



keen, vif, irr. 

keep, garder; to keep from, em- 
pêcher [de] ; to keep up, entre- 
tenir, irr. 

kill, tuer. 

kind (n.), sorte,/. / genre, m. 

kind (adj.), bon, irr. 

kindly, avec bonté. 

kindness, bienveillance,/ 

king, roi, m. 

kingdom, royaume, m. 

kiss, baiser. 

kitchen, cuisine,/ 

knee, genou, m., irr. 

kneel down, s'agenouiller. 

knife, couteau, ;;/., irr. 

knight, chevalier, m. 

knighthood, chevalerie, / 

knock, frapper. 

know, savoir \_no prep.~\, irr.; to 
know = to be acquainted with, con- 
naître, irr. 

known {adj.), connu. 

label, étiquette,/ 

laboriously, péniblement. 

lace, dentelle,/ 

lack, manquer (de). 

lady, dame,/ / young lady, demoi- 
selle,/ 

lamb, brebis, /, irr. ; agneau, m., 
irr. 

lamp, lampe,/ 

land, déposer, transitive; aborder, 
intransitive. 

landau, landau, m. 

language, langue,// langage, m. 

languish, languir. 

large, gros, irr. ; grand. 

last (va.), durer. 

last (adj.), dernier, irr.; at last, 
enfin; à la fin. 

late, tard. 



lately, dernièrement. 

Latin, latin, m.; Latin Quarter, 
quartier Latin, ;;/. 

latter, celui-ci, celle-ci, ceux-ci, 
celles-ci. 

laudable, louable. 

laugh, rire, irr. 

laughter, rire, m. 

law, loi, / / law = profession, le 
droit. 

lawyer, avocat, m. 

lay, poser. 

laziness, paresse,/ 

lazy, paresseux, irr. 

lead (n.), plomb, m. 

lead (vb.), mener; conduire, irr.; 
lead back, ramener. 

leader, chef, m. 

league, lieue,/ 

learn, apprendre [à], irr. 

learning (n.), instruction,// savoir, 
m. (Jïiiozvledge acquired). 

least (adj.), moindre; the least, le 
moins. 

leave, laisser (a person or t/iing); 
quitter (a perso7i or place); * sor- 
tir de, irr. (corne out of a place). 

leg, jambe,/ 

legacy, legs, m., sing. 

legitimate, légitime. 

lend, prêter. 

less, moins de; moins (adv.of degré e). 

lessen, diminuer. 

lesson, leçon,/ 

lest (conj.), que, subjunctive. 

let, laisser \no prep.~\. 

letter, lettre,/ 

lettuce, laitue,/ 

liberality, libéralité,/ 

liberty, liberté,/ 

library, bibliothèque,/ 

lie (n.), mensonge, m. 

lie down, se coucher. 



VOCABULARY. 



lieutenant : second lieutenant, lieu- 
tenant en second, m. 

lif e, vie, /. 

life-like, vivant. 

lift, élever; to lift up, soulever. 

light {vb.), allumer. 

light {adj.), léger, irr. 

light {n.), lumière,/ 

like {vb.), amier [à]; like = wish, 
vouloir \_no prep.~], irr.; like 
= think of, trouver ; like = to 
delight in, se plaire (à), irr. 

like {adv.), comme. 

line, ligne,/. 

linen, toile,/ 

link, anneau, ;//., irr. 

lion-tamer, dompteur, m. 

lip, lèvre, / 

listen, écouter \_no prep.~\, transitive. 

literal, littéral, irr. 

literary, littéraire; literary note, 
note littéraire, / 

literature, littérature, / 

little {adj.), petit; little = notmuch, 
peu de. 

little {pron.), peu; a little, un peu 
(de). 

little {adv.), peu; little by little, 
peu à peu. 

live, vivre, irr. ; live = réside, ré- 
sider, demeurer; to live in, ha- 
biter [no prep.~]y to live well, 
faire bonne chère, irr. ; long 
live, Vive ! 

lively, vif, irr. 

livre, livre, / 

locality, local, m., irr. 

lodge, loger. 

loftiness, élévation,/ 

London, Londres. 

lonesome: to be lonesome, s'en- 
nuyer. 

long {adj.), long, irr. 



long {adv.), longtemps; alongtime, 
longtemps; as long as, aussi long- 
temps que. 

long (vb.), aspirer [à]. 

longer {adv.), plus longtemps. 

look {vb.), regarder; to look at, 
regarder; to.look for, chercher; 
to look upon, regarder. 

look (n.), air, m. 

lord, seigneur, m.; my lord, mon- 
seigneur. 

lose, perdre; to lose one's self or 
one's way, s'égarer. 

lot, lot, m. ; sort, m. 

loud, fhaut. 

louis, louis, m. 

love O.), amour, m. ; in love with, 
amoureux (de); épris (de). 

love {vb.), aimer; chérir; to love to, 
aimer [à]. 

lovely, charmant. 

lover, amoureux, m., irr. ; amant, m. 

loving, aimant. 

lower, inférieur. 

loyal, constant. 

luck : bad luck, le guignon. 

lucrative, lucratif, irr. 

lull, bercer. 

luminous, lumineux, irr. 

lunch, déjeuner, m. 

Lyons, Lyon. 

machine, machine,/ 

madam, madame. 

madrigal, madrigal, m., irr. 

magnificent, magnifique. 

majesty, majesté,/ 

make, faire \_no prep.~], irr. ; to 
make fun of, se moquer (de) ; 
se rire (de), irr.; to make happy, 
rendre heureux; to make haste, 
se dépêcher [de]; to make a 
trip, faire un voyage, irr. 



VOCABULARY. 



169 



make (n.), modèle, m. 

malady, maladie,/ 

mamma, maman. 

man, homme, m. 

manage, savoir \no prep.~\, irr. 

manly, mâle. 

manner, manière,/ 

manners, façons, / pi. 

manufacture, fabriquer. 

many, beaucoup (de); bien des; 

maintes; so many, tant (de); a 

great many, beaucoup (de) ; 

beaucoup (without the noun) ; 

how many, combien (de). 
marble, marbre, m. 
march, marche,/ 
mare, jument,/ 
mariner, marin, m. 
Mark : Saint Mark, Saint-Marc. 
mark, marquer. 
marriage, mariage, m.; love mar- 

riage, mariage d'amour, m. 
marry, marier ; épouser ; marry 

again, se remarier. 
marvel, merveille,/ 
Mary, Marie. 
Mass, messe, / / Mass-book, livre 

de messe, m. 
massacre (va.), massacrer. 
massacre (n.), massacre, m. 
master, maître, m. 
masterpiece, chef-d'œuvre, m. 
match, parti, ;//. 
matter, affaire,/ 
matters : in matters, en matière. 
mature, mûr. 
maxim, maxime,/ 
may (= be able), pouvoir \_noprep.~], 

irr. 
mean (va.), vouloir dire, irr. 
mean (adj.), méchant. 
means (n.), moyen, m. 
meanwhile, cependant. 



mediator, médiateur, m., irr. 

meet, rencontrer; rejoindre, irr. (by 
appointment) ; se réunir (of a So- 
ciety) . 

meeting (n.), réunion,/ 

melancholy, mélancolie, / 

memory, mémoire, / / memory 
= remembrance, souvenir, m. 

men : young men, jeunes gens, i?i. 
pi. ; old men, vieillards, m. pi. ; 
men of letters, hommes de 
lettres, m. pi. 

merchant, négociant, m. ; mar- 
chand, m. 

mère, simple. 

merit, mérite, m. 

method, procédé, m. 

mètre, mètre, m. 

middle, milieu, m. 

midst : in the midst, au milieu. 

midwinter : in midwinter, en plein 
hiver. 

mild, doux, irr. 

military, militaire. 

milk, lait, m. 

mind, esprit, m. 

mine, le mien, la mienne, les miens, 
les miennes. 

minerai, minéral, m., irr. 

mingled with, mêlé (de). 

minister, ministre, m. ; prime min- 
ister, premier ministre, m. 

minority, minorité,/ 

minute, minute,/ 

miracle, miracle, ni. 

mirror, glace,/ 

mischievous, malicieux, irr.. 

miser, avare, ;//. 

misery, misère, / 

misfortune, malheur, m. 

miss, manquer [de]; to miss the 
road, se tromper de route. 

mist, brume,/ 



170 



VOCABULARY. 



mistake, faute,/ 

mistaken : to be mistaken, se 
tromper. 

mix, mêler (de). 

model, modèle, m. 

modéra, moderne. 

modest, modeste. 

modestly, modestement. 

moment, moment, ni.; but a mo- 
ment since, tout à l'heure; from 
that moment, à partir de ce 
moment. 

money, argent, m. 

monotonous, monotone. 

month, mois, m. 

monument, monument, m. 

moon, lune,/ 

moral, moral, irr. 

morally, moralement. 

morals, mœurs, / //. 

more {adv. ofdegree), plus; not any 
more, ne . . . plus. 

more {pron. and adj.), plus (de); 
davantage; not any more, no 
more, ne . . . plus (de). 

moreover, du reste. 

morning, matin, ;//. {considered as a 
unit) ; matinée, / {considered in 
détail). 

mortal, mortel, irr. 

mosaic, mosaïque,/ 

Moses, Moïse. 

moss, mousse,/ 

most {pron. and adj.), le plus (de) ; 
la plupart (de or du, de la, des). 

most {adv.), plus. 

mother, mère,/ 

mother-in-law, belle-mère, / 

motionless, immobile. 

motive, motif, m. 

mould, façonner. 

mount, * monter. 

mountain, montagne,/ 



mountainous, montagneux, irr. 

mourn, pleurer, transitive. 

mouse, souris,/ 

mouth, bouche, / 

move, se mouvoir, irr. 

movement, mouvement, m. 

much, beaucoup (de); as much, 
autant (de) ; as much as, autant 
que; how much, combien (de); 
too much, trop (de); so much, 
tant (de) ; very much, beau- 
coup. 

much {adv. of degree), beaucoup. 

muséum, musée, m. 

music, musique,/ 

musician, musicien, m., irr. 

must, devoir [no prep.\ irr. ; fal- 
loir [no prep.~\, irr.; impersonal. 

mutually, mutuellement. 

my, mon, irr. 

mystery, mystère, m. 

nail, ongle, m. 

name, nom, m. 

named, nommé. 

Napoléon, Napoléon. 

nation, nation,/ 

national, national, irr. 

native, natal. 

natural, naturel, irr. 

naturally, naturellement. 

naturalness, naturel, m. 

nature, nature,/ 

navy, marine,/ 

near, près de; quite near, tout près 
de. 

neat, net, irr. 

necessary, nécessaire; to be neces- 
sary, falloir [no prep.~\, irr.; im- 
personal. 

necessity, nécessité,/ 

neck, cou, m. 

necklace, collier, m. 



VOCABULARY. 



171 



need (vb.~), avoir besoin [de], irr. ; 

falloir \_noprep.~\,irr. ; impersonal. 
need (n.) y besoin, m. 
neglect (vb.), négliger. 
négligence, négligence, / 
negro, nègre, m., irr. 
neighbor, voisin, ni. 
neither, ne ... ni; neither . . . 

nor, ne ... ni ... ni. 
never, ne . . . jamais; without verb, 

jamais. 
nevertheless, cependant. 
new, nouveau, irr. 
news, nouvelles, f. pi. ; nouvelle,/ 

sing. 
newspaper, journal, m., irr. 
next, prochain. 
nièce, nièce,/ 
night, nuit,// last night, hier au 

soir. 
nightingale, rossignol, m. 
nightmare, cauchemar, m. 
nine, neuf. 
no (adj.), ne . . . aucun; ne . . . pas 

de; nul ... ne; pas un; no One, 

ne . . . personne, m.; nul . . . ne, 

m.; no more, ne . . . plus (de). 
no (adv.), non. 
noble (ad/.), noble. 
noble («.), noble, m. 
nobleman, gentilhomme, m. sing.; 

gentilshommes, ni.pl. 
nobleness, noblesse,/. 
nobody, ne . . . personne, ni. 
noise, bruit, ;;/. 
nonchalance, nonchalance,/ 
none, aucun . . . ne. 
nor, ni. 

Normandy, Normandie, / 
nose, nez, ///. 

not, ne . . . pas; ne . . . point. 
not that (conj.), non pas que, sub- 

junctive. 



note, billet, m. 

nothing, ne . . . rien, ni. ; without 

verb, rien; nothing but, rien que. 
notice, remarquer; s'apercevoir, irr. 
novel, roman, m. 
now, maintenant; à présent; until 

now, jusque-là. 
number, nombre, ni. 
numerous, nombreux, irr. 
nut, amande,/ 

0, ô. 

oak, chêne, ?n. 

obedient, obéissant. 

obey, obéir (à). 

Object, objet, m. ; object = ai ni, 

but, ni. 
oblige, obliger. 
obscure, obscure. 
obscurity, obscurité,/ 
observe, observer. 
Observer, observateur, ;;?., irr. 
obstacle, obstacle, m. 
Obtain, obtenir, irr. 
occasion, occasion,/ 
occupation, occupation,/ 
OCCupy, occuper; habiter (a house) ; 

to occupy one's self, s'occuper, 
océan, océan, ni. 
October, octobre. 
odious, odieux, irr. 
of, de. 

offer, offrir à [de], irr. 
offend, offenser, 
offence, offense,/ 
office, charge,/ 
often, souvent. 
oh, oh. 
oil, huile,/ 
old, vieux, irr. ; âgé. 
old: to be . . . years old, avoir 

. . . ans, irr. 
omelet, omelette,/ 



172 



VOCABULARY. 



on, sur. 

once, une fois; ail at once, tout à 
coup ; at once, à la fois ; at once 
= immediately, aussitôt : sur-le- 
champ. 

One {numéral}, un, une. 

one (pron.), on; the one (distin- 
guished front "the ot/ter"), l'un, 
l'une; the one (dem.), celui, celle, 
ceux, celles; this one, that one, 
celui-ci, celui-là, celle-ci, celle-là; 
which one or ones, lequel, la- 
quelle, lesquels, lesquelles ; one 
another, les uns, les autres, les 
unes, les autres; se. 

only (adv.), ne . . . que; seulement; 
not only, non seulement. 

only (adj.), seul. 

open, ouvrir, irr. 

opéra, opéra, m. 

opération, opération, / 

opinion, opinion,/ 

opportunity, occasion,/. 

oppose, opposer. 

or, ou. 

orator, orateur, m. 

ordain, ordonner. 

order, ordre, m. ; in order that, afin 
que, subjunctive ; in order to, afin 
de, before infinitive. 

origin, origine,/ 

originality, originalité, / 

Orléans, Orléans. 

ornament, ornement, m. 

orphan, orphelin, m. 

other {aâà. and pron?), autre. 

Others, auyui,,^. sing., indefinite. 

OUght, devpir \_no prep.\ irr. 

our, notre, Yrr. 

ours, le nôtre, la nôtre, les nôtres, 
m. and fXpl. 

out of doorsi dehors. 

overcome, surmonter. 



overwhelm (= witk a favorable 
meaning), combler (de); over- 
whelm (= wiîh an unfavorable 
meaning), accabler (de). 

owe, devoir (à), irr. 

owl, f hibou, m., irr. 

own, propre. 

package, paquet, m. 

page, page,/ / page = boy, page, m. 

pain, causer du chagrin. 

paint, peindre, irr. 

painting, peinture,/ 

painter, peintre, m. 

palace, palais, m. 

pamphlet, brochure,/ 

Panthéon, Panthéon, m. 

paper, papier, ?n. 

Paradise Lost, Paradis perdu, m. 

parent, parent, ;;/. 

park, parc, m. 

part (n.), partie, /,• the greater 
part, la plus grande partie; for 
the most part, pour la plupart; 
to make part of, faire partie de, 
irr.; on the part of, de la part de. 

part from, se séparer de. 

partridge, perdrix,/ 

parvenu, parvenu, ;;/. 

pass, passer; pass = to occur, se 
passer. 

passion, passion,/ 

passionate, passionné. 

path, chemin, m. 

pathetic (».)> touchant, m. 

pathetic (adj.), pathétique. 

patience, patience,/ 

patient (n.), malade, m. 

patiently, patiemment. 

pay (;?.), solde,/ 

pay Qvb.), payer. 

peace, paix,/ 

peacefully, tranquillement. 



VOCABULARY. 



173 



pear, poire,/. 
peasant, paysan, m., irr. 
pebble, caillou, m., irr. 
peculiar, original, irr. 
peculiarity, ridicule, m. 
pecuniary, pécuniaire, 
pen, plume,/ 
pension, pension,/ 
people, on, m. sing. (always used 
nominatively, and standing for 
people in a vague, gênerai sensé ; 
requires singular verb) • gens, m. 
and f. pi. {translates people, when 
tins word stands for a number, 
class or group of individuals ; for 
agreement of adjectives, see gram- 
mar) ; people = nation or popu- 
lace, peuple, m. sing. ; country 
people, gens du pays, m. pi. ; 
people of society, gens du monde, 
m . pi. 
perceive, apercevoir, irr. ; s'aperce- 
voir, irr. 
perfect (vb.), perfectionner. 
perfect (ad/.), parfait. 
perfection, perfection,/ 
perfectly, parfaitement. 
perfidious, perfide. 
perform, remplir. 
performance, représentation,/ 
performer, exécutant, m. 
perfume (vb.), embaumer. 
perfume (;/.), parfum, m. 
perhaps, peut-être. 
perish, périr. 
permanent, durable. 
permission, permission, / 
permit, permettre à [de], irr. 
persévérance, persévérance,/ 
persistent, persistant. 
person, personne,/ 
personage, personnage, ///. 
personal, personnel, irr. 



persuade, persuader (à). 

persuasive, persuasif, irr. 

Peter the Cruel, Pierre le Cruel. 

Peter the Great, Pierre le Grand. 

phase, phase,/ 

philosophy, philosophie,/ 

physiognomy, physionomie,/ 

physiologist, physiologiste, m. 

piano, piano, m. 

pick, cueillir, irr. ; to pick out, 
choisir; to pick up, ramasser; 
to pick up = save or rescue, re- 
cueillir, irr. 

picture, tableau, ??i., irr. 

picturesque, pittoresque. 

pièce, morceau, m., irr.; pièce = 
play, pièce, / 

pious, pieux, irr. 

piqued, piqué. 

pistole, pistole,/ 

pitiless, impitoyable (pour). 

pity, pitié,/ ; it is a pity, c'est dom- 
mage, subjunctive. 

place, place,// endroit, m. 

plain, plaine,/ 

plan, plan, m. 

planet, planète,/ 

plant, plante,/ 

play (vb.), jouer. 

play (7/.), pièce,/ 

plaything, joujou, m., irr. 

please (vb.), plaire (à), irr.; if you 
please, veuillez (before the verb). 

pleased with, content (de). 

pleasure, plaisir, m. 

ploughman, laboureur, m.^ 

Plutarch, Plutarque.. 

poet, poète, m. 

poetic, poétique. 

poetry, poésie,/ 

point, point, m. 

point Out, désigner. 
poison, poison, m. 



174 



ARY. 



/ I 



polite, poE. 
politely, poliment 
political, politique. 

p;;r. :.;.-■ :e. 
poorly, maL 
Pope, pape, w. 
popular, populaire. 
popularized, popularisé. 
populated, peuplé. 
porter, huissier, ». 
portrait, portrait, ». 

P0;*:. •-■'; T.'.-.-:.'. 

position, position,/ 

pOSSeSS. :.'.V^ '''::. 

p;ss:r.le ; T.'.--.--.:"-.'.--: 

P;st Off'.e. y. ■-.:■■:. f. 

y.yr-.y w . ■ -, ■'■. f. 

powder, poudre, / 

power, pouvoir, w. 

powerful, puissant 

prairie, prairie,/ 

praise («fi.), vanter; louer. 

praise ■ ■ . :. //. 

prây. :..-:■'::. 

prayer, prière,/; Evening Prayer, 

?r: -::•: -; , --.-..-. / 
précaution, précaution, / 

prevede : :.:v.;-.-:r. 

precions, précieux, £/r. 
preciously, précieusement. 
precisely, précisément. 
précision, précision,/ 
precocions, précoce. 
prefer, aimer mieux; préférer. 
préférence, préférence, / 
prépare, préparer; to prépare doc i 

self, se préparer [à]. 
préserve r.-é préserve : 

mind, sang-froid, w. 
présent présent; ».; cadeau, 

»., zVr. 

présent («<#'.;, présent 

présent - présenter; to pré- 



sent one's self, 
to présent with, 



se présenter ; 
remettre (à), 



présentation, représentation, / 

présentaient, pressentiment, ». 

préserve, conserver; préserver. 
1 président, président, wz. 
-»press. presser. 

prétend, prétendre; to prétend to, 
faire semblant de, é>v. 

pretension, prétention,/ 

pretentious, prétentieux, z>r. 

pretezt, prétexte, w. 

pretty, joli. 

prevent, empêcher [de]. 

prey, proie,/ 

price, prix, ». 

p '.'-'-A orgueil, ». 

priest, prêtre, ». 

prince, prince, ». / Prince of Wales, 
prince de Galles, ». 

princess, princesse, / 

principal («.), principal, w., ?Vr. 

principal (adj.), principal, z>r. 

prison, prison,/ 

prisoner, prisonnier, »,, z>?-. 

private, particulier, z>r. / in private, 
en particulier; private life, vie pri- 
vée, / 

privation, privation,/ 

prize, estimer. 

probable, probable. 

proclaim, proclamer. 

procure, procurer. 

prodigality, prodigalité, / 

prodigious, prodigieux, z>r. 

produce, produire, z>r. 

production, production,/ 

profess, professer. 

profession, profession, / 

prof essor, professeur, z?z. 

profit, profiter (de). 

profound, profond. 



YO C ABU LARY 



175 



progress. progrès, m. pi. 
progressive, progressif, irr. 
project, projet, m. 
prolong, prolonger. 
promise (r/\), promettre à [de], irr. 
promise (//.), promesse,/ 
promptly. promptement. 
pronounce. prononcer. 
proof, preuve,/! 
properly, proprement. 
property, biens, m. pi. 
prophet, prophète, ///. 
proportion, proportion,/ 
propose, proposer [de]. 
proposition, proposition,/ 
prose, prose,/ 
prosperity, prospérité,/ 
protect, protéger. 
protection, protection,/ 
protector, protecteur, m., irr. 
protégé, protégé, m. 
Protestant, protestant, m. 
proud, fier, irr. 
prove, prouver; to prove one's self, 

se montrer. 
Provence, Provence,/ 
provide, pourvoir ^de), irr. 
provided (aw/), pourvu que, suô- 

junctii t ; moyennant que, suà- 

junctive. 
provided (adj.), pourvu (de), 
providence, providence,/ 
province, province,/ 
provision, provision,/ 
provost. prévôt, m. 
prudence, prudence,/; 
psychologist, psychologue, m. 
public (».)> public, m. 
public (ad;.), public, irr. 
publication, publication,/: 
publish, publier, 
publisher, libraire, ///. 
pug, camus. 



punish, punir. 

pupil, élève, m. : écolier, w., irr. ; 
prunelle,/ (pftkeeyé). 

pure, pur. 

purify, purifier. 

purity, pureté,/ 

purse, bourse,/ 

pursue, poursuivre, irr. 

put, mettre, irr. ; to put back, re- 
mettre, irr. 

quality, qualité,/ 

quantity, quantité,/ 

quarrel, se brouiller. 

quarter, quartier, m. 

queen, reine,/ 

question (vl>.), interroger. 

question : it is a question of, il 

s'agit de. 
quickly, vite, 
quiet, apaiser. 
quietly, tranquillement. 
quite (adv.) t tout à fait. 
quite (= ail), tout, toute, toutes. 
quote, citer. 

race, race,/ 

rain (r<£.)", pleuvoir, irr. ; imper- 

sonal. 
rain (».), pluie,/ 
raise, lever; to raise = to bring 

up, élever; to raise = to éleva ts, 

élever ; to raise one's self, 

s'élever. 
rank, rang, m. : rank = military 

rank, grade, /;/. 
ransom one's self, se racheter. 
ransom («.), rançon,/ 
rapid, rapide. 
rapidly, rapidement. 
rare, rare. 
rarely, rarement, 
rat, rat, ///. 



176 



VOCABULARY. 



rather, plutôt; rather = somewhat, 

assez, 
ravishing, ravissant. 
raw, naturel, irr. 
reach (vb.), atteindre (à), irr. ; 

* parvenir (à), irr. 
read, lire, irr. ; to read over, relire, 

irr. 
reading, lecture,/ 
ready, prêt. 
real (n.), réel, m. 
real (adj.), vrai; véritable. 
reality, réalité,/ 
realize, réaliser, 
really, véritablement. 
reap, recueillir, irr. 
reappear, reparaître, irr. 
reascend, * remonter. 
reason, raison,/ 
reasonable, raisonnable. 
reassure, rassurer. 
recall, rappeler. 
receive, recevoir, irr. 
recite, réciter. 
recognrze, reconnaître, irr. 
recommend, recommander. 
recommendation, recommandation, 

/ 

reconcile, réconcilier, 
récréation, récréation,/ 
red, rouge. 

redeem one-s self, se racheter. 
redouble, redoubler. 
reduce, réduire, irr. 
reflect, refléter; reflect = think, ré- 
fléchir, 
reflection, réflexion, / 
refuse, refuser [de]. 
regard, regarder. 
régiment, régiment, m. 
regret {vb.), regretter [de], 
regret (n.), regret, m. 
regular, régulier, irr. 



reign (vb.), régner. 

reign (n.), règne, m. 

rejoice, se réjouir [de]. 

relate, raconter. 

relative, parent, m. 

relie, relique,/ 

relieve, soulager. 

religion, religion,/ 

remain, * rester. 

remains, restes, m. pi. 

remark (vb.), remarquer. 

remark (n.), réflexion,/ 

remember, se rappeler; se souvenir 

(de), irr. 
remind, faire l'effet de, irr. 
remorse, remords, m. 
render, rendre. 
repaid, remboursé (de). 
repair, réparer ; repair — go, se 

rendre. 
repast, repas, m. 
repeat, répéter. 
repelled (adj.), repoussé. 
repent, se repentir (de), irr. 
replace, remplacer. 
reply, répondre; répliquer. 
repose, reposer, 
represent, représenter. 
reproduce, reproduire, irr. 
reprove, reprendre (sur), irr. 
republic, république,/ 
réputation, réputation,/ 
request, demande, / 
require, exiger. 
rereadj relire, irr. 
resemble, ressembler (à). 
resentment, ressentiment, m. 
résignation, résignation,/ 
resist, résister (à). 
resolute, résolu. 
résolve, résoudre [de], irr. 
resource, ressource,/ 
respect (vb.), respecter. 



VOCABULARY. 



177 



respect (ni), respect, m. 

rest (yb.), se reposer. 

rest {n.), repos, m. 

retain, retenir, irr. 

retire, se retirer. 

retreat, retraite,/ 

return ( — give back), rendre; re- 
turn = go back, * retourner ; re- 
turn = corne back, * revenir, irr. 

reveal, révéler; livrer (a secref). 

revery, rêverie,/ 

revive, ranimer. 

Révolution, Révolution, / 

reward, récompenser. 

rhetoric, rhétorique, / 

rhyme, rime,/ 

rich, riche. 

riches, richesses,///. 

richness, richesse,/ 

rid: to get rid of or to rid one's 
self of, se débarasser (de). 

ride, monter. 

rider, cavalier, m. 

ridicule, ridicule, m. 

ridiculous, ridicule. 

right («.), droit, m.; to be right, 
avoir raison, irr.; right away, 
tout de suite. 

ring, bague,/ 

ripen, mûrir. 

rise, se lever; s'élever (ascend). 

risk, risque, m. 

rival (n.), rival, m., irr. 

rival (ad/.), rival, irr. 

river, fleuve, m. 

road, chemin, m. 

roam, rôder. 

rob, voler. 

robust, robuste. 

rock, rocher, m. 

rôle, rôle, m. 

roll, rouler. 

rolling (n.), roulement, m. 



Roman {n.), Romain, m. 

Roman (ad/.), romain. 

roof, toit, m. 

room, salle,// chambre,/ 

root, racine,/ 

rose, rose, /; wild rose, rose de 

buisson, / ; rose leaf , feuille de 

rose, / 
rosy, vermeil, irr. 
royal, royal, irr. 
rudeness, impolitesse,/ 
rugged, rugueux, irr. 
ruin (vb.), perdre. 
ruin (n.), ruine,/ 
rule, règle, / 
run, courir, irr..; to run away, se 

sauver. 
Russia, Russie,/ 

sacrifice (vb.), sacrifier. 

sacrifice («.), sacrifice, m. 

sad, triste. 

sadden, attrister. 

sadness, tristesse,/ 

saint, saint, m.; Saint Bartholo- 
mew, Saint- Barthélémy. 

salient, saillant. 

salon, salon, m. 

salutary, salutaire. 

same, même (before the noun). 

sanction, sanctionner. 

satisfaction, satisfaction,/ 

satisfied (adj.), satisfait (de). 

satisfy, contenter. 

Saturday, samedi. 

savage, sauvage, m. 

savant, savant, m. 

save, sauver. 

savings, épargnes,///. 

say, dire, irr.; that is to say, c'est- 
à-dire. 

scaffold, échafaud, m. 

scale, escalader. 



i;8 



VOCABULARY. 



scandai, scandale, m. 

scandalous, scandaleux, irr. 

scarcely, à peine. 

scène, scène,/ 

scholar, savant, m. 

school, école,/. 

science, science,/ 

scold, gronder. 

Scotch, Écossais, m* 

scullion, marmiton, m. 

search : in search of , à la recherche 

de. 
season, saison,/ 
seat, place,/ 
seated, assis. 
second, second. 
secret («.), secret, m. 
secret (ad/.), secret, irr. 
see, voir [no prep.~\, irr.; to see 

again, revoir, irr.; to see once 

more, revoir, irr. 
seek, chercher [à] ; arrive to seek, 

* arriver chercher. 
seem, sembler [no prep.~\ ; paraître 

{no prep.~\, irr. 
seize, saisir. 
seldom, rare. 
sélect, choisir. 
self, soi-même. 
selfish, égoïste. 
selfishness, égoïsme, m. 
sell, vendre. 
send, envoyer, irr. ; to send for, 

faire venir, irr. ; faire appeler, 

irr. ; to send away , renvoyer, irr. 
sensé, sens, m. 
sensibility, sensibilité,/ 
sensible, sensé. 
sensitive, sensible. 
sentiment, sentiment, m. 
séparation, séparation,/ 
séries, suite, / sing. 
serious, grave; sérieux, irr. 



seriously, sérieusement; gravement. 

serpent, serpent, m. 

servant, serviteur, m. ; domestique, 

m. 
serve, servir, irr. 
service, service, m. 
set foot in, mettre les pieds au, irr. 
set off {adj?), soutenu. 
settle, régler (a MIT) ; to settle 

down, s'établir (à). 
seven, sept. 

seventeenth, dix-septième. 
seventy-eight, soixante-dix-huit, 
seventy-five, soixante-quinze. 
several, plusieurs, 
severe, sévère. 

shade, nuance,/ (ofco/or); ombre,/ 
shadow, ombre,/ 
shame, f honte,/ 
shameful, f honteux, irr. 
shape, faire \jw prep.~], irr. 
share, partager. 
sheet, drap, m. 
shell, noyau, m., irr. 
shelter, abri, ;;/. 

shepherd, berger, m.; pasteur, m. 
shepherdess, bergère,/ 
shoe, soulier, m. 
shop, boutique,/ 
short, bref, irr. 
shoulder, épaule,/ 
show, montrer. 
shut up, enfermer; to shut one's 

self up, s'enfermer. 
shy, faire un écart, irr. 
side : by the side of, à côté de; by 

the fireside, au coin du feu. 
siège, siège, m. 
silence, silence, m. 
silent, silencieux, irr. 
silk, soie,/ 
similar, semblable. 
simple, simple. 



VOCABULARY. 



1/9 



simpleton, sot, m., irr. 

simplicity, simplicité,/ 

Bill, péché, m. 

finir .depuis; but a moment 

since, tout à l'heure. 

sinœ ÇconJ.'), puisque, depuis que. 

since {prep.} y depuis. 

sincère, sincère. 

sincerity, sincérité,/ 

sing, chanter. 

single, seul: a single one, un seul. 

singular, singulier, irr. 

sir, monsieur. 

Sire. Sire. 

sister. î:eur. ~. : sister = mtn, reli- 
gieuse or sceur. f. 

sit down at, se mettre (à), irr.; to 
sit up. veiller. 

site, emplacement, m. 

sitnated (ad/.), situé. 

situation, situation,/ 

six. - 

sixteen. seize. 

sketch, ébauche,/ 

sky. ::el, m., irr. 

slave, esclave, m. 

sleer . simmeil, /;/. 

sleep : . , dormir, irr. 

sleepy : to be sleepy. avoir sommeil. 

small. petit. 

smallest. moindre. 

smile : '. . sourire, irr. . to smile 

upon, sourire (à), irr. 
smile //.), sourire, ni. 
smoke. fumer, 
snow. neige,/ 

SO (ad: . . si; SO that. de sorte que, 
.• afin que, subju 

pour que, . 
soap. savon, ///. 
society. socif 



Socrates, Socrate. ^ 

soil, sol, m. 

sojourn, séjour, m. 

soldier, soldat, m. 

SOlicitor, sollicite ur, m., irr. 

solitary, solitaire. 

solitude, solitude,/ 

Solomon, Salomon. 

somber, sombre. 

some (adj.~), de -f def. art.; quelque 
(empkatic) . 

some (pron.), en ; quelques-uns, 
quelques-unes (emphatic) . 

somebody, on; quelqu'un,///. 

some one, quelqu'un, m. 

something, quelque chose, m. 

sometimes, quelquefois. 

son, fils, ///. 

son-in-law, gendre, m. 

soon, bientôt ; vite : as soon as, aus- 
sitôt que; dès que; sitôt que; 
soon after, peu après; as soon as 
possible, au plus tôt; so soon, si 

tôt. 

sooner. plutôt ; sooner = earlier, 

plus tôt. 
sorrow, douleur,/ 
sort, espèce,/ 
sought after, recherché, 
soûl. Ame,/ 
sound, bruit, m. 
source, source,/ 
90W, semer. 
Spain, Espagne,/ 
Spanish. Espagnol, m. 
spare, épargner (à). 
speak, parler. 
spécial, spécial, irr. 
spectacles, lunettes./, 
spectator. spectateur, m., irr. 
speech, compliment, m. 
spell. sort, m. 
spend, dépenser; passe. 



i8o 



VOCABULARY. 



spin, filer. 

spinner, fileuse,/ 

spirit, esprit, m. 

splendor, splendeur,/. 

spoil, gâter. 

spring, ressort, m. ; source, f. (of 

water) ; source, / (figuratively) . 
sprite, lutin, m. 
stage, théâtre, m. 
stain, tache,/ 
stairs, escalier, m. sing. 
stand (= endure), supporter. 
stand around, entourer, 
star, étoile, / / astre, m. 
start, * partir, irr. 
state (va.), rapporter. 
state (71.), état, m.; the State, 

l'Etat, m. 
statute, statut, m. 
stay, * rester; demeurer. 
steeple, clocher, m. 
step, pas, m. 
stick (vb.), appliquer, 
stick (n.), bâton, m. 
stifle, étouffer. 

still (adv.), encore; toujours. 
stone, pierre,/ 
stop, arrêter, transitive ; s'arrêter, 

intransitive. 
storm, orage, m. 
stormy, orageux, irr. 
story, histoire,// étage, m. (of a 

house) . 
straight (adv.), tout droit, 
strange, étrange. 
stratagem, stratagème, m. 
straw, paille, / 
stray from, s'éloigner (de). 
stream, ruisseau, m., irr. 
street, rue,/ 
strength, force,/ 
strewn (adj.), semé (de). 
strike, frapper. 



striking (adj.), frappant. 

stripped (adj.), dépouillé. 

strong, fort. 

studious, studieux, irr. 

study (vb.), étudier. 

study (11.), étude,/ 

stupid, bête. 

stupidity, bêtise,/ 

style, style, m. ; given style, genre 
donné, m. 

subject, sujet, m. 

sublime (adj.), sublime. 

sublime («.), sublime, m. 

sublimity, élévation,/ 

subsistence, subsistance,/ 

subtle, subtil. 

succeed, réussir; to succeed = corne 
a/ter, succéder (à) ; to succeed in, 
* parvenir [à], irr.; réussir [à]. 

success, succès, m. 

successive, successif, irr. 

successively, successivement. 

such, tel, irr. ; pareil, irr. ; such 
before adj. or adv., si; such a be- 
fore a noun, un tel, une telle; 
SUCh a before adj. or adv., un si, 
une si; such as, tel que, irr. 

suddenly, tout à coup. 

suffice, suffire, irr. 

sufficient, suffisant. 

suit, convenir (à), irr. 

suitor, prétendu, m. 

sulky, boudeur, irr. 

sum, somme,/ 

summit, sommet, m. 

sumptuous, fastueux, irr. 

sun, soleil, m. 

sup, souper. 

superb, superbe. 

superfluous, superflu. 

superior, supérieur. 

supernumerary, surnuméraire. 

superstition, superstition,/ 



VOCABULARY. 



liSi 



supper, souper, m. 

suppose (conj.), supposé que, sub- 

junctive. 
sure, sûr. 
surely, certes. 
surface, surface, f. 
surmount, surmonter. 
surpass, surpasser. 
surprise (n.), étonnement, m. 
surprised, étonné [de] ; to be sur- 

prised, s'étonner [de]. 
surround, entourer (de). 
surrounded by, entouré (de). 
survive, survivre (à), irr. 
suspect, se douter; soupçonner. 
suspend, suspendre. 
suspicion, soupçon, m. 
sustain, soutenir, irr. 
swallow, avaler. 
swear, jurer [de]. 
sweet, doux, irr. 
sweets, gâteaux, m. pi. 
Swiss (??.), Suisse, m. 
Switzerland, Suisse,/. 
sword, épée,/ 
symbol, image,/ 
symbolical, emblématique. 
syntax, syntaxe,/ 
System, méthode,/ 

table, table,/ 

tact, bonne grâce,/ 

take, prendre, irr. ; conduire, irr. ; 
mener (condact) ; porter (carry) ; 
it takes, falloir \_no prep.], irr., 
imper sonal ; to take back, rame- 
ner (persons) ; to take along, to 
take with or to take to, emmener 
(persons) ; to take possession of , 
s'emparer de ; se saisir de ; to take 
a walk, se promener; to take 
part in, prendre part à, irr. ; to 
take place, avoir lieu, irr. ; to 



take care not to, se bien garder 
de; to take communion, com- 
munier; to take the trip, faire 
la route, irr.; to take a journey, 
faire un voyage, irr. ; to take up 
one's résidence, se fixer (à); to 
take refuge, se réfugier. 

talent, talent, m. 

talk, parler; causer. 

talker, causeur, m., irr. 

tall, grand. 

tame, apprivoiser. 

taste (vb.), goûter (à). 

taste (n.), goût, m. 

tavern, auberge,/ 

teach, apprendre (à), irr. 

teacher, maître, m., irr. 

teaching, enseignement, m. 

tear («.), larme,/ 

tear away from, arracher (à); to 
tear into shreds, mettre en lam- 
beaux, irr. 

telegram, dépêche,/ 

tell, dire à [de], irr. 

temperate, modéré; sobre (of per- 
sons). 

temple, temple, m.; tower of the 
Temple, tour du Temple, / 

tempt, tenter [de]. 

ten, dix. 

tender, tendre. 

tenderly, tendrement. 

tenderness, tendresse,/ 

Terence, Térence. 

term, terme, m. 

terrible, terrible. 

terror, effroi, m. 

testament, testament, m. 

than, que; before numerals, de. 

thank, remercier. 

thanks to, grâce à. 

that (<n/j.), ce, irr. 

that (conj.), que. 



182 



VOCABULARY. 



that {dem. pron.), def., celui, celle, 
ceux, celles; indef., cela; that 
= it, ce. 

that {rel. pron.), qui, que; ail that 
or everything that, tout ce qui, 
tout ce que. 

the, le, la, les. 

théâtre, théâtre, m. 

their, leur, irr. 

theirs, le leur, la leur, les leurs {m. 
and f. pi.). 

then, alors {at that time) ; puis Cafter 
that) ; ensuite {next) ; donc {so, 
thereforé) . 

there, y; là {emphatic) \ il {exple- 
tivè) ; there is, there are, il y a ; 
voilà {emphatic) ; down there, là- 
bas. 

thèse {adj.), ces (m. and f. pi.). 

thèse {dem. pron.), ceux, celles ; 
ceux-ci, celles-ci {emphatic). 

Thibet, Thibet, m. 

thick, épais, irr. 

thing, chose,/ 

think, penser ; to think = believe, 
croire \_no prep.~\, irr.; to think 
of, penser (à). 

third, troisième. 

third (n.), tiers, m. 

thirteen, treize. 

thirteenth, treizième. 

thirty, trente. 

this {adj.), ce, irr. 

this {pron.), ceci. 

thoroughly: so thoroughly, telle- 
ment. 

those {adj.), ces {ni. and ' f. pi.). 

those {pron.), ceux, celles; ceux-là, 
celles-là {emphatic). 

though : even though, même. 

thought, pensée,/ 

thousand {adj.), mille {invariable). 

threaten, menacer [de]. 



three, trois. 

threshold, seuil, m. 

through, à travers. 

throw, jeter; to throw one's self 
back, se rejeter. 

thus, ainsi. 

thy, ton, irr. 

tie, attacher. 

time, temps, m. ; fois, / {répétition 
or occasion) ; a short time, peu de 
temps; at a time, de suite; from 
this time on, dès lors ; from time 
to time, de temps en temps; to 
hâve time to, avoir le temps [de], 
irr. 

times : those times, ces temps-là. 

tire one's self, se fatiguer. 

title, titre, m. 

to, à {signifying direction) ; pour 
{purpose); de {loose connective). 

to-day, aujourd'hui. 

together, ensemble. 

tolérant, tolérant. 

tolerate, supporter. 

tomb, tombeau, ?n., irr. 

to-morrow, demain. 

tongue, langue,/ 

too, aussi {also). 

too {adv. ofdegree), trop; too much 
or too many, trop (de). 

torment, tourmenter. 

torrid, brûlant. 

torturer, bourreau, m., irr. 

totally, absolument. 

touch, toucher. 

touching, touchant. 

toward or towards, vers {in the di- 
rection of); envers {with regard 
to). 

tradition, tradition,/ 

tragedy, tragédie,/ 

train {vb.), former. 

train {n.) } train, m. 



VOCABULARY. 



83 



traitor, traître, m., irr. 

trample upon, piétiner, transitive. 

translation, traduction,/ 

trap-door, trappe,/. 

travel, voyager. 

traveller, voyageur, m., irr. 

treacherous, perfide. 

treasure, trésor, m. 

treat, traiter. 

tree, arbre, m. 

tremble, trembler. 

tribe, tribu,/ 

triumph (vb.), triompher (de). 

triumph («.), triomphe, m. 

troop or troupe, troupe, / 

trouble (vb.), inquiéter. 

trouble (n.), peine, f.; to hâve 
trouble in, avoir de la peine [à], 
irr. 

true, vrai. 

truly, en vérité. 

trunk, tronc, ;//. (of trees) ; trompe, 
/ (0/ éléphants). 

trust, se fier (à). 

truth, vérité, // in truth, en vé- 
rité. 

try, s'efforcer [de]; essayer [de]. 

try on, essayer. 

tube, tuyau, m., irr. 

tulip, tulipe,/ 

turn (7^.), tourner; * se tourner, in- 
transitive. 

turn («.), tournure,/ 

tutor, précepteur, m. 

twelve, douze. 

twenty, vingt. 

two, deux. 

twofold, deux fois. 

type, type, ni. 

ugliness, laideur,/ 
ugly, laid. 
unceasingly, sans cesse. 



uncertain, incertain. 
uncle, oncle, m. 
unconquerable, invincible, 
under, sous, 
undergo, subir. 

understand, comprendre, irr. 
undertake, se livrer (à). 
uneasy, inquiet, irr. 
unexpected, inattendu. 
unfavorably, défavorablement. 
unfortunate (aa)'.), fâcheux, irr. 
unfortunate («.), malheureux, m., 

irr. 
ungrateful, ingrat. 
unhappy, malheureux, irr. 
unhealthy, malsain. 
unimportant, indifférent. 
union, union,/ 
unique, unique. 
unity, union,/ 
universal, universel, irr. 
universe, univers, m. 
unjust, injuste. 
unjustly, injustement. 
unless, à moins que, subjunctive. 
until (co?ij.), jusqu'à ce que, sub- 

junctive ; en attendant que, sub- 

junctive. 
until (prep.), jusque; until now, 

jusque-là. 
upon, sur. 
upright, droit. 

use, se servir (de), irr.; employer. 
useful, utile. 
useless, inutile, 
uselessly, inutilement, 
uselessness, désœuvrement, ni. 
usual, habituel, irr. 
usually, ordinairement. 
utter, proférer. 

vague, vague. 
vaguely, vaguement. 



VOCABULARY. 



vain, vain; in vain, vainement. 
valet, valet de chambre, m.; valet, 

m. 
valiant, vaillant. 
valise, valise, / 
vanish, s'évanouir. 
vanity, vanité,/ 
vanquish, vaincre, irr. 
variety, variété,/ 
various, divers. 
vary, varier, 
vast, vaste, 
vegetable, végétal, ;;/., irr.; légume, 

m. {plants used as food). 
Venetian, Vénitien, m., irr. 
Venice, Venise,/. 
venomous, venimeux, irr. 
verdure, verdure,/. 
véritable, véritable, 
verse, vers, ;;/. ; pièce of verse, pièce 

de vers,/ 
versification, versification,/ 
versifier, versificateur, m. 
very (ad/.), même Cafter the noun). 
very (adv.), très; bien; fort. 
vicar, curé, m. 
vice, vice, m. 
victim, victime,// victim of or to, 

en proie à. 
victorious, vainqueur. 
victory, victoire,/ 
Vienna, Vienne. 
view, vue, / ; with a view to, en 

vue de. 
vigor, vigueur,/ 
village, village, m. 
violet, violette,/ 
violin, violon, m. 
violinist, violiniste, m. 
Virgin, vierge,/ 
virtue, vertu,/ 
virtuoso, virtuose, m. 
virtuous, vertueux, irr. 



visit (vb.), visiter, 
visit (».)> visite»/ 
visitor, visiteur, m., irr. 
vocabulary, vocabulaire, m. 
voice, voix,/ 
volcano, volcan, ;//. 
VOWel, voyelle, / 
voyage, voyage,. m. 

wages, gages, m. pi. 

wait for, attendre. 

wake up, se réveiller. 

walk (vb.), marcher. 

walk (n.), promenade,/ 

wall, mur, m. 

want, vouloir \_no prep.~], irr. 

war, guerre,/ 

warm, chaud. 

wash, laver. 

waste, perdre. 

watch, montre,/ 

water (vb.), arroser. 

water (n.), eau,/, irr. 

wave, flot, m. 

way, chemin, m.; route,/ ; on the 
way, en route or en chemin; in 
such a way, de telle sorte; ail 
the way, tout la route. »• 

weak, faible. 

weakness, faiblesse,/ 

wealth, richesse,/ 

wear, porter; to wear a way, user. 

weary, se lasser (de), intransitive ,\ 
fatiguer, transitive. 

weather, temps, ;;/. 

wed, épouser. 

week, semaine,/ 

weep, pleurer. 

weigh, peser. 

well (adv.), bien; as well as, aussi 
bien que. 

well {interjection*), eh bien. 

what (adj. : int.), quel, irr. 



VOCABULARY. 



185 



what (ad/. : indef), quel, irr. 
what (pron. : int.), qu'est-ce qui 

(subj.); que or qu'est-ce que 
. (dir. obj.) ; quoi (obj. of prep.) ; 

ce qui, ce que (in indirect ques- 
tions). 
what (prou. : rel.), ce qui, ce que. 
what (interjection), eh quoi. 
whatever (adj.), quel . . . que, 

quelle . . . que, quels . . . que, 

quelles . . . que. 
whatever (pron.), quoi que. 
wheat, blé, m. 
wheel, rouage, ni. 
when, quand; lorsque (not used in 

direct qitestions) . 
whence, d'où. 
whether, que . . . que; whether = 

if, si. 
which (adj. : int.), quel. 
which (pron. : int.), lequel, laquelle, 

lesquels, lesquelles. 
which (pron.: rel.), qui (subj.); 

que (obj. ofverb) ; lequel, laquelle, 

lesquels, lesquelles (obj. of prep?) ; 

of which, dont; after which, 

après quoi. 
while, pendant que; before présent 

participa, en; a little while, un 

peu. 
whilst, tandis que. 
whirlwind, tempête, /. 
white, blanc, irr. 
who (int.), qui or qui est-ce qui. 
Who (rel.), qui. 
whoever, quiconque. 
whole (adj.), tout, toute; the whole, 

tout le, toute la. 
whole (n.), le tout. 
wholly, tout à fait. 
whom (int.), qui or qui est-ce que. 
whom (rel.), que (obj. ofverb); 

qui (obj. of verb, antécédent un- 



expressed) ; qui (obj. of prep.) ; 
lequel, laquelle, lesquels, les- 
quelles. 

whose, dont; de qui; duquel, de 
laquelle, desquels, desquelles. 

why, pourquoi. 

wicked, méchant. 

widow, veuve,/; 

widower, veuf, m. 

wife, femme,/ 

wild, féroce ; wild = skittish, ombra- 
geux, irr. 

will ( = zvish, want, be willing), vou- 
loir \jio prep.\ irr. 

willing : to be willing, vouloir bien 
[110 prep. ~\, irr. 

wind, vent, m. 

windo w, fenêtre, / / window gîass, 
vitres,///. 

wine, vin, m.; wine cellar, cave,/. 

winter, hiver, m. 

wise, sage. 

wish (vb.), vouloir {no prep. \ irr. ; 
souhaiter \_no prep.~\. 

wish (n.), vœu, m. 

wit (n.), esprit, ;;/. ; a wit, bel 
esprit, 711., irr.; homme d'esprit, 
m. 

with, avec. 

withdraw, se retirer. 

within, en. 

without (prep.), sans. 

without (conj.), sans que. 

witty, spirituel, irr. 

WOlf, loup, m. 

woman, femme,/ 

wonder, merveille, / / to do won- 
ders, faire merveille, irr. 

wonderful, admirable. 

WOOd, bois, m.; WOOds, bois, m. pi. 

WOOl, laine,/ 

word, mot, m. : parole, // in a 
word, en somme. 



i86 



VOCABULARY. 



words : beyond words, au-dessus 

des paroles. 
work (va.), travailler. 
WOrk (n.), travail, m., irr.; ouvrage, 

m. ; work = literary production, 

ouvrage, m., or œuvre, f. ; at 

work, à l'œuvre. 
world, monde, m. ; the New World, 

le nouveau Monde, 
worldly, mondain. 
worn out, exténué (de). 
worry, s'inquiéter (de). 
worship, culte, m. 
worst, pire, 
worth. (n.), valeur, / 
worth : to be worth, valoir {no 

prep.~\, irr. 
worthy, digne. 
wound, blesser. 
wounded (ad;.), blessé. 
wretchedness, misère, / 
wring from, arracher (à). 
wrinkled, ridé. 
Write, écrire, irr. 
writer, écrivain, m.; prose writer, 



prosateur, m. ; a writer of com- 

edy, auteur comique, m. 
writing, écriture,/. 
wrong, tort, m. ; to be wrong, avoir 

tort, irr. 

year, an, m. (coitsidered as a unit); 
année, f. (considered in ail its 
parts) . 

yellow, jaune. 

yes, oui. 

yesterday, hier. 

yet, encore; yet = nevertheless, pour- 
tant; cependant. 

yield, céder. 

yonder, là-bas. 

young, jeune. 

your, votre, irr. 

yours, le vôtre, la vôtre, les vôtres 
(m. andf.pl.). 

youth, jeunesse,// youth = young 
man, jeune homme, m. 

zeal, ardeur,/ 



ADVERTISEMENTS. 



Ibeaîb's flfcobern Xanguage Séries» 

FRENCH GRAMMARS AND READERS. 

Edgren's Compendious French Grammar. Adapted to the needs of the 
beginner and the advanced student. $1.12. 

Edgren's French Grammar, Part I. For those who wish to learn quickly 
to read French. 35 cts. 

Fraser and Squair's French Grammar. Complète and practical. For be- 
ginners and advanced students. $1.12. 

Grandgent's Essentials of French Grammar. With numerous exercises 
and illustrative sentences. $1.00. 

Grandgent's Short French Grammar. Phonetic help in pronunciation. 
Exercises, see below. 60 cts. 

Grandgent's French Lessons and Exercises. Necessarily used with the 
Short French Grammar. First Year's Course for High 
Schools, No 1 ; First Year's Course for Collèges, No. 1. 15 cts. each. 

Grandgent's French Lessons and Exercises. First Year's Course for 
Grammar Schools. 25 cts. Second Year 's Course for Grammar 
Schools. 30 cts. 

Grandgent's Materials for French Composition. Five pamphlets based on 
La Pipe de fean Bart, La dernière classe, Le Siège de Berlin, 
Peppino, L'Abbé Constantin, respectively. Each, 12 cts. 

Grandgent's French Composition. Élementary, progressive and varied 
sélections, with full notes and vocabulary. 50 cts. 

Bouvet's Exercises in Syntax and Composition. With notes and vocab- 
ulary. 75 cts. 

Clarke's French Subjunctive Mood. An inductive treatise, with exer- 
cises. 50 cts. 

Hennequin's French Modal Auxiliaries. With exercises in composition 
and conversation. 50 cts. 

Kimball's Materials for French Composition. Based on Colomba, for 
second year's work ; on La Belle-Nivernaise, and also one on La 
Tulipe Noire, for third year's work. Each 12 cts. 

Storr's Hints on French Syntax. With exercises. 30 cts. 

Marcou's French Review Exercises. With notes and vocabulary. 20 cts. 

Houghton's French by Reading. Begins with interlinear, and gives in the 
course of the book the whole of élementary grammar, with reading 
matter, notes, and vocabulary. $1.12. 

Hotchkiss's Le Premier' Livre de Français. Cônversational introduction to 
French, for youngpupils. Boards. Illustrated. 79 pages. 35 cts. 

Fontaine's Livre de Lecture et de Conversation. Combines Reading, 
Conversation, and Grammar, with vocabulary. 90 cts. 

Fontaine's Lectures Courantes. Can followtheabove. Contains Reading, 
Conversation, and Ensrlish Exercises based on the text. £1.00. 

Lyon and Larpent's Primary French Translation Book. An easy begin- 
ning reader, with very full notes, vocabulary, and English exer- 
cises based on the latter part of the text. 60 cts. 

Super's Preparatory French Reader. Complète and graded sélections of 
interesting French. with notes and vocabulary. 70 cts. 

French Fairy Taies (Joynes). With notes, vocabulary, and English exer- 
cises based on the text. 35 cts. 

Davies's Elementary Scientific French Reader. Confined to Scientifïc 
French. With notes and vocabulary. 40 cts. 

Heath's French-English and English-French Dictionary. Fully adéquate 
for the ordinary wants of students. Retail price, £1.50. 



Ibeatb's /iDofcern Xanauaae Séries* 

ELEMENTARY FRENCH TEXTS. 

Mairêt's La Tâche du Petit Pierre. Notes, vocabulary, and English 
exercises by Professor Super, Dickinson Collège. 35 cts. 

Bruno's Tour de la France par deux Enfants. Notes and vocabulary by 
C. Fontaine, High Schools, Washington, D.C. 45 cts. 

Jules Verne's L'Expédition de la Jeune Hardie. With notes, vocabulary, 
and appendixes by W. S. Lyon. 25 cts. 

Gervais's Un Cas de Conscience. With notes, vocabulary, and appendixes 
by R. P. Horsley. 25 cts. 

Génin's Le Petit Tailleur Bouton. With notes, vocabulary, and appendixes 
by W. S. Lyon. 25 cts. 

Assolant's Une Aventure du Célèbre Pierrot. With notes, vocabulary, 
and appendixes by R. E. Pain. 25 cts. 

Muller's Les Grandes Découvertes Modernes. Photography and Teleg- 
raphy. With notes, vocabulary, and appendixes by F. E. B. 
Wale. 25 cts. 

Récits de Guerre et de Révolution. Selected and edited, with notes, vocab- 
ulary, and appendixes by B. Minssen. 25 cts. 

Bruno's Les Enfants Patriotes. With notes, vocabulary, and appendixes 
by W. S. Lyon. 25 cts. 

Bedollière's La Mère Michel et son Chat. With notes, vocabulary, and 
appendixes by W. S. Lyon. 25 cts. 

Legouvé and Labiche's La Cigale chez les Fourmis. A comedy in one 
act, with notes by W. H. Witherby. 20 cts. 

Labiche and Martin's Le Voyage de M. Perrichon. A comedy ; notes and vo- 
cabulary by Professor Wells of the University of the South. 30 cts. 

Labiche and Martin's La Poudre aux Yeux. Comedy ; notes and vocabu- 
lary by Professor Wells of the University of the South. 30 cts. 

Dumas's L'Evasion du Duc de Beaufort. Notes by D. B. Kitchen. 215 cts. 

Dumas's Monte-Cristo. With notes by I. H. B. Spiers, Wm. Penn Char- 
ter School, Philadelphia. 30 cts. 

Assollant's Récits de la Vieille France. With notes by E. B. Wauton. 
25 cts. 

Berthet's Le Pacte de Famine. With notes by B. B. Dickinson. 25 cts. 

Erckmann-Chatrian's L'Histoire d'un Paysan. With notes by W. S. 

Lyon. 25 cts. 
France's Abeille. With notes by C. P. Lebon of the Boston English High 

School. 25 cts. 
La Main Malheureuse. With complète and detailed vocabulary, by H. A. 

Guerber, Nyack, N. Y. 25 cts. 
Enault's Le Chien du Capitaine. Notes and vocabulary, by C. Fontaine, 

Director of French, High Schools, Washington, D. C. 3^ cts. 
Trois Contes Choisis par Daudet. {Le Siège de Berlin, La dernière Classe, 

La Mule du Pape.) With notes by Professor Sanderson. 15 cts. 
Erckmann-Chatrian's Le Conscrit de 1813. Notes and vocabulary, by Pro- 
fessor Super, Dickinson Collège. 45 cts. 
Sélections for Sight Translation. Fifty fîfteen-line extracts compiled by 

Miss Bruce of the High School, Newton, Mass. 15 cts 
Laboulaye's Contes Bleus. With notes and vocabulary by C. Fontaine, 

Central High School, Washington, D. C. 35 cts. 
Malot's Sans Famille. With notes and vocabulary by I. H. B. Spiers of 

the Wm. Penn Charter School, Philadelphia. 40 cts. 



Ibeatb's /iDoDetn Xanguage Séries» 

INTERMEDIATE FRENCH TEXTS. (Partial List.) 

Lamartine's Scènes de la Révolution Française. With Notes by Professor 

Super of Dickinson Collège. 35'cts. 
Lamartine's Graziella. With introduction and notes by Professor F. M. 

Warren of Adelbert Collège. 35 cts. 

Lamartine's Jeanne d'Arc. Edited by Professor Barrère, Royal Military 

Academy, Wooiwich, England. 30 cts. 
Michelet's Sélections. With notes by Dr. C. H. C. Wright, Harvard 

University. co cts. 
Victor Hugo's La Chute. From Les Misérables. Edited with notes by 

Professor Huss of Princeton. 25 cts. 
Victor Hugo's Bug Jargal. With notes by Professor Boïelle of Dulwich 

Collège, England. 40 cts. 
Champfleury's Le Violon de Faience. With notes by Professor Clovis 

Bévenot, Mason Collège, England. 25 cts. 
Gautier's Voyage en Espagne. With notes by II. C. Steel. 25 cts. 
Balzac's Le Curé de Tours. With notes by Professor C. R. Carter, Welling- 
ton Collège, England. 2 ; cts. 
Balzac's Cinq Scènes de la Comédie Humaine. With notes by Professor 

B. W. Wells. 40 cts. 
Daudet's La Belle-Nivernaise. With notes by Professor Boïelle of Dulwich 

Collège, England. 25 cts. 
Theuriet's Bigarreau. With notes by C. Fontaine, Washington, D. C. 

25 cts. 
Maupassant's Huit Contes Choisis. With notes by E. M. White, High 

School, Worcester, Mass. 25 cts. 
Advanced Sélections for Sight Translation. Extracts, twenty to fifty lines 

long, compiled by Mme. T. F. Colin of Miss Baldwin's School, 

Bryn Mawr, Pa. 15 cts. 
Dumas's La Question d'Argent. Comedy edited by G. N. Henning, 

Assistant in French, Harvard University. 30 cts. 
Lesage's Gil Blas. Abbreviated and edited. with introduction and notes, 

by Professor Cohn of Columbia University, and Professor San- 

derson of Yale University. 40 cts. 
Sarcey's Le Siège de Paris. With introduction and notes by Professor 

I. H. B. Spiers of William Penn Charter School, Philadelphie 

35 cts. 
Loti's Pêcheur d'Islande. With notes by R. J. Morich. 30 cts. 
Beaumarchais's Le Barbier de Séville. Comedy with introduction and 

notes by Professor Spiers of William Penn Charter School. 25 cts. 
Molière's Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme. With introduction and notes by 

Professor Warren of Adelbert Collège. 30 cts. 
Molière's L'Avare. With introduction and notes by Professor Levi of the 

University of Michigan. 35 cts. 
Racine's Esther. With introduction, notes, and appendixes by Professor 

I. H. B. Spiers of William Penn Charter School. 25 cts. 
Racine's Athalie. With introduction and notes by Professor Eggert of 

Ynnderbilt Universitv. 30 cts. 
Racine's Andromaque. With introduction and notes by Professor B. W. 

Wells of the University of the South. 30 cts. 



Ibeatb's fï&ofcetn Xanguage Séries* 

INTERMEDIATE FRENCH TEXTS. (Partial List.) 
Dumas's La Tulipe Noire. With notes by Professor C. Fontaine, Central 

High School, Washington, D. C. 40 cts. With vocabulary, 

Socts. 
Erckmann-Chatrian's Waterloo. Abridged and annotated by Professor 

O. B. Super of Dickinson Collège. 35 cts. 
About's Le Roi des Montagnes. Edited by Professor Thomas Logie. 40 cts. 
Pailleron's Le Monde où l'on s'ennuie. A comedy with notes by Professor 

Pendleton of Bethany Collège, W. Va. 30 cts. 
Souvestre's Le Mari de Mme de Solange. With notes by Professor Super 

of Dickinson Collège. 20 cts. 
Historiettes Modernes, Vol. I. Short modem stories, selected and edited, 

with notes, by C. Fontaine, Director of French in the High 

Schools of Washington, D. C. 60 cts. 
Historiettes Modernes, Vol. II. Short stories as above. 60 cts. 
Fleurs de France. A collection of short and choice French stories of récent 

date with notes by C. Fontaine, Washington. D. C. 60 cts. 
Sandeau's Mlle de la Seiglière. With introduction and notes by Professor 

Warren of Adelbert Collège. 30 cts. 
Souvestre's Un Philosophe sous les Toits. With notes, by Professor 

Fraser of the University of Toronto, ko cts. With vocabulary. 

80 cts. 
Souvestre's Les Confessions d'un Ouvrier. With notes by Professor Super 

of Dickinson Collège. 30 cts. 
Augier's Le Gendre de M. Poirier. One of the masterpieces of modem 

comedy. Edited by Professor Wells of the University of the 

South. 25 cts. 
Scribe's Bataille de Dames Edited by Professor B. W. Wells. 30 cts. 
Scribe's Le Verre d'eau. Edited by Professor C. A. Eggert. 30 cts. 
Mérimée's Colomba. With notes by Professor J. A. Fontaine of Bryn 

Mawr Collège. 35 cts. With vocabulary, 45 cts. 
Mérimée's Chronique du Règne de Charles IX. With notes by Professor 

P. Desages, Cheltenham Collège, England. 25 cts. 
Musset's Pierre et Camille. Edited by Professor O. B. Super. 20 cts. 
Jules Verne's Tour du Monde en quatre vingts jours. Notes by Professor 

Edgren, University of Nebraska. 35 cts. 
Jules Verne's Vingt mille lieues sous la mer. Notes by C. Fontaine, 

High School, Washington, D.C. 00 cts. 
Sand's La Mare au Diable. With notes by Professor F. C. de Sumichrast 

of Harvard. 25 cts. 
Sand's La Petite-Fadette. With notes by F. Aston-Binns, Balliol Collège, 

Oxford, England. 30 cts. 
De Vigny's Le Cachet Rouge. With notes by Professor Fortier of Tulane 

University. 20 cts. 
De Vigny's Le Canne de Jonc. Edited by Professor Spiers, with Introduc- 
tion by Professor Cohn of Columbia University. 40 cts. 
Halévy's L'Abbé Constantin. Edited with notes, by Professor Thomas 

Logie. 30 cts. With vocabulary, 40 cts. 
Thiers's Expédition de Bonaparte en Egypte. With notes by Professor 

C. Fabregou, Collège of the City of New York. 25 cts. 
Gautier's Jettatura. With introduction and notes by A. Schinz, Ph.D. 

of Bryn' Mawr Collège. 30 cts. 
Guerber's Marie-Louise With vocabulary. 00 cts. 



Ibeatb's flDofcern Xanguage Séries» 

Introduction priées are quoted tinless otherwise stated. 

ADVANCED FRENCH TEXTS. 

De Vigny's Cinq Mars. An abbreviated édition with introduction and notes 

by Prof essor Sankey of Harrow School, England. 70 cts. 
Zola's La Débâcle. Abbreviated and annotated by Professer Wells, of the 
University of the South. 70 cts. 

Choix d'Extraits de Daudet. Selected and edited with notes by William 
Price, Instructor in Yale University. 20 cts. 

Sept Grands Auteurs du XIXe Siècle. Lectures in easy French on Lamar- 
tine, Hugo, de Vigny, de Musset, Gautier, Mérimée, Coppée, by 
Professor Fortier of Tulane University. 60 cts. 

French Lyrics. Selected and edited with notes by Professor Bowen of the 
University of Ohio. 60 cts. 

Lamartine's Méditations. Selected and edited by Professor Curme of 
Northwestern University. 75 cts. 

Victor Hugo's Hernani. With introduction and notes by Professor Matzke 
of Leland Stanford University. 60 cts. 

Victor Hugo's Ruy Blas. With introduction and notes by Professor Gar- 
ner of the U. S. Naval Academy, Annapolis. 65 cts. 

Corneille's Le Cid. With introduction and notes by Professor Warren of 
Adelbert Collège. 164 pages. 30 cts. 

Corneille's Polyeucte. With introduction and notes by Professor Fortier 
of Tulane University. 30 cts. 

Molière's Le Misanthrope. With introduction and notes by Professor 
C. A. Eggert. 30 cts. 

Molière's Les Femmes Savantes. With introduction and notes by Pro- 
fessor Fortier of Tulane University. 30 cts. 

Molière's Le Tartuffe. With foot-notes by Professor Gasc, England. 25 cts. 

Molière's Le Médecin Malgré Lui. With foot-notes by Professor Gasc, 
England. 15 cts. 

Molière's Les Précieuses Ridicules. With introduction and notes by 
Professor Toy of the University of North Carolina. 25 cts. 

Piron's La Métromanie. Comedy in verse, with notes by Professor Delbos, 
England. 40 cts. 

Warren's Primer of French Literature. An historical handbook. 75 cts. 

Taine's Introduction à l'Histoire de la Littérature Anglaise. With essay 
on Taine by Irving Babbitt, Harvard University. 20 cts. 

Duval's Histoire de la Littérature Française. In easy French. From 
earliest times to the présent. $i'.oo. 

VOltaire's Prose. Selected and edited by Professors Cohn and Woodward 
of Columbia University. $1.00. 

French Prose of the XVHth Century. Selected and edited by Professor 
Warren of Adelbert Collège. $1.00. 

La Triade Française. Poems of Lamartine, Musset, and Hugo, with in- 
troductions and notes by L. Both-Hendriksen. 75 cts. 

Complète Catalogue of Modem Language Tcxts sent on reauest. 



Ibeatb's flDofcern Xanguage Séries» 

GERMAN GRAMMARS AND READERS. 

Nix'S Erstes deutsches SchulbUCh. For primary classes. Boards. Illustrated. 
202 pages. 35 cts. 

Joynes-Meissner Germaa Grammar. A working Grammar, elementary, 
yet complète. Half leather. #1.12. 

Alternative Exercises. Can be used, for the sake of change, instead of those in 
the Joynes-Meissner itself. 54 pages. 15 cts. 

Joynes's Shorter Germaa Grammar. Part I of the above. Half leather. 80 cts. 

HarriS'S Germail Lessons. Elementary Grammar and Exercises for a short 
course, or as introductoxy to advanced grammar. Cloth. 60 cts. 

SheldOIl'S Short German Grammar. For those who want to begin reading as 
soon as possible, and hâve had traming in some other languages. Cloth. 60 cts. 

fiabbitt's German at Sight. A syllabus of elementary grammar, with sugges- 
tions and practice work for reading at sight. Paper. 10 cts. 

Faulnaber's One Year Course in German. A brief synopsis of elementary 

grammar, with exercises for translation. Cloth. 60 cts. 

MeiSSner'S German Conversation. Not a phrase book nor a method book, but 
a scheme of rational conversation. Cloth. 65 cts. 

HarriS'S German Composition. Elementary, progressive, and varied sélections, 
with f ull notes and vocabulary. Cloth. 50 cts. 

Eatfield's Materials for German Composition, Based on Immensee and on 

Hàher alsdie Kirche. Paper. 33 pages. Each 12 cts. 

Horning's Materials for German Composition. Based on Der Schwiegersohn. 

32 pages. 15 cents. 
StUven'S Praktische Anf angSgriinde. A conversational beginning book with 
vocabulary and grammatical appendix. Cloth. 203 pages. 70 cts. 

Foster'sGeschichtenundMârchen. The easiest reading for young children. 
Cloth. 40 cts. 

Gnerber'sMârchenundErzânlungren, I. With vocabulary and questions in 

- German on the text. Cloth. 162 pages. 60 cts. 

Guerber's Marchen nnd ErzShlungen, H. With vocabulary. Follows the 
above or serves as independent reader. Cloth. 202 pages. 65 cts. 

Joynes's German Reader. Progressive, both in text and notes, has a complète 
vocabulary, also Enghsh Exercises. Half leather, 90 cts. Cloth, 75 cts. 

Detttsch'S Colloquial German Reader. Anecdotes, tables of phrases and idioms, 
and sélections in prose and verse, with notes and vocabulary. Cloth. 90 cts. 

Boisen's German Prose Reader. Easy and interesting sélections of graded prose, 
with notes, and an Index which serves as a voca'bulary. Cloth. 90 cts. 

HUSS'S German Reader. Easy and sîowly progressive sélections in prose and 
verse. With especial attention to cognâtes. Cloth. 233 pages. 70 cents. 

Spanhoof d's Lehrtmch der deutschen Sprache. Grammar, conversation and 

exercises, with vocabulary for beginners. Cloth. 312 pages. #1.00. 

Eeatn's German-English and English-German Dictionary. Fully adéquate 

for the ordinary wants of the student. Cloth. Retail price, $1.50. 
Complète Catalogue of Modem Language Texts sent on request. 



Deatb's /IDofcern Xanguage Séries, 

ELEMENTARY GERMAN TEXTS. 

Grimm's Màrchen and Schiller 's Der Taucher (van der Smissen). Notes 
and vocabulary. Màrchen in Roman type. 6s cts. 

Andersen's Màrchen (Super). Easy German, iree from antiquated and 
dialectical expressions. With notes and vocabulary. 70 cts. 

Andersen's Bilderbuch ohne Bilder. With notes and vocabulary by Dr. 
Wilhehn Bernhardt, Washington, D. C. 30 cts. 

Leander's Tràumereien. Fairy taies with notes and vocabulary by Professor 
van der Smissen, of the University of Toronto. 40 cts. 

Volkmann's (Leander's) Kleine Geschichten. Four very easy taies, with 
notes and vocabulary by Dr. Wilhelm Bernhardt. 30 cts. 

Easy Sélections for Sight Translation. (Deering.) 15 cts. 
Storm's Immensee. With notes and vocabulary by Dr. Wilhelm Bernhardt, 
Washington, D. C. 30 cts. 

Heyse's L'Arrabbiata. With notes and vocabulary by Dr. Wilhelm Bern- 
hardt, Washington, D. C. 25 cts. 
Von Hillern's Hoher als die Kirche. With notes by S. W. Clary, and with 

a vocabulary. 25 cts. 
Hauff's Der Zwerg Nase. With introduction by Professor Grandgent of 

Harvard University. No notes. 15 cts. 
Hauff's Das kalte Herz. Notes and vocabulary by Professor van der 

Smissen, University of Toronto. (Roman type.) 40 cts. 
Ali Baba and the Forty Thieves. W 7 ith introduction by Professor Grand- 
gent of Harvard University. No notes. 20 cts. 
Schiller's Der Taucher. With notes and vocabulary by Professor Van der 

Smissen of the University of Toronto. 12 cts. 
Schiller's Der Neffe als Onkel. Notes and vocabulary by Professor Beres- 

ford-Webb, Wellington Collège, England. 30 cts. 
Baumbach's Waldnovellen. Six little stories, with notes and vocabulary 

by Dr. Wilhelm Bernhardt. 35 cts. 
Spyri'S Rosenresli. With notes and vocabulary for beginners, by Hélène H. 

Boll, of the High School, New Haven, Conn. 25 cts. 
Spyri'S Moni der Geissbub. With vocabulary by H. A. Guerber. 25 cts. 
Zschokke's Der zerbrochene Krug. With notes, vocabulary and English 

exercises by Professor E. S. Joynes. 25 cts. 
Baumbach's Nicotiana und andere Erzahlungen. Five stories with notes 

and vocabulary by Dr. Wilhelm Bernhardt. 30 cts. 
Elz's Er ist nient eifersuchtig. With vocabulary by Professor B. W. 

Wells. 25 cts. 
Carmen Sylva's Aus meinem KSnigreich. Five short stories, with notes 

and vocabulary by Dr. Wilhelm Bernhardt. 35 cts. 
Gerstacker's Germelshausen. With notes by Professor Osthaus of Indiana 

University, and with vocabulary. 25 cts. 
Benedix's Nein. With notes, vocabulary, and English exercises by A. W. 

Spanhoofd. 25 cts. 
Benedix's Der Prozess. With notes, vocabulary, and list of irregular 

veros bv Professor R. W. Wells. 20 cts. 
Zschokke's Das Wirtshaus zu Cransac. With introduction, notes and 

English exercises by Prof. E. S. Joynes, So. Carolina Collège. 

30 cts. 



Ibeatb's fl&ofcern Xanauage Séries, 

INTERMEDIATE GERMAN TEXTS. (Partial List.) 

Arnold's Fritz auf Ferien. With notes by A. W. Spanhoofd, Director of 
German in the High Schools of Washington, D.C. 20 cts. 

Heyse's Das Madchen von Treppi. With introduction, notes, and Eng- 
lish exercises by Professor Joynes. 30 cts. 

otille Wasser. ïhree taies by Crâne, Hoffmann, and Wildenbruch, with 
notes and vocabulary by Dr. Wilhelm Bernhardt. 35 cts. 

Seidel's Leberecht Huhnchen. With notes and vocabulary by Professor 
Spanhoofd, High School, Washington, D.C. 30 cts.- 

Auf der Sonnenseite. Humorous stories by Seidel, Sudermann, and others, 
with notes and vocabulary by Dr. Wilhelm Bernhardt. 35 cts. 

Frommel's Eingeschneit. With notes and vocabulary by Dr. Wilhelm 
Bernhardt. 30 cts. 

Keller's Kleider machen Leute. With notes and vocabulary by M. B. 
Lambert, Brooklyn High School. 35 cts. 

Baumbach's Die Nonna. With notes and vocabulary by Dr. Wilhelm Bern- 
hardt, Washington, D. C. 30 cts. 

Riehl's Culturgesclrichtliche Novellen. See two following texts. 

Riehl's Der Fluch der Schdnheit. With notes by Professor Thomas, 
Columbia University. 25 cts. 

RiehPs Das Spielrnannskind ; Der stumme Ratsherr. Two stories with 
notes by A. F. Eaton, Colorado Collège. 25 cts. 

Ebner-Eschenbach's Die Freiherren von Gemperlein. Edited by Professor 
Hohlfeld, Vanderbilt University. 30 cts. 

Freytag's Die Journalisten. With notes by Professor Toy 01 the Uni- 
versity of North Carolina. 30 cts. 

Schiller's Das Lied von der Glocke. With notes and vocabulary by Pro- 
fessor Chamberlin of Denison University. 20 cts. 

Schiller's Jungfrau von Orléans. With introduction and notes by Pro- 
fessor Wells of the University of the South, lllustrated. 60 cts. 

Schiller's Maria Stuart. With introduction and notes by Professor 
Rhoades, University of Illinois, lllustrated. 60 cts. 

Schiller's Wilhelm Tell. With introduction and notes by Prof. Deering, 
of Western Reserve Univ. lllus. 50 cts. With vocab., 75 cts. 

Schiller's Ballads. With introduction and notes by Professor Johnson of 
Bowdoin Collège, 60 cts. 

Baumbach's Der Schwiegersohn. With notes by Dr. Wilhelm Bernhardt. 
30 cts. ; with vocabulary, 40 cts. 

Onkel und Nichte. Story by Oscar Faulhaber. No notes. 20 cts. 

Benedix's Plautus und Terenz ; Die Sonntagsjâger. Comédies edited by 
Professor Wells of the University of the South. 25 cts. 

François's Phosphorus Hollunder. With notes by Oscar Faulhaber. 20 cts. 

Moser's Kopnickerstrasse 120. A comedy with introduction and notes by 
Professor Wells of the University of the South. 30 cts. 

Moser's Der Bibliothekar. Comedy with introduction and notes by Pro- 
fessor Wells of the University of the South. 30 cts. 

Drei kleine Lustspiele. Giïnstige Vorzeichen, Der Prozess, Einer muss hei~ 
raten. Edited with notes by Professor Wells of the University 
of the South. 30 cts. 

Helbig's Kombdie auf der Hochschule. With introduction and notes by 
Professor Wells of the University of the South. 30 cts. 



Ibeaîb's /ifcofcern Xangua^e Séries, 

INTERMEDIATE GERMAN TEXTS. (Partial List.) 

Schiller'S Der Geisterseher. Part I. With notes and vocabulary by Pro- 

fessor Joynes, So. Carolina Collège. 30 cts. 
Sélections for Sight Translation. Fifty fifteen-line extracts compilée! by 

Mme. G. F. Mondan, High School, Bridgeport, Conn. 15 cts. 
Sélections for Advanced Sight Translation. Compiled by Rose Chamber- 

lin, Bryn Mawr Collège. 15 cts. 

Benedix's Die Hochzeitsreise. With notes by Natalie Schiefferdecker, of 

Abbott Academy. 25 cts. 
Aus Herz und Welt. Two stories, with notes by Dr. Wilhelm Bernhardt. 

25 cts. 
Novelletten-Bibliothek. Vol. I. Six stories, selected and edited with notes 

by Dr. Wilhelm Bernhardt. 60 cts. 
Novelletten-Bibliothek. Vol II. Six stories selected and edited as above. 

60 cts. 

Unter dem Christbaum. Five Christmas Stories by Hélène Stôkl, with 

notes by Dr. Wilhelm Bernhardt. 60 cts. 
Hoffman'S Historische Erzàhlungen. Four important periods of German 

history, with notes by Professor Beresford-Webb of Wellington 

Collège, England. 25 cts. 
Wildenbruch's Das edle Blut. Edited with notes by Professor F. G. G. 

Schmidt, University of Oregon. 20 cts. 
Wildenbruch's Der Letzte. With notes by Professor F. G. G. Schmidt, of 

the University of Oregon. 215 cts. 
Wildenbruch's Harold. With introduction and notes by Professor Eggert. 

35 cts - 

Stifter's Das Haidedorf. A little prose idyl, with notes by Professor 
Heller of Washington University, St. Louis. 20 cts. 

Chamisso's Peter Schlemihl. With notes by Professor Primer of the Uni- 
versity of Texas. 25 cts. 

Eichendorff's Aus dem Leben eines Taugenichts. With notes by Pro- 
fessor Osthaus of Indiana University. 35 cts. 

Heine's Die Harzreise. With notes by Professor Van Daell of the Massa- 
chusetts Institute of Technology. 25 cents. 

Jensen's Die braune Erica. With notes by Professor Joynes of South 
Carolina Collège. 25 cts. 

Holberg's Niels Klim. Sélections edited by E. H. Babbitt of Columbia 
Collège. 20 cts. 

Lyrics and Ballads. Selected and edited with notes by Professor Hatfield, 
Northwestern University. 75 cts. 

Meyer's Gustav Adolfs Page. With full notes by Professor Heller of 
Washington University. 2c cts. 

Sudermann's Der Katzensteg. Abridged and edited by Professor Wells 
of the Universitv of the South. 40 cts. 

Dahn's Sigwalt und Sigridh. With notes by Professor Schmidt of the 
University of Oregon. 25 cts. 

Keller's Romeo und Julia auf dem Dorfe. With introduction and notes 
bv Professor W. A. Adams of Dartmouth Collège. 30 cts. 

Hauff's Lichtenstein. Abridged. With notes by Professor Vogel, Mass. 
Inst. of Technology. 00 cts. 



Ibeatb's /IDofcern XanGuage Séries» 

ADVANCED GERMAN TEXTS. 

Scheffel's Trompeter von Sàkkingen. Abridged and edited by Professor 
Wenckebach of Wellesley Collège, lllustrated. 65 cts. 

Scheffel's Ekkehard. Abridged and edited by Professor Carlâ Wenckebach 
of Wellesley Collège, lllustrated. 70 cts. 

Freytag's Soll und Haben. Abridged. With notes by Professor Files of 
Bowdoin Collège. 65 cts. 

Freytag's Aus den Kreuzugen. With notes by Professor Shumway, 
University of Pennsylvania. 00 cents. 

Freytag's Aus dem Staat Friedrichs des Grossen. With notes by Pro- 
fessor Hagar of Owens Collège, England. 25 cts. 

Freytag's Aus dem Jahrhundert des grossen Krieges. Edited by Pro- 
fessor Rhoades, of the University of Illinois. 35 cts. 

Freytag's Rittmeister von Alt-Rosen. With introduction and notes by 
Professor Hatfield of Northwestern University. 60 cts. 

Lessing's Minna von Barnhelm. With notes and introduction by Pro- 
fessor Primer of the University of Texas. 60 cts. 

Lessing's Nathan der Weise. With introduction and notes by Professor 
Primer of the University of Texas. 90 cts. 

Lessing's Emilia Galotti. With introduction and notes by Professor 
Winkler of the University of Michigan. 60 cts. 

Goethe's Sesenheim. From Dichtung und Wahrheit. With notes by 
Professor Huss of Princeton. 25 cts. 

Goethe's Meisterwerke. Sélections in prose and verse, with copious notes 
by Dr. Bernhardt of Washington. #1.25. 

Goethe's Dichtung und Wahrheit. (1-IV.) Edited by Professor C. A. 
Buchheim of King's Collège, London. 90 cts. 

Goethe's Hermann und Dorothea. With notes and introduction by Pro- 
fessor Hewett of Cornell University. 75 cts. 

Goethe's Iphigenie. With introduction and notes by Professor L. A. 
Rhoades of the University of Illinois. 65 cts. 

Goethe's Torquato Tasso. With introduction and notes by Professor 
Thomas of Columbia University. 75 cts. 

Goethe's Faust. Part I. With introduction and notes by Professor Thomas 
of Columbia University. $1.12. 

Goethe's Faust. Part II. With introduction and notes by Professor 
Thomas of Columbia University. $1.50. 

Heine'S Poems. Selected and edited with notes by Professor White of 
Cornell University. 75 cts. 

Walther's Meereskunde. (Scientific German.) Notes and vocabulary 
by S. A. Sterling of the University of Wisconsin. 75 cts. 

Gore's German Science Reader. Introductory reader in Scientific German, 
with notes and vocabulary. 75 cts. 

Hodge's Scientific German. Selected and edited by Professor Hodges, 
formerly of Harvard University. 75 cts. 

Wenckebach's Deutsche Literaturgeschichte. Vol. I (to 1100 a.d) with 
Musterstiicke. 50 cts. 

Wenckebach's Meisterwerke des Mittelalters. Sélections from German 
translations of the masterpieces of the Middle Ages. $1.26. 

Dahn's Ein Kampf um Rom. Abridged and edited with notes by Professor 
Wenckebach of Wellesley Collège. 70 cts. 

Goethe's Poems. Selected and edited by Professor Harris of Adelbert 
Collège. 90 cts. 






■±Pr-26 Ï0O1